Ba Ii

B.A./B.Sc.
Part-II (12+3 System of Education) 1
OUTLINES OF TESTS, SYLLABI AND COURSES

OF READING IN THE VARIOUS SUBJECTS
FOR B.A./B.Sc. PART-II (12+3 SYSTEM OF
EDUCATION) EXAMINATION-2010-11
ENGLISH (COMPULSORY)
Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100
A. Texts Prescribed
1. Gauri by M.R. Anand
2. Moments in Time : An Anthology of Poems, Guru Nanak
Dev University, Amritsar.
3. Murphy's English Grammar (Raymond Murphy), 3rd
Edition, CUP 2004, rept. 2005. (Units : 42-48, 53-68, 98-112)
Instructions for the paper setter/examiner :
Note : The question paper will consist of three sections and
the distribution of marks will be as follows :
Section A : 20 Marks
Section B : 48 Marks
Section C : 32 Marks
Section-A : It will consist of ten (10) questions on usage of grammar
related to units 42-48, 53-68, 98-112 of Murphy's English
Grammar (Reymond Murphy), 3rd Edition, CUP. 2004
rept. 2005. Each question will carry two (2) marks. All
questions will be compulsory.
Section B : It will consist of eleven (11) questions. Students will
be required to attempt eight (8) questions. Each question will
carry 6 marks. The total marks for this section will be 48.
Eight questions (Q. I to VIII) will be set from the two literary
texts (four from Novel and four from Poems). The questions
on literary texts will include two reference to the context
questions on poems. The students will be required to attempt
any five (5), choosing at least two questions from each
2 B.A./B.Sc Part-II (12+3 System of Education)
prescribed text. The questions from literary texts will be

answered in about 15 lines each.
The next three (3) questions (IX-XI) will be set on vocabulary
and composition as given below. All the questions will be
compulsory.
Question IX will be set on the vocabulary introduced in the
two prescribed texts. The question should test meaning and
usage of items glossed in the text.
Question X will be Translation of a short passage from Hindi/
Punjabi to English
OR
Paraphrase of a short poem (only for foreign students who
do not know Punjabi or Hindi).
Question XI will be Comprehension of an unseen prose
passage. Three short questions of 2 marks each shall be
asked on the given passage.
Section-C : It will consist of four questions, each carrying eight
marks. Total marks for this section will be 32.
Question I-III will be set from the two literary texts, atleast
one from each. Each question will have internal choice and
has to be answered in not more than 300 words (two to
three pages). The students will be required to attempt all the
three questions.
Question IV will be writing an essay of about 35050 words
on a given topic (with internal choice).
B.A./B.Sc. Part-II (12+3 System of Education) 3
ENGLISH (ELECTIVE)
Paper-A
Instructions for Paper Setters :
Section-A
1. Five questions, each to be answered in not more than 60
words, will be set from the play, The Merchant of Venice.
Each question will carry 2 marks. The examinees will be
required to answer all the questions. (2x5=10 marks)
2. Five questions, each to be answered in not more than 60
words, will be set from the book, Fresh Showers. Each
question will carry 2 marks. The examinees will be required
to answer all the questions. (2x5=10 marks)
Section-B
1. The examinees will be required to answer 2 questions on
reference to the context out of the three set from the play,
The Merchant of Venice and two questions on reference
to the context out of the three set from the text book, Fresh
Showers. (6x4=24 marks)
2. The examinees will be required to write notes on any four
out of the six literary terms given from those prescribed in
the syllabus. (6x4=24 marks)
Section-C
1. The examinees will be required to answer in 500-600 words,
one essay-type question out of the two set from the play,
The Merchant of Venice. (16 marks)
2. The examinees will be required to answer in 500-600 words,
one essay-type question out of the two set from the textbook
Fresh Showers. (16 marks)
Prescribed Books :
1. The Merchant of Venice by William Shakespeare.
CENGAGE Learning Indian Edition, 2008.
2. Fresh Showers, G.N.D.U. Publication

The Following poems are deleted :
(i) Alexander's Feast (ii) Evelyn Hope (iii) Adam's Curse
(iv) Lay your Sleeping Head (v) A Hub for the Universe
(vi) Birches (vii) Tithonus.
3. Glossary of Literary Terms (eighth edition) by M.H.
Abrams, Wadsworth CENGAGE Learning Publishers.
The following literary terms are prescribed for study:
Biography, Discourse analysis, Dissociation of sensibility,
Dramatic monologue, Expressionism, Formalism, Genres,
Melodrama, Persona, Poetic diction, Realism, Satire, Setting,
Sonnet, Style, Tone and voice, Tragedy, Three unities,
Tragicomedy, Wit and humour.
ENGLISH (ELECTIVE)
Paper-B
Time: 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100
Instructions for Paper Setting :
Section-A will comprise 10 queations. Each question carrying
2 marks, the total weightage of this section will be 20 marks. The
examinees will be required to answer all the questions. The division
of marks and the nature of questions to be set from each text will
be as follows :
1. Five questions, each to be answered in not more than five
sentences, will be set from Modern English Prose.
2. Five questions, each to be answered in a word, a phase, or
anot more than three sentences, will be set from the textbook.
Study Writing. The questions should relate to the task like
identifying a sentence as formal/informal or creating a
definition/developing a statement from a single word/phrase
or giving classification/comparison etc. as suggested in the
tasks given in the textbook, Study Writing.
Section-B will comprise eight questions. Each question
carrying 6 marks, the total weightage of this section will be 48
marks.
1. Six questions will be set from Modern English Prose. The
examinees will be required to answer any 4 questions.
2. Six questions based on the tasks given in the textbook, Study
Writing will be set. The examinees will be required to
answer any 4 questions. These questions will be related to
the tasks such as rewriting a short passage in formal/
academic/objective style by making changes in its grammar
and vocabulary or creating a paragraph from a statement in
the form of definition or classification or identifying and
completing text structure/identifying words, phrases,
sentences that signal evaluation or recommendation etc.,
exploring cohesion and coherence in a given prose passage.
Section-C will comprise 2 questions, each carrying 16 marks.

The total weightage of this section will be 32 marks.
1. Two essay type questions will be set from Modern English
Prose. The examinees will be required to answer any of
the two in 400-600 words.
2. Three topics or statements will be given for writing an essay
in 400-600 words on any one of the topics/statements. The
examinees will be instructed to use academic style, and
appropriate method of development i.e. definition, comparison
and contrast, argument etc. The evaluation of the essay
will be based on the use of appropriate style, method,
strategies etc. as suggested in the textbook, Study Writing.
Books Prescribed
Modern Prose : English and Indian, G.N.D.U. Publication
Study Writing : A Course in Writing Skills for Academic
Purposes by Liz Hamp-Lyons and Ben Heasley, Cambridge
University Press, 2008, (South Asia)
FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH (Vocational)

Paper-A
Writing-Skills
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 100
Theory : 75
Practical : 25
The paper shall consist of 3 Sections.
Section-A carries 16 marks. 2 questions will be set of 8 marks
each testing learner's ability to identify formal, informal
response, and to provide contextual responses to given
expressions.
Section-B carries 35 marks. 7 questions carrying 7 marks each
will be set. Students will be required to attempt any 5
questions. Questions should evaluate the student's ability
to use language according to the given situation/context
and present it in the written mode.
Section-C carries 24 marks. Two questions of 12 marks each will
be set. First question shall be on comprehension of a given
conversation. Second question shall consist of short notes
with internal choice on key concepts like oral or written
communication, difference between dialect and idiolect,
difference between register and style etc.
Course Contents :
Imaginative use of parts of speech.
How to plan paragraph writing. How to change direct into indirect
speech and vice versa.
Sentence connector and cohension.
Substitution and ellipsis.
Sentence Variations and the rewriting of sentences.
Imaginative features of language.
Idioms and phrases.
The objective is to teach the students the technique of writing

and develop their power of expression through composition.
Exercises and Letter-writing, precis and comprehension; paragraph-
rising and expansion; descriptive writing; report writing; script writing
for announcement, comparing should be administered.
Books Recommended :
a) Writing with a Purpose by Tickoo, Champa and
Sasikumar (OUP).
b) Essentials of Grammar and Composition by Legget et.
al., Prentice Hall.
Paper-B
CONVERSATIONAL ENGLISH
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks 100
Theory : 75
Practical : 25
The paper shall consist of 3 Sections.
Section-A carries 16 marks. 2 questions will be set of 8 marks
each testing learner's ability to identify formal, informal
response, and to provide contextual responses to given
expressions.
Section-B carries 35 marks. 7 questions carrying 7 marks each
will be set. Students will be required to attempt any 5
questions. Questions should evaluate the student's ability
to use language according to the given situation/context
and present it in the written mode.
Section-C carries 24 marks. Two questions of 12 marks each will
be set. First question shall be on comprehension of a given
conversation. Second question shall consist of short notes
with internal choice on key concepts like oral or written
communication, difference between dialect and idialect,
difference between register and style etc.
Note : There will be a practical examination of 25 marks. An
external examiner will test communication skills in
specific with the help of an interview or oral test.
Objective : To introduce different social situations and develop
Conversational Skills.
Course Contents :
Language and Society.
Language and Communication
English in situations :- (a) Greetings, (b) In the post office,
(c) At the bank, (d) Buying a dress, (e) At the travel agency,
(f) At the customs, (g) At the International Airport, (h) Booking

a room at a Hotel, (i) Making a telephone call, asking the time
making an apology, receiving-seeing of a guest, (j) At the Chemist,
At the doctor, (k) At a Dinner Party, At the Restaurant; at the
coffee bar, (l) Making an appointment, At the ladies' hairdresser,
At the hospital (m) Buying a Theatre Ticket.
Field Work :
Visit to various places offering different situations and
practising conversation in actual situations. Students should be able
to relate the situations in dialogues.
Books Recommended:
(i) Spoken English with Cassette by Sasikumar and
Dhanuja.
(ii) A Course in Listening and Speaking-I by Sasikumar
et.al.
On The Job Training :
To get apprenticeship training in conversational English for
one month. (Students can work in Bank, Hotels, Computer Centres,
Air Lines Offices etc.)
pµj`bI (l`zmI)
sm~ : 3 GMty k@ul EMk : 100
1. kìv kIrqI-hirBjn isMG,
gurU n`nk dyv wUnIvristI, EMimRqsr, 2007.
2. E`Duink iek~gI
(sMp`. rOSn l`l EhUj` Eqy mnjIqp`l kOr),
3. sMKyp rcn` (pRYsI)
4. d&qrI ic@TI-p@qr
5. ivE`krx :
(a) mUL ivE`krx iekèIE~ dI pC`x Eqy sQ`pqI
(E) v`k bxqr Eqy v`k rcn`
(e) aupv`k bxqr : pC`x Eqy k`rj
(s) Sbd joV~ dy inwm
(h) gurmu@KI il@pI dIE` ivSySq`v~
EMk vMf qy pypr sYtr~ leI hdìeq~
1. iksy ie@k kivq` d` ivSY vsqU/s`r (do iv@coN ie@k) 20 EMk
2. iksy ie@k ie@k~gI d` ivSY vsqU/s`r (do iv@coN ie@k)
j~ c`r iv@coN do p`qr~ dI p`qr-aus`rI 20 EMk
3. sMKyp rcn` (pRYsI) 10 EMk
4. d&qrI ic@TI-p@qr (do iv@coN ie@k) 10 EMk
5. nMbr 5 auqy inrD`rq ivE`krx iv@coN 20 EMk
vrxn`qimk pRSn
6. auprokq lVI nMbr 1 Eqy 2 dIE~ pusqk~ ivcoN sMKyp au u#qr~
v`ly 10 pRSn pu@Cy j`xgy| hryk d` au#qr 50 Sbd~ qoN v@D n`
hovy| 10x2=20 EMk
pµj`bI (ieLYkitv)
prc`-ey
sm~: 3 GMty k@ul EMk : 100
1. m@Dk`lI pMj`bI kìv (1701 qoN 1900) 40 EMk
(sMp`.) hrijMdr isMG iF@loN Eqy nrjIq isMG Kihr`,
2. kQ` kh`xI
(sMp`.) f`. rGbIr isMG Eqy pRo. drb`r` isMG, 30 EMk
pMj`bI wUnIvristI, pitE`l`|
3. siBE`c`r Eqy pMj`bI siBE`c`r (inbMD sMgiR h) 30 EMk
(sMp`.) f`. rxjIq isMG b`jv` Eqy ipRMsIpl vIr isMG rMD`v`,
wUint Eqy QIm
1. m@Dk`lI pMj`bI kìv (1701 qoN 1900) 10+10=20 EMk
(a) pRsMg sihq ivEìKE` (c`r iv@coN do)
(E) iksy kivq` d` ivSY vsqU/kvI b`ry j`xk`rI Eqy ausd`
wogd`n (do iv@coN ie@k) 10 EMk
(e) mltIpl cox pRSn 5x2=10 EMk
2. kQ` kh`xI
iksy iek kh`xI d` ivSY-vsqU/kl`, kh`xIk`r b`ry j`xk`rI
Eqy ausd` wogd`n (do iv@coN ie@k) 20 EMk
3. siBE`c`r Eqy pMj`bI siBE`c`r (inbMD sMgRih) iksy iek
lyK d` ivSY/s`r/SYlI (do ivcoN iek) 20 EMk
4. kQ` kh`xI Eqy siBE`c`r Eqy pMj`bI siBE`c`r pusqk~
iv@coN p`T E`Dìrq sMKyp auu#qr~ v`ly pRSn (Cy iv@coN c`r)
4x5=20 EMk
pM j `bI (ielY k itv)

prc`-bI
sm~: 3 GMty k@ul EMk : 100
1. pMj`bI sìhq d` ieiqh`s (1701 qoN 1900)
(sMp`.) f`.rqn isMG j@gI, pµj`bI wUnIvristI, pitE`l`,
1992.
(a) sìhqk rUp, D`r`v~ Eqy pRivrqIE~
E) sìhqk rUp~ dy smu@cy ivk`s b`ry pRSn pu@Cy j`xgy|
(ivEkqIgq sìhqk`r sMbMDI pRSn nhIN pu@iCE` j`vyg`)
auprokq doh~ B`g~ ivcoN do-do pRSn pu@Cy j`xgy, ijnH~
iv@@coN prIiKE`rQIE~ ny ie@k-ie@k pRSn h@l krn` hovyg`|
20+20=40 EMk
2. (a) 1. id@qy pYrHy ivcoN Sbd-joV~ dI suDèI 5 EMk
2. id@qy pYrHy nUM ivSr`m icMnH làuxy| 5 EMk
(E) E`locn`-pRx`lI n`l sMbMiDq 10 mUl sMklp :
ibMb, pRqIk, ElMk`r, SYLI, imQ, kQ`nk, p`qr-aus`rI,
rUp qy vsqU, Enukrx, ivrycx (c`r iv@coN do)
5+5=10 EMk
3. sìhq rUp : v`r, jMgn`m`, ik@s`, k`&I, jnms`KI, in@kI
kh`xI : pirB`S`, pRikrqI Eqy q@q (iqMn iv@coN do)
10+10=20 EMk
4. pMj`bI B`S` Eqy gurmuKI il@pI : mu@FlI j`xk`rI (do iv@coN
ie@k) 20 EMk
k`rjI pM j `bI
ku@l EMk=100
prc`-ey = ilKx SY l IE~ 50 EM k
prc`-bI =rsmI ilKq~ 50 EM k
pR w o j n :
1. pMj`bI B`S` dI ivE`krnk bxqr n`l j`x-pC`x
2. pMj`bI B`S` dy rijstr~ sMbMDI j`x-pC`x
3. pR`pq ilKx SYlIE~ n`l j`x pC`x kràux` Eqy rsmI p@Dr
'qy ilKx d` EiBE`s kràux`|
sm~ : 3 GMty k@ul EMk : 50

1. pMj`bI B`S` dy rijstr~ sbMDI j`x-pC`x : sìhqk B`S`,
aupB`S`, ivEkqI B`S`, ipijn qy kirAl, bx`vtI B`S`|
20 EMk
2. s`D`rx v`k~ nUM sMwukq Eqy imSrq v`k~ ivc bdlx` :
isD~q Eqy EmlI vrqoN (G@to-G@t 50 EiBE`s kràuxy)
15 EMk
3. irporitMg krn` : sm`c`r ilKx dI ivDI Eqy q@q, sm`c`r~
dy pRk`r, sMKyp krn` qy ivEìKE` krnI| 15 EMk
k`rjI pµ j `bI
prc` ey : pR Y k tIkl
sm~ : 2 GMty ku l EM k : 50
(pRYktIkl prcy iv@c ividE`rQIE~ dI suxn-smJx-ilKx
wogq` dI pRIiKE` leI j`vygI)
B`S` pRwogS`l` ivc EiBE`s krn` :
a) pMj`bI dy aup-B`SèI auc`rn nUM sux ky irport iqE`r krnI|
E) suxy gey Sbd~ dy E`D`r 'qy s`D`rx qy sMwukq v`k isrjxy|
e) B`Sx nUM sux ky sMKyp rUp iqE`r krn`|
s) irk`rf kIqIE~ ^br~ nUM sux ky ilKx`|
k`rjI pM j `bI
prc` bI : iQaU r I
sm~ : 3 GMty ku @ l EM k : 50
1. k`rjI B`S`--d&qrI B`S`, ieSiqh`rI B`S` | 10 EMk
2. PèIl~ qy noitMg dyx dI ivDI, ic@TI p@qr ilKx dy pRk`r :
d&qrI, pirv`rk Eqy sm`jI| 20 EMk
3. rsmI p@qr ivh`r, EYkspRYs p@qr, q`r, d&qrI E`dyS,
d&qrI sUcn`, pRYs not Eìd| 20 Eµk
k`rjI pM j `bI
prc` bI : pR Y k tIkl
sm~ : 2 GMty k@ u l EM k : 50
(pRYktIkl prcy ivc ividE`rQIE~ dI ivigE`pn, noitMg
Eqy notIiPkySn ilKx dI smrQ` dI pRIiKE` leI j`vygI)
a) ivigE`pn isrjx` : in@q vrqoN dIE~ 50 vsq~ dy ky aunH~ dy

ivigE`pn ilKx Eqy bolx d` EiBE`s B`S`-pRwogS`l`
iv@c krvàux`|
E) d&qr~ nUM ilKy p@qr nUM sm@grI bx` ky noitMg dyx d` EiBE`s
krvàux` (30 p@qr)
e) &èIl~ dy E`D`r 'qy E`rfr/notIi&kySn ilKx d` EiBE`s
krvàux`|
EmlI is@ i KE`
iksy srk`rI/ErD srk`rI/ZYr srk`rI Ed`ry ivc EmlI
qOr 'qy iqMn h&qy dI isKlèI pR`pq krnI hovygI Eqy ies dI pRojYkt
irport iqE`r krnI zrUrI hovygI|
PUNJAB HISTORY AND CULTURE

(1000 to 1849 A.D.)
(Special Paper in lieu of Punjabi) (Compulsory)
(Common-for B.A./B.Sc. Part II)
Total Teaching Periods: 75
Note:- Each question paper shall consist of two sections viz

A and B as under:-
Section A:
The examiner shall set 10 questions and the candidates will
attempt any 7 questions carrying 4 marks each. Answer to each
question shall be in 10 to 15 sentences. The total weightage of this
section shall be 28 marks.
Section B:
The examiner shall set 8 questions which will cover the entire
syllabus. The candidates shall attempt any 4 questions in atleast 5
pages. Each question shall carry 18 marks. The total weightage of
this section shall be 72 marks.
1. The Punjab under Turko-Afghan Sultans.
2. The Punjab under the Great Mughals.
3. Salient features of the Bhakti Movement and Sufism in the
Punjab.
4. Guru Nanak Dev's teachings and impact on society.
5. Development of Sikhism (1539-1606) with special
reference to Sangat, Masand System, Compilation of Adi
Granth and Martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev.
6. Martyrdom of Guru Teg Bahadur: Foundation of Khalsa by
Guru Gobind Singh.
7. Banda Bahadur and his achievements.

8. Sikh struggle for sovereignty in the Punjab, 1716 to 1799.
9. Ranjit Singh's Rise to power, his civil and military
administrations and relations with the British.
10. The Anglo-Sikh Wars and Annexation of the Punjab.
11. Development of Punjabi Language and Literature, classical
writings and famous legends of the Punjab.
12. Social life with special reference to position of women, fairs,
festivals, folk music, dances and games in the Punjab.
Suggested Readings :
1. Kirpal Singh (ed.) History and Culture of the Punjab,
Part-II, Patiala,1990 (3rd edition).
2. Fauja Singh (ed.) History of the Punjab, Vol. III, Patiala,
1972.
3. G. S. Chabra: The Advanced History of the Punjab,
Vol. 1.
4. J.S.Grewal : The Sikhs of the Punjab, The New
Cambridge History of India, Cambridge, 1991.
Sanskrit (Elective)
Paper—A
¼x| dkO; rFkk egkdkO;½
(Teaching—Six Periods per week)
Time : 3 Hours M.M. 100
iz'u&iz=k dk ek/;e fgUnh gksxkA mÙkj laLÑr@fgUnh@iatkch@vaxt sz h+ esa
gks ldrs gSAa
I. fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe %
1- fgrks i ns ' k ¼ukjk;.kif.Mr½ % lq â n~ H ks n pkS [ kEck lq j Hkkjrh
izdk'ku]okjk.klh] 1990- 25 vad
2- dknEcjh ¼ck.k½ % 'kqduklksins'k Hkkjrh; fo|k izdk'ku] fnYyh]
2003- 40 vad
3- dqekj lEHko ¼dkfynkl½&iape lxZ 35 vad
II. iz'ui=k fuekZ.k funsZ'k%
iz'u&i=k ds 3 Hkkx gksaxs&
izFke Hkkx&20 vad
f}rh; Hkkx&50 vad
r`rh; Hkkx&30 vad
1- izFke Hkkx %
'kqduklksins'k ls 5 iz'u rFkk dqekj lEHko ds iapelxZ ls 5 iz'u
vFkkrZ dqy 10 iz'u vfrlaf{kIr mÙkjksa ds fy;s iwNs tk;saxsA izR;sd
iz'u ds 2 vad gksaxsA 10x2¾20
2- f}rh; Hkkx %
¼d½ 'kqduklksins'k ls 4 x|ka'k nsdj 2 ds ljykFkZ iwNs tk,axsA
izR;sd ds 10 vad gksaxsA 2x10¾20
¼[k½ dqekj lEHko ds iape lxZ ls 4 i| nsdj 2 dh lizlax O;k[;k
iwNh tk,aA izR;sd ds 7 vad gSaA 2x7½+¾15
¼x½ (i) lqân~Hksn ls 2 x|ka'k nsdj ,d dk lizlax ljykFkZ
iwNk tk,xkA blds 5 vad gksaxsA 1x5¾5
(ii) lqân~Hksn ls 2 x|ka'k i| nsdj ,d dh lizlax O;k[;k iwNh tk,xhA

blds 10 vad gksaxsA 1x10=10
3- r`rh; Hkkx %
¼d½ 'kqduklksins'k ds fu/kkZfjr va'k ls lEcfU/kr 2 iz'u nsdj ,d dk
mÙkj iwNk tk,xkA blds 10 vad gksaxsA 1x10=10
¼[k½ lqân~Hksn ls 2 dFkkvksa dk uke nsdj ,d dk lkj ,oa f'k{kk iwNh
tk,xhA blds 10 vad gksaxsA 1x10=10
¼x½ dqekjlEHko ¼iape lxZ½ ls lEc) 2 iz'u nsdj ,d dk mÙkj iwNk
tk,xkA blds 10 vad gkssaxsA 1x10=10
III. uksV %&r`rh; Hkkx ds fy, lEHkkfor fcUnq %
1- 'kqduklksins'k
¼d½ 'kqduklksins'k dk lkj
¼[k½ ik=k fp=k.k
¼x½ x| 'kSyh
¼?k½ y{eh dk Lo:i
¼³½ 'kqduklksins'k dk egRo
¼p½ xzUFkdkj dk laf{kIr ifjp;
¼N½ x| dkO; dh fo'ks"krk;sa
-----bR;kfnA
2- dqekj lEHko ¼iape lxZ½
¼d½ dFkk lkjA
¼[k½ ik=k fp=k.k
¼x½ izÑfrfp=k.k
¼?k½ 'kSyh
¼³½ czãpkjh&laokn oSf'k"V~;
----bR;kfnA
SANSKRIT (Elective)
Paper—B ¼O;kdj.k rFkk vuqokn½

(Teaching—Six Periods per week)
Time : 3 Hours M.M. 100
iz'u&iz=k dk ek/;e fgUnh gksxkA mÙkj laLÑr@fgUnh@iatkch@vaxzst+h esa gks
ldrs gSaA
I. fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe %
1- O;×tu lfU/k 10 vad
2- lekl ¼}U}] rRiq#"k½ 10 vad
3- 'kCn :i 20 vad
¼d½ nso] eqfu] unh] jek] xq#] /ksuq] dr`~Z] L=kh] okp] txr]
Hkor~] _fRot~] nf/k] eul~] iqal~] egr~] lqân~] ;qou~]
pUnzel~] fo}l~A
¼[k½ ;fr] dfr] ;q"en~] vLen~A
¼x½ bne~] vnl~] rn~] ,rn~] ;n~] fde~ ¼rhuksa fyaxksa esa½A
4- /kkrq:i ¼yV~] yksV] y`V~] y³~] fof/kfy³~ ydkjksa esa½ 20 vad
¼d½ Hokfnx.k&j{k~] yHk~A
¼[k½ vknkfnx.k&vl~A
¼x½ rqnkfnx.k&rqn~] flp~] izP{k~] eqp~] fey~A
¼?k½ #/kkfnx.k&fHkn~] fNn~A
¼³½ rukfnx.k&ru~] dÀ
¼p½ Ø~;kfnx.k&Øh] xzg~] KkA
¼N½ pqjkfnx.k&pqj~] dFk~] Hk{k~] r`y~] fpUr~] jp~A
5- ¼d½ rf)r izR;; 10 vad
v.k~] erqi~] Ro] ry~] befup~] e;V~ ]rji~] rei~A
6- okP; ifjorZu ¼yV~ ydkj esa½ 5 vad
7- L=kh izR;; 5 vad
8- NUn 10 vad
vuq"Vqi~] oa'kLFk] bUnzotzk] misUnzotzk] mitkfr] f'k[kfj.kh]
eUnkØkUrk] ekfyuh] fo|qUekyk] 'kknwZy foØhfMr] olUr
frydkA
9- laLÑr esa vuqokn 10 vad
II. iz'u fuekZ.k funsZ'k%
iz'u iz=k ds 3 Hkkx gksaxs&

izFke Hkkx&20 vad
f}rh; Hkkx&60 vad
r`rh; Hkkx&20 vad
1- izFke Hkkx %
blesa O;×tu lfU/k ls lfU/k@lfU/k foPNsn ij vk/kkfjr 5 iz'u rFkk
leklksa ls leLrin dk foxzg o lekl&uke ij vk/kkfjr 5 iz'u vFkkZr~ dqy
10 iz'u iwNs tk;saxsA izR;sd ds 2 vad gSaA 10x2=20
2- f}rh; Hkkx %
¼d½ 8 'kCn nsdj 4 ds :i iwNs tk,axsA izR;sd ds 5 vad gksaxsA
4x5=20
¼[k½ 8 /kkrq nsdj 4 ds :i fy[kus ds fy, dgk tk,aA izR;sd /kkrq ds :ik ds
fy, 5 vad gSaA 4x5=20
¼x½ 10 'kCnksa ds lkFk fu/kkZfjr rf)r izR;; nsdj 5 ds rf)rkUr :i
fy[kok;s tk;saxsA izR;sd rf)rkUr 'kCn ds 2 vad gksaxsA 5x2x10
¼?k½ 4 okD; nsdj 2 dk okP; ifjorZu iwNk tk,xkA
izR;sd ds 2½ vad gksaxsA 2½ +2½=5
³½ 10 'kCnksa ds lkFk L=kh izR;; nsdj 5 dk L=kh izR;; :i fy[kok;k
tk,xkA izR;sd dk 1 vad gksxkA 5x1=5
3- r`rh; Hkkx %
¼d½ 4 NUn nsdj 2 iwNs tk,axsA izR;sd ds 2 vad gksaxsA
vFkok
fu/kkZfjr fHkUu fHkUu NUnksa okys 4 'yksdka'k nsdj 2 ds NUnksa dk
Li"Vhdj.k iwNk tk,xkA izR;sd ds 5 vad gksaxsA 2x5=10
¼[k½ fgUnh esa ljy o y?kq okD;ksa okys 2 x|ka'k nsdj ,d dk laLÑr esa
vuqokn iwNk tk,xkA blds 10 vad gksaxsA 1x10=10
SANSKRIT (Vocational)
Paper - I
Part-A
In this part 10 Objective type/Short Answer questions
carrying 2 marks each will be set. All questions will be compulsory.
Marks : 20
Part-B
In this part 12 Questions carrying 6 marks each will be set.
The candidates will have to attempt only 8 questions out of these
12 questions.
Marks : 48
Part-C
In this part 4 questions carrying 16 marks each will be set.
The candidates will have to attempt only 2 questions out of these 4
questions.
Marks : 32
Note:The question Paper will be set in Hindi.

SANSKRIT (Vocational)
Paper - II
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks :Total : 100
(Theory) : 84
(Practical) : 16
Part-A
In this part 10 Objective type/Short Answer questions carrying 2
marks each will be set. All questions will be compulsory.
Marks : 20
Part-B
In this part 12 Questions carrying 6 marks each will be set. The
candidates will have to attempt only 8 questions out of these 12
questions. Marks : 48
Part-C
In this part 4 questions carrying 16 marks each will be set. The
candidates will have to attempt only 2 questions out of these 4
questions. Max. Marks : 32
16 (Written) + 16 (Practical) = 32
Note:
1. There will be a practical examination of 16 marks to
fulfil the U.G.C. requirement.
2. The question paper will be set in Hindi.
iz'u i=k&izFke iz'u iz=k&f}rh;
1- vuoyh ute~ vuoyksHkue~ 1- 'kolkajfo/k;%
2- lhÙkksu;ue~ 2- Jn`Hksn%
3- tkrdeZ 3- Jn`dky
4- uked~j.ke~ 4- lfi.MhIdj.ke~%
5- d.kZos/k 5- Jn`fodkfj.k%
6- vUuizk'kue~ 6- Hkkjrh; oLrq 'kkL=k ifjp;%
7- pqMkdeZ 7- x`gfuekZ.kfof/k%
8- fo/kkjEe~ 8- x`gizos'k
9- miu;ue~s 9- okLrq 'kkfUr%
10- lekorZues 10- x`gLFk/kekZ
11- fookg 12- vUR;sf"kV%
13- vijdekZf.k
fgUnh
isij % ,s
e/;;qxhu dkO; ,oa bfrgkl rFkk dkO;kax
le;% rhu ?k.Vs dqy vad % 100
uksV % ;g iz'u&iz=k rhu Hkkxksa esa foHkDr gSA
[k.M&,d
bl Hkkx esa ls 10 iz'u iwNs tk,axsA bl dk ikap iafDr;ksa esa mÙrj
nsuk gksxkA bl Hkkx ds lHkh iz'u vfuok;Z gSA izR;sd iz'u nks vadksa
dk gSA dqy vad 20
[k.M&nks
bl Hkkx esa 12 iz'u iwNs tk,axs ftuesa ls 8 iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk
vfuok;Z gksxkA izR;sd iz'u dk mÙkj nks i`"Bksa rd lhfer gksxkA
izR;sd iz'u ds N% vad gSA dqy vad 48
[k.M&rhu
bl Hkkx esa pkj iz'u iwNs tk,axs ftuesa ls nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk
vfuok;Z gSA izR;sd iz'u dk mÙkj ikap i`"Bksa dk gksxkA izR;sd iz'u
lksyg vadksa dk gksxkA dqy vad 32
fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe
ikB~;&iqLrdsa %
1- dkO;&xfjek] lEiknd MkWŒ gjegsUnz flag csnh] izdk'kd % xq# ukud
nso ;wfuoflZVh] ve`rljA
2- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl] izdk'kd% xq# ukud nso ;wfuoflZVh]
ve`rljA
& fgUnh lkfgR; ds vkfndky vkSj HkfDr dky dk v/;;u visf{kr
gSaA rRlEcU/kh izeq[k ifj{ks=k&vkfndky ifjfLFkfr;ka] fo'ks"krk,a]
ukedj.k] dky foHkktukfnA
HkfDrdky&ukedj.k] dky foHkktu] ifjfLFkfr;ka] fo'ks"krk,aA
3-vyadkj&fu#i.k rFkk eqgkojs] yksdksfDr;kaA

& vuqizkl];ed] miek] :id] izrhd] fojks/kkHkkl ¼N% vyadkj½ dk
lksnkgj.k ifjp;A
& fdUgh 2 eqgkojksa rFkk 2 yksdksfDr;ksa dk vFkZ vkSj okD; iz;ksxA
fc";kuqdwy foHkktu %
1- izFke [k.M esa pkj izFke iz'u vyadkjksa rFkk eqgkojksa] yksdksfDr;ksa
ls djus gksasxsA 'ks"k esa vk/ks iz'u ikB~; iqLrd rFkk vk/ks iz'u
lkfgR;sfrgkl ls gksaxsA
2- nqljs [k.M esa pkj iz'u lizlax O;k[;kvksa ds gksaxs ftuesa ls nks
iz'u vfuok;Z gSaA nks iz'u vyadkj vkfn ls rFkk 'ks"k iz'uksa esa ls rhu
iz'u lkfgR;sfrgkl ls rFkk rhu dfo rFkk dforkvksa ls lEcf)r
gksaxsA
3- r`rh; [k.M esa nks iz'u dfo] ,ao dforkvksa ds ewY;kadu rFkk
lkfgR;sfrgkl ls gksaxsA
fgUnh
isij % ch
miU;kl] ukVd rFkk lS)kfUrdh
le;% rhu ?k.Vs dqy % 100
uksV % ;g iz'u&iz=k rhu Hkkxksa esa foHkDr gksxkA
[k.M&,d
bl Hkkx esa ls 10 iz'u iwNs tk,axsA bl dk ikap iafDr;ksa esa mÙrj
nsuk gksxkA bl Hkkx ds lHkh iz'u vfuok;Z gSA izR;sd iz'u nks vad
dk gSA dqy vad 20
[k.M&nks
bl Hkkx esa 12 iz'u iwNs tk,axs ftuesa ls 8 iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk
vfuok;Z gksxkA izR;sd dk mÙkj nks i`"Bksa rd lhfer gksxkA izR;sd
iz'u ds N% vad gSA dqy vad 48
[k.M&rhu
bl Hkkx esa pkj iz'u iwNs tk,axs ftuesa ls nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk
vfuok;Z gSA izR;sd iz'u dk mÙkj ikap i`"Bksa dk gksxkA izR;sd iz'u
lksyg vadksa dk gksxkA dqy vad 32
fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe
vferk µ¼,sfrgkfld miU;kl½ % ;'kiky
dks.kkdZ ¼ukVd½ % txnh'kpanz
lS)kafrdh
miU;kl] rFkk ukVd dh ifjHkk"kk] Lo#i% rRo] izdkj
vad foHkktu%&
1- izFke [k.M esa vk/ks iz'u lS)kfUrdh ls vkSj vk/ks iz'u ikB~; iqLrdksa
ls gksaxsA
2- nwljs [k.M esa ls pkj iz'u lS)kfUrdh lEcU/kh( pkj O;k[;k lEcU/kh
rFkk 'ks"k pkj iz'u ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr iqLrdksa ls gksaxsA iqlrdksa
ls laca/kh iz'u dF;] f'kYi] ik=kksa jaxeap rFkk vfHkus;rk laca/kh
gksaxsA izR;sd [k.M esa ls nks nks iz'u djus vfuok;Z gSA
3- rhljs [k.M esa nks iz'u lS)kfUrdh rFkk nks ikB~; iqLrdksa ls gksxa As buesa
ys[kdksa ds lkfgR; ds ewY;kadu] egRo] ifrik|] rFkk ukVd vkSj miU;kl
fo/kkvksa ds rRo vkfn ij iz'u ¼ikB~; iqLrdksa ds lanHkZ es½a iwNs tk,axAs
QaD'kuy fgUnh
isij&,d
fVIi.kh] izk:i ys[ku] O;kolkf;d i=kpkj vkSj
HkfDrdkyhu fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl
le;% rhu ?k.Vs iw.kkZad % 100 ¼80$20½
uksV %
d½ ;g iz'uiz=k rhu Hkkxksa esa caVk gqvk gSA igys Hkkx esa ls nl iz'u iwNs
tk,axsA bl Hkkx ds lHkh iz'u vfuok;Z gSA izR;sd iz'u nks vadksa dk
gSA dqy vad 20
[k½ bl Hkkx esa ckjg iz'u iwNs tk,axs ftuesa ls vkB iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsus
gaS izR;sd iz'u 100 'kCnksa rd dh lhek dk gksxkA izR;sd iz'u ds
ikap vad gksxsA dqy vad 40
x½ bl Hkkx esa pkj iz'u iwNs tk,axs ftuesa ls nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk
vfuok;Z gSA izR;sd iz'u dk mÙkj ikap i`"Bksa vFkok ,d gtkj 'kCnksa
rd lhfer gksxkA izR;sd iz'u ds 10 vad gksaxsA dqy vad 20
?k½ izkstSDV&izkstSDV ds fo"k; dh LohÑfr xq# ukud nso fo'ofo|ky;
ds fgUnh foHkkx ds v/;{k ls fyf[kr :i esa ysuh gksxhA izkstSDV dh
jiV dh rhu izfr;ka ¼Vafdr½ fo'ofo|ky; ds fgUnh foHkkx esa okf"kZd
ijh{kk ls nks lIrkg iwoZ Hkstuh gksaxhA dqy vad 10
ekSf[kdh&ekSf[kd ijh{kk dh lfefr esa fo'ofo|ky; dk v/;{k@v/;{k dh
rjQ ls uketn izksQslj rFkk dkyst dk foHkkxk?;{k gksaxsA
dqy vad 10
fl)kUr% &
¼d½ fVIi.kh izk#i ys[ku
lkekU; ifjp;
1- fVIi.kh % fVIi.kh esa iz;qDr Hkk"kk vkSj 'kSyhA
2- izdj.k ¼dsl½ O;kSjk ¼fgLVjh½
3- vk{kfjd iphZ (Flagging of reference)
4- dsl rS;kj djuk

5- ifj.kke rd igqapuk vkSj dk;Zokgh dh izLrkouk
6- fVIi.kh dh fo'ks"krk,a@y{k.k vkSj blesa iz;qDr dh tkus okyh
vko';d vkSikpkfjdrkA
¼[k½ okf.kT; vkSj O;kolkf;d i=kpkj
1- okf.kT; (Commercial) vkSj O;kolkf;d (Business) dk
i=kpkjksa dk Lo:i
2- dk;kZy;] okf.kT; vkSj O;kolkf;d i=kksa esa vUrj
3- izLrko&i=k (Letters of Offer)
4- Hkko&nj&lwph (Quotations)
5- ctd@fo/ks;d (Invoice/Bills)
6- jlhnsa (Receipts)
7- vkns'k&i=k (Letters of Placing Orders)
8- Hkqxrku&lwpuk (Advice of Payments)
9- cSad esa ysu&nsu lEcU/kh i=k (Letters regarding Banking
Transactions)
10- okf.kT; vkSj O;kolkf;d i=kksa dh 'kCnkoyh
11- foKkiu% ifjp; vkSj izdk'kukf/kdkj] {ks=k] laHkkouk] Hkk"kk vkSj
egRo
12- foKkiu esa okD;ka'k@in dk izHkko vkSj egRo
13- lQy izdk'kukf/kdkjh ds xq.k
¼x½ fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl%
1- fgUnh lkfgR; ds HkfDrdky dh fo'ks"krk,a
iz;ksx %&
1- fn;s x, fo"k;ksa ij mPp vf/kdkfj;ksa ds lkeus fofHkUu izdkj ds
dsl izLrqr djus dk vH;klA
2- miyC?k foKkiuksa dks ,df=kr djuk vkSj mudk vuqokn

foHkktu %
1- izFke [k.M esa okf.kT; vkSj O;kolk; ds Øekad 3 ls 10 rd esa iz'u
iwNs tk,axsA
2- f}rh; [k.M esa fVIi.kh] izk:iys[ku vkSj foKkiu {ks=kksa esa ls iz'u
iwNs tk,axsA
3- r`rh; [k.M esa okf.kT; rFkk O;kolkf;d i=kpkj Øekad 1] 2 rFkk
fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl ij iz'u iwNs tk,axsA
ifj;kstuk %&
10 ls 12 i`"Bksa dk izkstSDV rS;kj djuk gksxkA 10 vad
ekSf[kdh 10 vad
lUnHkZ iqLrdsa %
1- fVIi.kh rFkk izwQiBu vkse izdk'k flagy] ihrkacj ifCyf'kax]
888&bZLV ikdzZ jksM] ubZ fnYyh] 110005-
2- O;kogkfjd fgUnh Hkkx&2] vkseizdk'k flagy] ihrkacj ifCyf'kax]
888&bZLV ikdzZ jksM] ubZ fnYyh] 110005-
3- O;kogkfjd fgUnh] MkŒ egsUnz feÙky] 'kkcjh laLFkku] 12@180 vk;Z
/keZ fcfYMax] fcykZ ykbUl] fnYyh&110007-
4- izkxkf.kd vkys[ku o fVIi.kh fcjkt ,e-,- jktiky ,.M lat]
dk'ehjh xsV] fnYyh&110006-
5- fgUnh lkfgR; dk bfrgkl] oklqnso 'kekZ vxzoky lw;Z izdk'ku] ubZ
lM+d] fnYyhA
QaD'kuy fgUnh
isij&nks] fuoZpu vkSj izSl foKfIr
(Interpretation and Press Communiques)
le;% rhu ?k.Vs iw.kk±d % 100 ¼80$20½
uksV %
d½ ;g iz'uiz=k rhu Hkkxksa esa caVk gqvk gSA igys Hkkx esa ls nl iz'u iwNs
tk,axsA bl Hkkx ds lHkh iz'u vfuok;Z gSA izR;sd iz'u nks vadksa dk
gSA dqy vad 20
[k½ bl Hkkx esa ckjg iz'u iwNs tk,axs ftuesa ls vkB iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk
gSA bu iz'uksa dk mÙkj nks i`"Bksa esa nsuk gksxkA vFkok nks lkS 'kCnksa
rd dh lhek dk gksxkA izR;sd iz'u ikap vad dk gSA
dqy vad 40
x½ bl Hkkx esa pkj iz'u iwNs tk,axs ftuesa ls nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk
vfuok;Z gSA ftuesa ls nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj ikap i`"Bksa vFkok ,d
gtkj 'kCnksa rd lhfer gksxkA izR;sd iz'u 10 vad dk gksxkA
dqy vad 20
?k½ izkstSDV&izkstSDV ds fo"k; dh LohÑfr xq# ukud nso fo'ofo|ky;
ds fgUnh foHkkx ds v/;{k ls fyf[kr :i esa ysuh gksxhA izkstSDV dh
jiV dh rhu izfr;ka ¼Vafdr½ fo'ofo|ky; ds fgUnh foHkkx esa okf"kZd
ijh{kk ls nks lIrkg iwoZ Hkstuh gksaxhA dqy vad 10
ekSf[kdh&ekSf[kd ijh{kk dh lfefr esa fo'ofo|ky; dk v/;{k@v/;{k dh
rjQ ls uketn izksQslj rFkk dkyst dk foHkkxk?;{k gksaxsA
dqy vad 10
fl)kUr %&
¼d½ fuoZpu (Interpretation)
1- fuoZpu D;k gS\
2- fuoZpu% {ks=k laHkkouk] Hkwfedk
3- nqHkkf"k;k% xq.k vkSj mÙkjnkf;Ro
4- fuoZpu% lkjka'k vkSj Li"Vhdj.k
5- Hkk"kk ij vf?kdkj ¼vaxzsth&fgUnh vkSj {ks=kh; Hkk"kk,a½
6- nqHkkf"k, vkSj vuqoknd esa vUrj
7- vk'kq&Hkk"kkarj.k vuqokn ¼vuqO;k[;k½
8- laiknu
9- cSBdksa ¼lHkkvksa½ vkSj okn&fookn ds fu"d"kZ dh O;k[;k
10- Hkk"k.k dk lans'k vkSj O;k[;kuksa dk lkj
¼[k½ izSl foKfIr (Press Communiques)
1- izSl foKfIr% ifjp;] vo/kkj.kk Lo:i vkSj {ks=k
2- izSl izdk'kuh (Press release) dh eq[; fo"k; oLrq
3- lkjka'k
4- izSl foKfIr% Hkk"kk 'kSyh
5- izSl foKfIr% 'kCnkoyh
6- iqufoZyksdu (Review) vkSj laiknu (Editing)
7- izSl izdk'kuh tkjh djus dk vf/kdkjh
8- dojst (Coverage)
9- izSl fjiksZV&Hkk"kk vkSj 'kSyh
10- izSl&fjiksVZ djuk (Draft Report)
11- izwQ jhfMax
¼x½ eq[; lekpkj i=k% ifjp; vkSj bfrgkl

iz;ksx%
1- nqfu;k fo"k;ksa ij lewgokj cgl vkSj mudh O;k[;k
2- vk'kq&Hkk"kkarj.k (Extempore) vuqokn dk vH;kl
3- Hkk"kkvksa] O;k[;kuksa vkSj izksxzkeksa dk lans'k igqapus dk vH;kl
4- izSl dk fgUnh&dFku@ikB (Version) rS;kj djuk] lekpkj en
vkfn ¼vaxzsth lekpkj i=kksa esa izdkf'kr½
5- izSl&izdk'ku fo"k;ksa ds funsZ'ku rS;kj djukA
foHkktu %
¼d½ fuoZpu rFkk izSl foKfIr esa ls iz'u iwNs tk,axsA
¼[k½ fuoZpu 1 ls 4 rd esa iz'u iwNs tk,axsA
izSl foKfIr ls 1 ls 2 rd iz'u iwNs tk,axsA
iatkc ds lekpkj i=k%& ifjp; vkSj bfrgkl laca/kh iz'u iwNs
tk,axsA
ifj;kstuk%
10 ls 12 i`"Bksa dk izkstSDV rS;kj djuk gkssxkA
dqy vad 10
ekSf[kdh dqy vad 10
lUnHkZ iqLrdsa %&
1- if=kdk laiknu dyk] jkepUnz frokjh] vkys[k izdk'ku] ubZ fnYyhA
2- lekpkj i=k O;oLFkkiu] vuar xksiys 'ksoMs] e/;izns'k] fgUnh xzaFk
vdkneh] HkksikyA
RUSSIAN
Paper - A (Written)
Time: 3 Hours M.Marks : 100
1. Translation from Russian into English/Hindi/Punjabi
30 Marks
2. Comprehension (Texts with questions) 30 Marks
3. Translation from English to Russian 40 Marks
Course of Reading & Prescribed Text-Book :
"RUSSIAN" by Wagner V.N. & Ovsienko Y.G.
(Lessons 26 t0 40) PPH, N.D., 1991.
Note : Dictionaries are allowed.
RUSSIAN
Paper-B
Time : 3 Hrs. M.Marks : 100
(A) (Written) 50
1. Grammer 35
2. Composition (one out of five topics) 15
Topics : My friend; My family; City; My University; My work;
An Off Day; Our Library.
Courses of Reading & Prescribed Text-Book :
- Declension of Nouns & Adjectives in all Cases & Numbers.
- Verbs of motion with & without prefixes
- Use of
- "RUSSIAN" by Wagner V.N. & Ovsienko Y.G.
(Lessons 26 to 40)
- "RUSSIAN" by Ovsienko Y.G. & Skopina (Part-I & II)
(B) Oral/Practical 50
- Reading of a text 15
- Dictation 15
- Conversation 20
FRENCH
Paper-A (Written)
Composition and Grammar :
1. A Dialogue in French of about one page on the topic covered

in the Text Book. 15
2. An informal letter in French (to friend & family) 10
3. Questions on Applied Grammar pertaining to the text 40
(Exercises from the textbook)
4. Conjugations of verbs used in the text) 15
5. Short answer questions from the textbook. 20
The general questions are based on the vocabulary of the

text book. (Eight out of the tweleve to be attempted).
Courses of Reading & Prescribed Text-Book :
"CONNEXIONS-2" by Regine Merieux & Yves Loiseau,
Published by Didier, 2004.
FRENCH
Paper-B
M.Marks : 100
A : Written : 60
B : Viva : 40
A. : Written (Translation & Literature)
Time : 3 Hrs. M. Marks : 60
1. Translation from French to English 15
(From the textbook)
2. Translation from English to French. 15
(From the textbook)
3. Summery of one of the poems studied. 15
4. Conte De Fee-Le Petit Chaperon Rouge 15
- "CONNEXIONS-2" by Regine Merieux & Yves Loiseau,
- Conte De Fee-Le Petit Chaperon Rouge
- Poetry-Dejeunei Matin (Prevert)
(B) Oral/Practical 40
- Reading of a text 10
- Dictation 10
- Conversation 20
- "CONNEXIONS-2" by Regine Merieux & Yves Loiseau,
URDU (ELECTIVE)
Paper-A
Note : - Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners:
Each question paper may consist of three sections as follows:
Section-A will consist of 10 very short answer questions with
answer to each question up to five lines in length. All questions
will be compulsory. Each question will carry two marks; total
weightage of the section being 20 marks.
Section-B will consist of short answer questions with answer to
each question upto two pages in length. Twelve questions will be
set by the examiner and eight will be attempted by the candidates.
Each question will carry six marks. The total weightage of the
Section-C will consist of essay type questions with answer to each
question upto 5 pages in length. Four questions will be set by the
examiner and the candidates will be required to attempt two. Each
question will carry sixteen marks; total weightage of the section
being 32 marks.
Prose & Poetry
i) Explanation of Verses
ii) Explanation of Prose
iii) Introduction to Literary contribution of the following Poets
and Prose writers.
Poets
Mir Taqi Mir, Asad-ulla-Khan Ghalib, Nazir Akbarabadi,
Brij Narain Chakbast & Jigar Muradabadi)
Prose Writers
Sir Syed Ahmad Khan, Mohd. Hussain Azad, Altaf Husain
Hali, Munshi Prem Chand, Rashid Ahmad Siddiqui)
Book Prescribed
Naqoosh-e-Adab published by Education Book House,
A.M.U. Market, Aligarh, 2003.
Books Recommended
1. Mukhtasar Tarikh-Adab-e-Urdu, by Aijaz Husain, Education
Book House, A.M.U. Market, Aligarh, 2003.
2. Urdu Zaban-o-Adab ka Khaka by Khushhal Zaidi, Edara
Bazme Khizre Rah, 80-Ghaffar Manzil Jamianagar, New
Delhi, 110025, 2001.
URDU (ELECTIVE)
Paper-B
Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks : 100
Note :- Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners :

Each question paper may consist of three sections
as follows:
section being be 48 marks.
Section-C will consist of essay type questions with answers to
each question upto 5 pages in length. Four questions will be set by
the examiner and the candidates will be required to attempt two.
Each question will carry sixteen marks; total weightage of the section
being 32 marks.
Novel and Precis Writing
1. a) Novel : Plot, characterisation, language and style &
treatment of situation/social condition.
b) Explanation of a paragraph from the novel.
2. Media and Information :
(Qualities and Duties with reference to Urdu)
Book Prescribed :
Ek Chadar Maili Si by Rajinder Singh Bedi, Education Book
House, A.M.U. Market, Aligarh, 2003.
Books Recommended
1. Urdu Sahafat by Saqib Siddiqui, Sir Syed Book Depot, Jamia
Urdu, Medical College Road, Aligarh-202002 (UP), 2003.
2. Sahafat Kaya Hai edited by Department of Persian and
Urdu, Punjabi University, Patiala, 2001.
3. Television Ki Sahafat by Shakeel Hasan Shamsi, 37-Johri
Mohalla, Lucknow, 2001.
PERSIAN (ELECTIVE)
Paper - A
Note : - Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners:
Each question paper may consist of three sections as
follows:
section being 48 marks.
being 32 marks.
Prose and Poetry
Prose :
Azan-e-Maghrib by Saeed Nafisi. (Page-171)
Khana-e-Pidari by Saeed Nafisi. (Page-178)
Khud-Kushi by Mohd. Hijazi, (Page-199)
Eidi by Mohd. Hijazi. (Page-205)
Poetry :
a) Ghazaliyat-e-Hafiz
Agar An Turk Shirazi Badasat Arad Dile Mara
Dil Miravad z Dastam Sahib Dilan Khudara
Saqi Banoor-e-Bade Bar Afroz Jam-e-Ma. (Pages 4-8)
b) Ghazaliyat-e-Khusrau
Jaan z tan Burdi-o-Dar Jani Hanuz
Madeh Pindam Keh Man Dar Sene Sauda-e-Digar Daram
Janan Shabi Bakoo-e-Ghariban Maqam Kun. (Pages 24-
25)
Qasida Mlik-ush-Sho'ara Bahar (Jughad-e-Jang)
1. Fughan z Jughad-e-Jang-o-Marghwai-o. (Pages 54-59),
2006.
Masnavi-Maulana Room
Bishno Az Nai Choon Hikayat Mee Kunad
Hikayat Ashiq Shudan-e-Badshah Bar Kaneezak
Zahir Shudan-e-Ijz-e-Hakiman Az Mo' alija-e-Kaneezak
Badshah b Dargah-e-Khuda-o-Khwab Didan Shah Wali Ra
(Pages 117-133)
Book Prescribed :
Nisab-e-Jadeed-e-Farsi, Published by Jyed Press Ballimaran
Delhi-6 and available from Maktaba Jamia, Urdu Bazaar, Jama
Masjid, Delhi-6. (1990)
Books Recommended :
1. Jadid Farsi Shai'ri by Dr. Mohd. Taqi Ali Abidi, Uttar
Pradesh Urdu Academy, Lucknow, 1996.
2. Jadid Farsi Shai'ri by Dr. Munib-ur-Rehman, University
Press, A.M.U. Aligarh, 1980.
3. Asari Farsi Shai'ri by Dr. Syed Ahsan-uz-Zafar, Uttar
Pradesh Urdu Academy, Lucknow, 1995.
4. Masnaviyat-e-fani Kashmiri by Iraq Raza Zaidi, 2003 (2nd
Edition).
5. Sho'ra-e-Namwar by M.M. Jalali, Uttar Pradesh Urdu
Academy, Lucknow, 1995.
6. Tarikh-e-Adabiyat-e-Iran by Raza Zada Shafaq, Edara
Musannifin, Hyderabad, 1990.
PERSIAN (ELECTIVE)
Paper - B
Note:- Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners:
follows:
being 32 marks.
Grammar and Persian Genres :
a) Grammar : Definitions and kinds of the following :
Ism, Zameer, Sifat, Fail, Fa'il, Mafool & Jumla
Mutazad Alfaz
b) Persian Genres:
Ghazal
Qasida
Masnavi
Rubai
Dastan
Dastan-e-Kotah
Zindgi Nameh
Media :
Its Qualities and Duties
Books Recommended:
1. Miftah-ul-Qawaid by Mohiuddin Jafri, 2001.
2. Naseem-e-Balaghat by Jalal-ud-din Jafri, 2001.
3. Farsi-o-Dastur, Part-II by Zohra Khanlari, 2003.
4. Urdu Sahafat by Anwar Dehlvi, Urdu Academy, Delhi, 2000.
5. Rehbar-e-Akhbar Navisi by Iqbal Qadri, Qaumi Council,
R.K. Puram, New Delhi, 1999.
6. Urdu : Radio aur Television Mein by Kamal Ahmad Siddiqui.
Qaumi Council, R.K. Puram, New Delhi, 2003.
7. Awami Zra'i Iblagh : Tarsil aur Tamir-o-Tarraqi by Shahid
Parvej, Qaumi Council, R.K. Puram, New Delhi, 2001 (2nd
reprint).
HISTORY
Paper-A
History of India (1707-1964 A.D.)
Note : The question paper shall consist of two sections as
follows :
Section A : The examiner will set 10 questions and the candidates
will attempt 7 questions carrying 4 marks each. Answer to each
question will be in 10 to 15 sentences. The total weightage of the
section will be 28 marks.
Section B :The examiner will set 8 questions which will cover the
entire syllabus. The candidates will attempt any 4 questions in at
least 5 pages each. Each question will carry 18 marks. The total
weightage of this section will 72 marks.
Important Note : Paper Setter must ensure that questions
in Section-A do not cover more than one point, and questions in
Section-B should cover at least 50 percent of the theme.
1. Foundation of British Rule : Advent of the British; Battles
of Plassey and Buxar, Clive and Warren Hastings; Subsidiary
Alliance Policy, Doctrine of Lapse.
2. The Uprising of 1857 : Causes, Spread of the Uprisings,
Nature and aftermath.
3. Economic Changes : Agriculture, British commercial
policies and the impact on the trade balance; Destruction
of indigenous industries; the growth of modern industry;
The drain theory.
4. Growth of Education and Political Organisation : New
education; Rise of the middle classes, Political institutions.
5. Socio Religious Movements : Brahmo Samaj, Arya
Samaj, Rama Krishana Mission, Prarthna Samaj,
Theosophical Society, Aligarh Movement.
6. The Revolutionary Terrorism : Partition of Bengal and
its impact; Revolutionary Terrorism in Bengal, Maharashtra
and the Punjab, Impact on the national movement.
7. The Phase of Non-Co-operation : Emergence of Gandhi;

The Jallianwala Bagh Massacre and its impact; Khilafat
agitation; the Non-cooperation Movement; Withdrawal and
impact; the Swarajists; The Simon Commission.
8. The Phase of Civil Disobedience : The programme and
the course of the Civil Disobedience movement, the Round
Table Conferences; Communal Award; Poona-pact;
Withdrawal of Civil Disobedience Movement.
9. Constitutional Development : The Acts of 1861 and
1892; the Minto-Morley Reforms of 1909, The Act of 1919
and Dyarchy; Government of India Act, 1935 and Provincial
Autonomy.
10. Towards Partition and Independence : Growth of
communal politics; Lahore resolution, Cripps proposals; 'Quit
India' Movement; the INA Trials, Interim Government and
Elections; Cabinet Mission towards Independence.
HISTORY
Paper-B
History of the Punjab (1469-1799)
Note : Each question paper shall consist of two sections as
follows :
Section A : The examiner will set 10 questions and the candidates
will attempt any 7 questions carrying 4 marks each. Answer to
each question will be in 10 to 15 sentences. The total weightage of
this section will be 28 marks.
Section B : The examiner will set 8 questions which will cover the
entire syllabus. The candidates will attempt any 4 questions in at
least 5 pages each. Each question will carry 18 marks. The total
weightage of this section will be 72 marks.
Important Note : Paper Setter must ensure that questions
in Section-A do not cover more than one point, and questions in
Section-B should cover atleast 50 percent of the theme.
1. Sources : Geographical and Physical features, Historical
literature in Persian and Punjabi; Religious literature;
Administrative records and documents; European travellers'
accounts, Non-literary sources : numismatics and paintings.
2. Socio-Religious condition of the Punjab around 1500
A.D. : The Sunnis; the Shias; the Sufis, the Brahmans; the
Jogis; the Vaishnava bhakti and the saints.
3. Foundation of Sikh Panth : Guru Nanak Dev and his
Teachings : Early life, Conception of God, Importance of
the Guru, Insistance on right conduct and earnest profession;
Institution of community kitchen (Langer) and
Congregational worship (sangat), Succession to Guruship.
4. Development of the Sikh Panth : Guru Angad Dev to
Guru Arjan Dev : Increasing number of sangats : Sikh
ceremonies; the Manji and Masand system, The founding
of the sacred places, The Harimandir. Compilation of the

Adi Granth.
5. Transformation of the Sikh Panth : Guru Hargobind
to Guru Tegh Bahadur : Martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev
and Guru Hargobind's response; Armed conflict with the
state; Circumstances leading to the accession and martyrdom
of Guru Tegh Bahadur.
6. Creation of Khalsa : Meaning; Circumstances leading to
the creation of the Khalsa (1699); New Social order; Conflict
with the Hill chiefs and Mughal administrators; Legacy.
7. Banda Bahadur : Early life of Banda Bahadur and his
meeting with Guru Gobind Singh; His political activities upto
the conquest of Sarhind; Establishment of an independent
rule; Imperial compaign against Banda.
8. Political Struggle (1716-48) : Position of the Sikhs;
Repression and conciliation by the Mughal governors, Abdus
Samad Khan and Zakaria Khan (1716-1745), Ghallughara,
Sikh-Afghan struggle (1752-65); Occupation of Lahore, the
striking of the coin; Causes of Sikh success against the
Mughals and Afghans.
9. Leading Sardars and Territories : Nawab Kapur Singh;
Jassa Singh Ahluwalia; Bhangis; Jassa Singh Ramgarhia;
Charat Singh and Mahan Singh; Jai Singh Kanhaya; Ala
Singh.
10. Political Organisations of the Sikhs in the 18th
Century: Rakhi; Dal Khalsa; Gurmata, Misl. Emergence
of new rulers and their military resources; Administrative
arrangements; Land revenue; Administrative of Justice.
Political Science
Paper – A
(Indian Constitution)
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100
20x4 = 80
10x2 =20
Instructions for the Paper Setter:
The question paper will consist of five Sections: A,B,C,D
and E, Section A,B,C and D will have two questions from the
respective portion of the syllabus and will carry 20 marks each.
Section E will consist of 10 short answer type questions to be set
form entire syllabus i.e sections A, B, C & D and will carry 20
marks in all, such short answer type questions carry 2 marks.
Instructions for the candidates:
Candidates are required to attempt one question each from sections
A,B,C and D of the question paper and the entire section E. The
candidates are required to answer the short questions in not less
than 50 words.
Section — A
1. Constitution Assembly and making of India’s Constitution.
2. Basic features of the Indian Constitution.
3. Preamble and its importance.
4. Nature of Indian Federalism and Centre-State Relations.
Section — B
1. Fundamental Rights, features, kinds and evaluation.
2. Fundamental Duties.
3. Directive Principles of the State Policy.
Section — C
1. Parliament: Composition, Powers and Role.
2. President: Election, Powers and Position.
3. Indian Cabinet and Prime Minister: Election, Powers,
Position and Changing Role.
4. Supreme Court and High Court: Composition, Powers
and Role.
Section — D
1. Governor: Appointment, Powers and Role.
2. State Legislature: Composition, Powers and Role.
3. Council of Ministers and Chief Minister: Election,
Powers, Position and Role.
Books Recommended:
1. G. Austin, The Indian Constitution : Corner Stone of a
Nation, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1966.
2. G. Austin, Working of a Democratic Constitution : The
Indian Experience, Oxford University Press, 2000, Delhi.
3. D.D. Basu, An Introduction to the Constitution of India,
New Delhi, Prentice Hall, 2008.
4. C.P. Bambhri, The Indian State Fifty Years, New Delhi,
Shipra, 1997.
5. P. Brass, Politics of India Since Independence,
Hyderabad, Orient Longman, 1990.
6. P. Brass, Caste, Faction and Parties in Indian Politics,
Vol. II, Delhi, Chanakya Publications 1984-1985.
7. P. Brass, Ethnic Groups and the State, London, Croom,
Helm, 1995.
8. P. Brass, Language, Religion and Politics in North Indian,
London, Cambridge University Press, 1974.
9. B.L. Fadia, State Politics in India, Vol. II, New Delhi,
Radiant Publishers, 1984.
10. F.R. Frankel, India’s Political Economy 1947-1977, The
Gradual Revolution, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1978.
11. R. Kothari, State against Democracy : In Search of Human
Governance, Delhi, Ajanta, 1988.
12. R. Kothari, Politics in India, New Delhi, Orient Longman,
1970.
13. R. Kothari, Party System and Election Studies, Bombay,
Asia Publishing House, 1967.
14. I. Narain (ed.), State Politics in India, Meerut, Meenakshi
Parkashan, 1967.
15. M.V. Pylee, Constitutional Government in India, Bombay,

16. M.V. Pylee, An Introduction to the Consutitution of India,
New Delhi, Vikas, 1998.
17. S.P. Verma and C.P. Bhambari (ed.), Election and Political
Consciousness in India, Meerut, Meenakshi Parkashan,
1967.
18. B,L. Fadia, Indian Government and Politics, Agra, Sahitya
Bhavan Publications, 2008.
19 A.S. Narang, Indian Government and Politics, New Delhi,
Gitanjali, 1999.
20. Indian Journal of Political Sciences
21. Punjab Journal of Politics
22. Seminar
23. Lloyd I. Rudolph and Susanne Hoeba Rudolph, Explaining
Indian Democracy: A Fifty-Year Perspective, 1956-2006,
Vol. I, II, III, New Delhi, OUP, 2008.
24. Francine Frankel, India’s Political Economy: 1947-2004,
New Delhi, OUP, 2006.
GAP PAGE NO.: 53-55

Political Scienc
Paper - B
(Indian Political System)
20x4 = 80
10x2 = 20
Instructions for the Paper Setter:
The question paper will consist of five Sections:A,B,C,D and
E. Section A,B,C and D will have two questions from the respective
portion of the syllabus and will carry 20 marks each. Section E will
consist of 10 short answer type questions to be set from the entire
syllabus i.s sections A, B, C & D and will carry 20 marks in all,
such short answer type questions carry 2 marks.
Instructions for the candidates:
Candidates are required to attempt one question each, from
sections A,B,C,and D of the question paper and the entire section
E. The candidates are required to answer the short questions in not
less than 50 words
Section — A
1. Nature of Party System in India: A Critical Evaluation.
2. National Political Parties (National Congress – BJP, CPI,
CPI(M), BSP; Their organisation, Ideologies and electoral
performance.
3. Regional Political Parties (SAD, NC, DMK, Telugu
Desam): Their Organisation, Ideologies and Electoral
Performance.
4. Pressure groups in Indian Politics.
Section — B
1. The Election Commission: Powers, functions, and
Electoral reforms.
2. Voting Behaviour.
3. Political Participation: Determinants and levels of Political
Participation.
Section — C
1. Caste and Religion in Indian Politics.
2. Regionalism and Indian politics.
3. Liberalisation and Indian Politics.
4. Emerging trends in Indian Politics.
Section — D
1. Basic principles and determinants of Indian Foreign Policy.
2. Policy of Non-alignment and its relevance in contemporary
world.
Books Recommended:
1. G. Austin, The Indian Constitution : Corner Stone of a
Nation, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1966.
2. G. Austin, Working of a Democratic Constitution : The
Indian Experience, Oxford University Press, 2000, Delhi.
3. D.D. Basu, An Introduction to the Constitution of India,
New Delhi, Prentice Hall, 2008.
4. C.P. Bambhari, The Indian State Fifty Years, New Delhi,
Sipra, 1997.
5. P. Brass, Politics of India Since Independence,
Hyderabad, Orient Longman, 1990.
6. P. Brass, Caste, Faction and Parties in Indian Politics,
Vol. II, Delhi, Chanakya Publications 1984-1985.
7. P. Brass, Ethnic Groups and the State, London, Croom,
Helm, 1995.
8. P. Brass, Language, Religion and Politics in North Indian,
London, Cambridge University Press, 1974.
9. B.L. Fadia, State Politics in India, Vol. II, New Delhi,
Radiant Publishers, 1984.
10. F.R. Frankel, India’s Political Economy 1947-1977, The
Gradual Revolution, Oxford, Oxford University Press, 1978.
11. R. Kothari, State against Democracy : In Search of Human
Governance, Delhi, Ajanta, 1988.
12. R. Kothari, Politics in India, New Delhi, Orient Longman,
1970.
13. R. Kothari, Party System and Election Studies, Bombay,
14. I. Narain (ed.), State Politics in India, Meerut, Meenakshi
Parkashan, 1967.
15. M.V. Pylee, Constitutional Government in India, Bombay,

16. M.V. Pylee, An Introduction to the Consutitution of India,
New Delhi, Vikas, 1998.
17. S.P. Verma and C.P. Bhambari (ed.), Election and Political
Consciousness in India, Meerut, Meenakshi Parkashan,
1967.
18. B,L. Fadia, Indian Government and Politics, Agra, Sahitya
Bhavan Publications, 2008.
19. A.S. Narang, Indian Government and Politics, New Delhi,
Gitanjali, 1999.
20. Indian Journal of Political Sciences
21. Punjab Journal of Politics
22. Seminar
23. Lloyd I. Rudolph and Susanne Hoeba Rudolph, Explaining
Indian Democracy: A Fifty-Year Perspective, 1956-2006,
Vol. I, II, III, New Delhi, OUP, 2008.
24. Francine Frankel, India’s Political Economy: 1947-
2004,New Delhi, OUP, 2006.
Defence and Strategic Studies

Paper-A
Evolution of Warfare in Europe
Marks : 160
Marks : 40
Total : 200
Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 80
Note : Question paper shall consist of two sections as follows:
Section A : The examiner shall set 10 questions and the candidates
question shall not exceed half of the page. The total weightage of
Section B : The examiner shall set 8 questions which will cover
the entire syllabus. The candidates shall attempt any 4 questions in
atleast 5 pages each. Each question shall carry 13 marks. The total
weightage of this section shall be 52 marks.
Note : Practicals only meant for the regular students. For the
private students the two papers shall be of 100 marks
each. For the private students the each question in
section B will be 18 marks.
Section-A
1. Military Organisations and techniques of fighting of
Macedonians and Persians with particular reference
to the Battle of Arbela, 331 B.C.
(a) Military organisations of Macedonians and Persians.
(b) Battle of Arbela
(i) Introduction
(ii) Opposing forces and their deployment.
(iii) Description of the battle.
(vi) Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of
principles of war and causes of defeat and
victory).
2. Military organizations and techniques of fighting of

Romans and Carthaginians with particular reference
to the Battle of Cannae 216 B.C. :
(a) Military organisations of Romans and Carthaginians.
(b) Batttle of Cannae
(i) Introduction
(iv) Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of
victory).
Romans and Barbarians with particular reference to
the Battle of Adrianople 378. A.D. : Military
organizations and techniques of fighting of Romans
and Barbarians.
(a) Military organisations of Romans and Barbarians.
(b) Battle of Adrianople
(i) Introduction
(iv) Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of principles of
war and causes of defeat and victory).
Section-B
the English and Romans with particular reference to
the Battle of Hastings 1066 AD. :
a) Military organisation of the English and Romans.
b) Battle of Hastings
i. Introduction
ii. Opposing forces and their deployment.
iii.
Description of the battle.
iv.
Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of
victory).
5. The Mongol art of war under Changez Khan and
Taimur
a) Organisation of Mongol Army.
b) Mongol Art of War.
Section-C
6. Industrial Revolution and its impact
a) Impact on Society
b) Impact on weapons for land and naval warfare
c) Impact on means of communications
d) Impact on tactics for land and naval warfare.
7. Napoleonic Warfare
a) Elements of Napoleonic Warfare.
b) Principles of Napoleonic Warfare.
Section-D
8. Naval Warfare with particular reference to the Battle
of Trafalgar 1805 A.D. :
a) Background of the English and Franco-Spanish rivalry
for naval supremacy.
b) Battle of Trafalgar.
I. Opposing forces and their deployment.
II. Description of the battle.
III. Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of principles
of War and causes of defeat and victory).
9. American Civil War (1861-65)
i) Introduction
ii) Causes
iii) Events in brief
iv) The Character of the Civil War

v) Tactical development
Text Books and Supplementary Readings :
1. Burne, Alfred H : The Art of War on Land.
2. Das, S.T. : An Introduction to the Art of War.
3. Fuller, J.F.C. : Conduct of War.
4. Fuller, J.F.C. : The American Civil War.
5. Fuller, J.F.C. The Generalship of Alexander The Great.
6. Montogmery, Viscount : A History of Warefare.
7. Ropp, Theodore : War in the Modern World.
8. Sarkar, J.N. : Military History of India.
9. Sheppard, E.W. : The Study of Military History.
10. Barrie and Rockliff : The Ancient Art of War, Vol. I.
11. Barrie and Rockliff : The Ancient Art of War, Vol. II.
Cleaton, P.E. Weapons of War.
12. Creasy, E.S. : The Fifteen Decisive Battles of the World.
13. Depuy, Earnest : The Encyclopedia of Military History.
14. Encyclopedia Britannica.
15. Encyclopedia America.
16. Falls, Cyril : A Hundred Years of War.
17. Fuller, J.F.C. : Armament and History.
18. Fuller, J.F.C. : The Decisive Battles of the Western World,
Vol. I.
19. Fuller, J.F.C. : The Decisive Battles of the Western World,
Vol. II.
20. Fuller, J.F.C. : Pachhmi, Duniya De Nirnehjanak Jang (Pbi.
Translation).
21. Hortog, I.D. : Genghis Kha-ti-Conqueor of the World.
22. Hauerslty, Roy : The Great Commander-Nelson.
23. Kemp, Peter : The Oxford Companion to Ships and Sea.
24. Phul, R.K. : Armies of the Great Mughals.
Defence and Strategic Studies

Paper-B
Evolution of Warfare in India
Total Teaching Periods : 75
(This paper deals with salient features of Indian
Warfare from 326 BC to 1850 AD)
Note : Question paper shall consist of two sections as follows:
Section A : The examiner shall set 10 questions and the candidates
question shall not exceed half of the page. The total weightage of
Section B : The examiner shall set 8 questions which will cover
the entire syllabus. The candidates shall attempt any 4 questions in
atleast 5 pages each. Each question shall carry 13 marks. The total
weightage of this section shall be 52 marks.
Note : Practicals only meant for the regular students. For the
private students the two papers shall be of 100 marks
each. For the private students each question in section
B will be of 18 marks.
Section-A
1. Macedonian and Indian Military Organisation and
techniques of fighting with particular reference to the
Battle of Hydaspes, 326 B.C. :
(a) Macedonian and Indian Military organisations.
(b) Battle of Hydaspes.
i) Introduction
ii) Opposing forces and their deployment.
iii) Description of the battle.
iv) Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of
Principles of war and causes of defeat and
victory).
2. Kautilya's Philosophy of War

i. Diplomacy and Strategy.
ii. The Institution of Spices.
iii. Army Organisation.
iv. Mode of Warfare.
v. Forts-type & role.
Section-B
Rajputs and Turks with particular reference to the
Battle of Terrain 1192 A.D. :
(a) Military organisations of Rajputs and Turks.
(b) Battle of Terrain.
i) Introduction
ii) Opposing forces and their deployment
iii) Description of the battle
victory).
Mughals and Afghans with particular reference to the
First Battle of Panipat 1526 AD. :
(a) Military organisations of Mughals and Afghans.
(b) First Battle of Panipat.
i) Introduction
victory)
Section-C
5. Fighting techniques of Southern Muslim Sultana with
particular reference to the Battle of Talikota, 1568 A.D.
i) Introduction
iv) Analysis (strategy, tactics, application of principles of
War and causes of defeat and victory)
6. Military Organisations of Marathas under Shivaji and
his techniques of fighting :
i) Shivaji as a military leader.
ii) Higher Defence Organisation.
iii) Military Organisation.
iv) Techniques of Fighting.
Section-D
7. Military organisation of Sikh Army and its fighting
techniques under Maharaja Ranjit Singh :
i) Maharaja Ranjit Singh as a Military leader.
ii) Growth and development of the Sikh Army from 1799-
1849).
iii) Organisation of the Army.
iv) Fighting techniques of the Sikh Army strategies and
tactics.
8. Anglo-Maratha and Anglo-Sikh Warfare with particular
reference to the Battles of Assaye, 1803 A.D. and
Chillianwala, 1849 A.D. :
(a) Battle of Assaye
i) Introduction

iv) Analysis (strategy, tactics application of
principles of War and causes of defeat and
victory).
(b) Battle of Chillianwala
i) Introduction
iv) Analysis (strategy, tactics application of
principles of War and causes of defeat and
victory).
Books Recommended
Text Books
1. Alfred, David : Indian Art of War.
2. Bajwa, F.S. : Military System of the Sikhs.
3. Bruce, George : Six Battles of India.
4. Das, S.T. : Indian Military—Its History and Development.
5. Fuller, J.F.C. Generalship of Alexander the Great.
6. Gill, K.S. Yudh Niti Pakhon Bharat De Parmukh Yudh
(Punjabi).
7. Carr, E.H. Military History of India.
8. Majumdar, B.K. : Military System in Ancient India.
9. Majumdar, B.K. : Military System of the Sikhs.
10. Malleson G.B. : Decisive Battles of India.
11. Sarkar, J.N. : Military History of India.
12. Sen S.N. : Military System of the Marathas.
13. Sharma, Gautam : Indian Army Through the Ages.
14. Singh Gurcharan : Battles of Panipat.
15. Thind, Sukhbir, S. : Bharat Yudh Kala Da Vikas (Punjabi).
Supplementary Readings :
16. Cook, H.C.B. : The Sikh Wars 1845 to 1849.
17. Dupuy, Earnest : The Encyclopaedia of Military History.
18. Habibullah, A.B.M. : The Foundation of Muslim Rule in
India.
19. Jaffar, S.M. : Medieval India under Muslim Kings.
20. Kangle, B.P. : Kautilaya's Arth Shastra.
21. Majumdar, B.K. : Study of Indian Military History.
22. Shastri, Sharma : Artha Shastra.
23. Singh Nagendra : The Theory of Force and Organisation
Defence in India.
24. Subramanyam T.G. : Famous Battles in Indian History.
Practical
Total Teaching Hours : 3 Periods per week
Time for Practical Examination : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 40
Section-A Written Test : 1½ Hours
1. Map : Definition, features, classification : Topo Sheets and
its utility for Military : Enlargement and reduction of Maps.
2. Conventional Signs.
3. GRID System : Four Figure and Six Figure Map References.
4. Scale : Definition methods of presenting scale
Interconvention of statement into Representative fraction :
construction of simple scale line and the comparative scale
lines.
5. North : Types of north and finding out true north direction
by equal altitude methods : Watch method & Compass
method.
Discussion (Topics)
Section-B
(i) Punjab Problems
(ii) J & K Problems
(iii) Assam Problems
(iv) Human Rights (Meaning and Concept)
Section-C : Viva-Voce
Section-D : Record
Instructions for the Examiners
Written test would be given on the spot by the external
examiner. Internal examiner is to be appointed to assist the external
examiner.
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
Paper - A
Personnel Administration in India
Note:- Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners:
follows:
answer to each question upto five lines in length. All questions will
be compulsory. Each question will carry two marks; total weightage
being 20 marks.
Section-B will consist of short answer type questions with answer
to each question upto two pages in length. Twelve questions will
be set by the examiner and eight will be attempted by the candidates.
being 32 marks.
Introduction:
Meaning, Nature and Scope of Personnel Administration.
Functions and Significance of Personnel Administration.
Public Services and their role in Administrative System.
Characteristics of Public Personnel Administration in India.
Civil Services in India:
Recruitment : Meaning, Methods
Promotion : Meaning, Principles.
Training : Meaning, Objectives and Types, Training System in India.
Personnel Agencies:
Functions and Role of Department of Personnel and Public
Grievances, Union Public Service Commission, State Public Service
Commissions & Staff Selection Commissions.
Employer — Employee Relations and Working Conditions:
Employees participation in Management.
Employee's Unions.
Joint Consultative Machinery.
Rights of Public Servant, Conduct and Discipline.
Motivation and Morale.
Integrity in Public Services - Problem of Corruption.
Relationshi9p between permanent and political executive.
Lok Pal and Lok Ayukta. Central Vigilance Commission.
Organization and working of Central of Bureau Investigation (CBI)
Sugessted Readings :
1. Government of India, Report on Personnel Administration,
New Delhi, 1970.
2. Glenn O. Stahl : Public Personnel Administration, 7th Ed.,
Oxford IBH Publication Compo, New Delhi, 1977.
3. Goel S.L. and Shalini Rajneesh, Public Personnel
Administration : Theory and Practice, Deep and Deep
Publications, New Delhi, 2002.
4. Indian Institute of Public Administration, Personnel
Administration, New Delhi, 1970.
5. Sahib Singh and Sawinder Singh, Public Personnel and
Financial Administration, New Academic Publisher, 2002.
6. Sinha V.M., Personnel Administration, R.B.S.A., Publisher,
Jaipur, 1985.
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
Paper - B
Financial Administration

Note: Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners:
follows:
Section-A will consist of 10 very short answer type questions with
weightage being 20 marks.
being 32 marks.
Introduction
Nature and scope of Financial Administration
Objectives and Principles of Financial Administration.
Union-State Financial Relations, Finance Commission, Planning
Commision, Organization of Ministry of Finance. Department of
Finance in Punjab
Budgetary System
Meaning, purpose and principles of Budget—Budget as a tool of
Administration.
Preparation of Budget.
Enactment of Budget.
Execution of Budget.
Performance Budgeting.
Zero-Base Budgeting.
Control over Finance.
Legislative Control.
Public Accounts Committee.
Estimates Committee.
Committee on Public Undertakings, Comptroller and Auditor
General, Accounting and Audit.
Suggested Readings
1. Goel S.L., Financial Administration, Deep and Deep
Publication, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Government of India, Administrative Reforms Commission,
Report of Financial Account and Audit, New Delhi, 1967.
3. Government of India, Administrative Reforms Commission,
Report of Central State Relations, New Delhi, 1967.
4. Lall G.S., Financial Administration in India, H.P.J. Kapoor
Delhi, 1969.
5. Puri K.K. and G.S. Barara, Personnel and Financial
Administration, Bharat Prakashan, Jalandhar, 2003.
6. Sahib Singh and Swinder Singh, Public Personnel and
Financial Administration, New Academic Publisher, 2002.
7. Thavaraj M.J.K., Financial Administration in India, S.Chand
& Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.
SOCIOLOGY
Paper - A
Society in India
Note:- Question paper may consist of two sections as follows:
Section-A will consist of 10 very short answer questions to each
question upto five lines in length. All questions will be compulsory.
Each question will carry two marks; total weightage being 20 marks.
each question upto 3 pages in length or in 500 words. The examiner
will set fifteen questions (at least 7 from each unit) and the
candidates will attempt eight (four from each unit). Each question
will carry ten marks. Total weightage of the section being 80 marks.
Unit —I
(a) Indian Society : Features and Unity in Diversity.
(b) Caste : Features, Functions, Changing pattern, Caste and
Politics, Difference between caste and class.
(c) Social Issues : Regionalism and Communalism.
Unit—II
(a) Marriage—Meaning, Types, Functions, Rules and
Changes.
(b) Family—Meaning, Types, Functions and Changes.
(c) Kinship Systems in India: North and South India.
SOCIOLOGY
Paper-B
Social Change in India
Note:- Question paper may consist of two sections as follows:
answers to each question upto five lines in length. All questions
each question upto three pages in length or in 500 words. The
examiner will set fifteen questions (at least 7 from each unit) and
the candidate will attempt eight (four from each unit). Each question
will carry ten marks. Total weightage of the section being 80 marks.
Unit —I
a) Social charge : Meaning and Forms : Evolution, Revolution,
Progress and Development.
b) Factors of Social Change : Demographic, Education,
Industrialization and Legislation.
Unit —II
a) Processes of Change : Sanskritization, Westernization,
Modernization and Secularization.
b) Problems of Social Change : Dowry, Domestic Violence,
Divorce, Problems of elderly, Female foeticide.
Books Recommended for Paper A and B
1. Ahuja, Ram : Social Problems, Rawat Publishers, New
Delhi, 1992.
2. Abraham, M. Francis : Contemporary Sociology, Oxford
University, New Delhi, 2006.
3. Dhaliwal et al: Fundamentals of Environmental Science,

Kalyani Publishing, New Delhi, 1996.
4. Ghurye, G.S. : Caste & Race in India, Popular, Bombay,
Punjabi Translations by N.S. Sodhi, Panjabi University, Patiala,
1962.
5. Gill, S.S. : The Pathology of Corruption, Harper Collin
Publishers, New Delhi, 1998.
6. Hutton, J.H. : Caste in India—Its Nature, Functions and
Origin, Oxford University Press, Delhi 1980.
7. Jayaraman, Raja : Caste & Class, Dynamics of Inequality
in Indian Society, Hindustan Publishing Corporation, 1981.
8. Kapadia, K.M. : Marriage and Family in India, Oxford
University Press, Calcutta, 1996.
9. Kapila, S : A Textbook of Sociology, Part-I & II, New
Academic House, Jalandhar, 1990-91.
10. Kapila, S. : Fundamentals of Sociology, Vol. II Panchkula,
Kapila Publishers, 2008.
11. Kothari, Rajni (ed): Caste in Indian Politics, Orient
Longman, Delhi, 1973.
12. Kuppuswamy, B.: Social Change in India, Vikas, Delhi,
1975.
13. Mandelbaum : David G.: Society in India, Popular
Prakashan, Bomaby, 1972.
14. Mukerji, D.P. : Diversities : Essays in Economics,
Sociology and Social Problems, Manak, New Delhi, 2002.
15. Maclver, R.M. & Page, Charles H. : Society, An Introductory
Analysis, Macmillan, London, 1974.
16. Srinivas, M.N.: Social Change in Modern India, Orient
Longman, Bombay, 1972.
PSYCHOLOGY
Paper-A
Experimental Psychology
Note : 1. The use of Non-Programmable calculators and
Statistical Tables are allowed in the examination.
2. Only one numerical question is to be set either of nine
marks (from section-B) or of twelve marks (from
Section-C).
3. The question paper may consist of three sections as
follows:
answers to each question upto five lines in length. All questions
will be compulsory. Each question will carry 1½ marks; total
each question upto two pages in length. Six questions will be set
by the examiner and four will be attempted by the candidates.
Each question will carry 9 marks; total weightage of the section
being 36 marks.
Section-C will consist of essay type questions with answer to
each question upto five pages in length. Four questions will be set
by the examiner and candidates will be required to attempt two.
Each question being 24 marks.
(The questions are to be set to judge the candidates basic
understanding of the concepts.)
Experimental Psychology : Introduction and Nature
Experimental Methed : Experimental of Method, Name,
Advantage and Dis-advantage.
Variables:-Types of Variables, Stimulus, Organismic and Response
Variables, Process of experimentation-manipulation and control of
variables, Concept of within and between Experimental Designs.
Sensation: Types of sensations, Visual sensation; structure and
functions of the eye. Theories of colour vision (Young-Helmholtz.
Opponent-Process & Evolutionary). Auditory sensation : Structure

and functions of the Ear-Theories of hearing. Brief introduction to
cutaneous sensation, olfactory sensation and gustatory sensation.
Perceptual Processes: Selective Attention-Nature and factors
affecting perception, Principles of perception (organisation),
perception of form; contour and contrast, figure-ground
differentiation, perceptual set.
Perception of Movement : Image-Retina and Eye-Head
movement system, Apparent movement, Induced movement, Auto
Kinetic movement.
Perception of Space : Monocular and Binocular cues for space
perception. Perceptual constancies lightness, brightness, size and
shape.
Illusions : Types, causes and theories
Statistics : Normal Probability Curve, Its nature and characteristics
(Numericals of Areas under NPG only) Correlations : Types, of
Correlation, Nature and characteristics. Rank order and product
moment methods (Numericals for Individual data).
References :
1. D. Amato, M.H.R. Experimental Psychology, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2001.
2. Garrett, H.E. and Woodworth, R.S. Statistics in Psychology
and Education. Vikils, Feffer and Simons Pvt. Ltd., 1969.
3. Kerlinger, P.N. : Foundation of Behavioural Research,
Surjeet Publications, New Delhi, 1998.
4. Postman, L. and Egan. J.P.: Experimental Psychology,
Harper and Row, New York.
5. Schiffman, H.R.: Sensation and Perceptions, John Willey
and Sons, 1982.
6. Woodworth, R.S. and Schlosberg, H.: Experimental
Psychology, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc. 1954.
7. Solso, Experimental Psychology: A Case Approach Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2007.
8. Sternberg, R.J. Cognitive Psychology, Thomson Wads
Worth, 2007.
PSYCHOLOGY
Paper-B (Theory)
Experimental Psychology
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks 75
Note : 1. The use of Non-Programmable calculators and
Statistical Tables are allowed in the examination.
2. Only one numrical question is to be set either of nine
marks (from Section-B) or of twelve marks (from
Section-C).
3. The question paper may consist of three sections as
follows:
Section-A will consist of 10 very short answer question with
answers to each question up to five lines in length. All questions
will be compulsory. Each question will carry 1½ marks; total
each question upto two pages in length. Six questions will be set
by the examiner and four will be attempted by the candidates.
Each question will carry 9 marks. Total weightage of the section
being 36 marks.
question upto five pages in length. Four questions will be set by the
question being 24 marks.
(The questions are to be set to judge the candidates basic
understanding of the concepts.)
Psychophysics : Concept of Psychophysics,Physical V/S.
Psychological continua, Weber Fechner law Concept of Absolute
and Differential Thresholds. Determination of AL and DL by
Methods of limits, Method of Constant Stimuli & Method of
Average Error.
Learning: Classical and operant conditioning, Basic Processes;

Extinction, spontaneous recovery, Generalization and
Discrimination. Factors influencing classical and instrumental
conditioning. Concept of Reinforcement, Types of reinforcement
and Reinforcement Schedules. Transfer of Training and skill
learning.
Minumonics,: An Introduction to the concept of Mnemonics,
Constructive memory, Implicit memory & Eyewitness memory.
Methods of Retention.
Forgetting : Nature, Factors, Affecting forgetting, Theories of
for-getting, Decay, Interference retrieval failure.
Thinking and Problem Solving : Nature, Types of Thinking and
Nature of Problem Solving, Stages of Problem solving, Factors,
effecting Problem Solving role of set in problem solving.
Concept : Nature of concept formation, Types and Processes.
Reasoning : Nature and types of reasoning.
References :
1. D'Amato,M.R. : Experimental Psychology : Methodology
Psychophysics and Learning, McGraw Hill Company, New
Delhi,1970.
2. Postman, L and Egan, J.P.: Experimental, Psychology,
3. Woodworth, R.S. and Schlosberg, H. : Experimental
Psychology. New York; Holt, Rinehart and Winston Inc.
1954.
4. Galotti, K.M., Cognitive Psychology in and Out of the
Laboratory, Thomson Wads Worth, 2007.
PSYCHOLOGY
Practical
Note: Any Ten Practicals out of Twelve are to be conducted.
1. Measurement of Differential Threshold.
2. Span of Attention/Division of Attention
3. Muller-Luyer Illusion
4. Role of set in perception.
5. Retroactive inhibition
6. Recall Vs Recognition Method
7. Bilateral transfer of learning.
8. Reaction Time (Simple vs choice RT or Auditory vs Visual RT)
9. Retinal Colour zones.
10. Problem-Solving
11. Paired Associate learning.
12. Concept formation.
GEOGRAPHY
Paper-A
RESOURCES AND ENVIRONMENT :
WORLD PATTERNS
Time: 3 Hours Max Marks: 70
Objective :
1. To understand concept of resources and their interface with
environment;
2. To examine use and misuse of various resources, and analyse
future prospects;
3. To study various methods and approaches of conservation
and management of natural resources;
4. To understand the quantitative and qualitative aspects of
human resources in spatial perspectives and the associated
environmental problems.
Course Content :
Unit - I
Meaning, nature and components of environment. Nature
and definition of Resources. Resources environment interface.
Classification of Resources : Renewable and Non-
renewable : Biotic (forests, wild-life; live-stock, fisheries, agricultre
crops) and abiotic (land, water, mineral).
Unit - II
Distribution availability, utilization and conservation of water,
minerals and energy resoruces; their economic and environmental
significance and sustainability.
Types and distribution of forests—their economic and
environmental significance and conservation.
Types and distribution of fisheries—their economic and
environmental significance and conservation.
Major soil types and their distribution; problems of soil erosion

and soil conservation.
Unit-III
Human Resources : Quantitative and qualitative aspects
of population : number, distribution, density, growth, literacy and
urbanization.
Population Resources Relationship : Population-Resource
Regions of the world.
Unit-IV
Environment : Natural and Human, Man-environment
relationship—determinism, Possibilism, ecology.
Biodiversity
Environmental Issues : Pollution; population explosion; food
security; deforestation; conservation of wild life.
Note :
1. A compulsory question containing 20 short answer type
questions will be set covering the whole syllabus. The
students will attempt any 15 parts in about 25-30 words
each. Each part will carry 2 marks (Total 30 marks).
2. The whole syllabus will be divided into 4 units. Eight questions
will be out of the whole syllabus, 2 from each unit. The
students will be required to attempt one question from each
unit. These will be in addition to the compulsory question at
serial number 1. Each question will carry 10 marks (40
marks) .
3. Special credit will be given to suitable use of maps and
diagrams.
4. In Unit—II question will focus on general aspects of the
topic instead of on any individual resources.
Books Recommended
1. Agarwal, A. et.al. : The Citizen's Fifth Report, Centre
for Science and Environment,
New Delhi, 1999.
2. Chandna, R.C. : A Geography of Population,
Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana,
1996.
3. Chawla, I.N. : Geography of Resources, Bharat
Prakashan, Jalandhar, latest
edition.
4. Hartshorne Truman : Economic Geography, Prentice
A, and W. Alexander: Hall, 1988, 3rd John Edition.
5. Kates, R.W. & : Geography, Resources and
Burton, I (Eds.) Environment, Vol. I & II,
University of Chicago Press,
Chicago, 1986.
6. Trewartha, G.T. : A Geography of Pupulation—
World Patterns. John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 1969.
7. Zelinsky, Wilbur : A Prologue to Population
Geography, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey, 1966.
8. Zimmerman E.W. : World Resources and Industries,
Harpar New York.
9. Chandna, R.C. : Environmental Awareness
Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana.
10. Chawla. I.N., : Resources & Environmental
Bharat Publishers, Jalandhar.
GEOGRAPHY
Paper-B
Geography of Punjab
Time : 3 Hours Max Marks: 70
Objective :
1. To understand the regional setting of Punjab State in detail
through physical and political maps.
2. To examine the pattern of select population characteristics.
3. To study the distribution of major crops, industries and
transport links in the state.
4. To understand the intra regional variations in the select
aspects.
Unit—I
Location, evolution of the state, administrative divisions.
Relief, drainage, climate, soils, vegetation, mineral and power
resources.
Unit—II
Population : Numbers, distribution, density, growth (birth rate, death
rate and migration), religious composition, urbanization.
Agriculture : Main characteristics including green revolution,
irrigation, main crops (wheat, rice, cotton, sugarcane) and their
distribution, agricultural marketing, livestock and dairying, problems
of agriculture.
Unit—III
Industries : Main characteristics, distribution pattern of major
industries (cotton textile, sugar, hosiery, engineering) industrial
concentration, problems of industrialization.
Transport and Trade : Road, rail and their transport; inter-state
trade.
Unit—IV
Regional Geography of Majha, Doaba, Malwa and major
characteristics of each region.
Note :
students will attempt any 15 parts in about 25-30 words
each. Each part will carry 2 marks (Total 30 marks).
2. The whole syllabus will be divided into 4 units. Eight questions
will be set out of the whole syllabus, 2 from each unit. The
students will be required to attempt one question from each
unit. These will be in addition to the compulsory question at
serial number 1. Each question will carry 10 marks. (Total
40 Marks).
3. Special credit will be given to appropriate use of maps and
diagrams.
Books Recommended :
Essential Readings :
1. Mankoo, Darshan S. : Geography of Punjab, Kalyani
Publication, Ludhiana, 1977.
2. Mavi, H.S. & : Geography of Punjab, National
Tiwana, D.S. Book Trust, Delhi, 1993.
3. Singh, Malkit : Geography of Punjab, Reshmeet,
Publications, Jalandhar.
Further Readings :
1. Census of India : Punjab: Census Atlas, Vol. XIII,
No.IX, 1996.
2. Deshpande, C.D. : India : A Regional Interpretation,
Northern Book Centre, New
Delhi, 1992.
3. Gosal G.S. & : Regional Disparities in Levels of
Gopal Krishan Socio-Economic Development in
Punjab,Vishal Publications,
Kurukshetra, 1984.
4. Gupta, S.P. : The Punjab : An Overview, Ess

Pee Publications, Chandigarh,
2005.
5. Singh, Pritam : Punjab Economy : The Emerging
Pattern, Enkay Publishers, New
Delhi, 1995.
6. Singh, R.L., (Ed.) : India : A Regional Geography,
National Geographical Society of
India, 1990, reprint.
7. Spate O.H.K. & : India and Pakistan : A General
Learmonth, A.T.A. and Regional Geography.
Metheun, London, Latest Edition.
GEOGRAPHY
Paper-C
Cartography
Written Paper of 3 Hours : 35 Marks
Distribution of Terminal Exam.
Viva and Practical Record (10+15) : 25 Marks
Objective :
1. To apprise the students with symbolization of different types
of geographical data and depiction of various spatial data.
2. To provide training in application of various graphical
methods of depicting geographic data.
3. To train the students to interpret the topographical sheets at
different scales course Content.
Unit—I
Symbolization of Geographical Data :
a) Point symbols : Dot, circle, sphere.
b) Line symbols : Isopleths and flow lines.
c) Areas symbols : Choropleth.
Unit—II
Construction and Significance of the following:
a) Columnar diagrams : Simple, percentage, superimposed,
composite.
b) Graphs : Line graphs, climograph, hythergraph, erograph,
wind rose.
Unit—III
a) Cartographic Representation of : Population data
(distribution, density, growth, migration and literacy)
b) Agriculture data (land utilization, distribution of crops,

percentage of cropped area and irrigated areas).
c) Industrial data (distribution, employment and production)
d) Transport data (traffic flow).
Unit—IV
Topographical Maps : Significance of topographical maps
in geographical studies.
Study and Interpretation of topographical Maps of India (two
sheets : one representing a hilly/mountainous tract and the other a
plain tract).
Profiles : Definition, Types : Serial, Super-imposed,
Projected, Composite, Longitudinal and Transverse Profiles.
Note :
students will attempt any 7 parts in about 25-30 words each.
Each part will carry one mark (Total 7 marks).
2. The whole syllabus be divided into 4 units. Eight questions
will be set out of the whole syllabus i.e. 2 from each unit.
The students will be required to attempt one question from
each unit. These will be in addition to the compulsory
question at serial number 1. Each question will carry 7 marks.
(Total 28 Marks)
3. Evaluation of Practical Record will be done at the time of
viva-voice examination. A minimum of 25 sheet are to be
prepared by each student. There will be no laboratory
exercise at that time.
4. In case, the candidate has applied for improvement, he/she
should be required to make a fresh practical note book.
5. For practical classes, the number of students in one group
shall not exceed fifteen.
Books Recommended :
Essential Readings :
1. Khullar, D.R. : Essentials of Practical Geography,
New Academic Publishing Co., Mai
Hiran Gate, Jalandhar, 2000.
2. Robinson, A.H. : Elements of Cartography, John
Wiley, New York, 1995.
3. Singh, Gopal : Mapwork & Practical Geography,
Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 1995.
4. Singh, R.L. & Singh : Mapwork and Practical Geography,
Raghunandan Central Book Depot, Allahabad,
1993.
Further Readings:
1. Birch, T.W. : Maps Topographical & Statistical;
Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1949.
2. Garnett, A. : Geographical Interpretation of
Topographical Maps, George Harrap
& Co., London, 1953.
3. Monkhosue, F.J. : Maps and Diagrams, Methuen &
Co., London, 1994 (reprint).
Journalism and Mass Communication

Paper-A
Writing for Print Media
Note : Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners :
follows:
be compulsory. Each question will carry 2 marks; total weightage
being 20 marks.
Section-B will consist of short-answer type questions with answer
to each question one and half pages in length (250 words). Seven to
eight questions will be set by the examiner and five will be attempted
by the candidates. Each question will carry 7 marks. The total
weightage of the section shall be 35 marks.
question up to four pages in length (800 words). Four questions will
be set by the examiner and the candidates will be required to attempt
two. Each question will carry 10 marks, total weightage of the section
being 20 marks.
News : Writing a news story; chronological, logical and inverted
pyramid styles, Headlines : Types of headlines.
Leads; Types of leads, Sources of News, Elements of News.
Organisational setup of a news paper office; Role of editor,
a sub-editor and news editor.
How to produce a news paper
How to get a news paper registered
Qualities of a journalist
Functions of the Press
Printing Process
New Technology in Print Media
Practicals :25 Marks
Books Recommended
1. Newspaper Editing : K.M. Srivastava, Sterling Publishers
Pvt. Ltd. (1987).
2. Newspaper Management : Golab Kothari, Intercultural
Open University (1995).
Journalism and Mass Communication

Paper-B
Mass Media and Photography
Note : Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners :
follows:
be compulsory. Each question will carry 2 marks; total weightage
being 20 marks.
Section-B will consist of short-answer type questions with answer
to each question one and half pages in length (250 words). Seven to
eight questions will be set by the examiner and five will be attempted
by the candidates. Each question will carry 7 marks. The total
question up to four pages in length (800 words). Four questions will
be set by the examiner and the candidates will be required to attempt
two. Each question will carry 10 marks, total weightage of the section
being 20 marks.
Traditional and Folk Media : Characteristics, Role in the age of
Electronic Media.
Radio : Characteristics & Principles of Broadcasting, Popular Radio
Genres, Code of Broadcasting.
Television : Characteristics, Objectives of the medium, Educational
TV, Satellite Invasion and Cable Television, Internet.
Photography : Introduction to Photography, Aperture setting,
Shutter speed, Lens, How to take good picture, Types of Cameras,
Qualities of a good photograph, Photojournalism.
Practicals :25 Marks
Books Recommended :
1. Handbook of Journalism & Mass Communication : Virbala
Aggarwal, 2004, Concept Publishing Co., New Delhi.
2. Photography : Barbara Upton, 1981, Little Borwn & Co.,
Boston.
Mass Communications & Video Production

(Vocational)
Paper - I
Sound & Script Writing for Media
Instructions to the Paper Setters
There shall be three parts i.e. A, B & C in each.
- Part A consists of 10 questions carrying 2 mark for each
question 10x2=20 Marks
- Part B consists of eight questions. Candidtes have to do

any six questions which will carry 4 marks for each
questions. 6x4=24 Marks
- Part C consists of four questions and candidates have to do

any two questions which will carry 8 marks for each
question. 8x2=16 Marks
Question paper will be set in English only but the medium of

examination will be English, Punjabi and Hindi.
Sound
* Meaning
* Characteristics
* Propagation
* Acoustic Reverberation
Microphones
* Selection of Microphones
* Types of Microphones
Magnetic Recording Principles

Audio Cables & Connectors (Types & Uses)
Noise & Distortion
Dope Sheet/Exposure Sheet
Sound Recordist's role in production crew
Audio console
Script Writing
* Basics
* Elements of Good Script Writing
* Role of Writer
* Structure of Script
Subject Research (Idea, Visualisation & Script Sources of
Information)
Formats of Script Writing
Story Board
Practicals Max. Marks : 40
Writing script for various radio formats
Practical acquaintance with sound equipment
Visit to sound recording studios
Books Recommended
1. Writing scripts for TV, Willis, Edgor Chicago, Halt and
Radio and Film Rinchart. 1981
2. Basics of Video Sound Das Lyver Focal Press
Note : Practicals to be conducted by external examiner.
Mass Communications & Video Production

Paper-B
Introduction to Media (Vocational)
Time : 3 hrs. Max. Marks : 60
Instructions for Paper Setters
There shall be three parts i.e. A, B and C in each.
- Part-A consists of 10 questions carrying 2 mark for each
- Part-B consists of eight questions. Candidates have to do
any six questions which will carry 4 marks for each question.
6x4=24 Marks
- Part C consists of four questions and candidates have to do
any two questions which will carry 8 marks for each
Role & Impact of Media in Different Socio-Economic &
Political Systems/Freedom of Press
Press Laws in India
* Defamation
* Official Secrets Act, 1923
* Concept of Court Act, 1971
* Press & Registration of Books Act, 1867
* Public Libraries Act
Advertising
* Meaning & Concept
* Role & Importance
* Types of Ads
* Advertising Agency
* Advertising Budget
* Advertising Designing & Layout
Public Relations
* Meaning & Concept
* Role & Importance
* Qualities to Good PRO
* Tools/Technique of PR
* PR in Government, Public & Private Sector
Difference between PR & Advertising Propaganda, Publicity
& Public Opinion
Practicals Max. Marks : 40
Handling Cameras.
Visit to Ad, Agency, I and B organs and other media organization.
Marking of an advertisement (Print and Audio-visual)
Making of Press note/press releases.
Books Recommended :
1. Advertising, Santokki, Kalyani Publishers, 1994.
2. Handbook of Public Relation, D.S. Mehta, Allied Publishers
Limited, 1998.
3. Press laws, D.D. Basu, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,
1996.
Note : Practicals to be conducted by external examiner.

EDUCATION
Paper-A
Philosophical, Sociological and Psychological
Foundations of Education
There will be two papers of 100 marks each.
Note : 1. There will be eight questions in all, four quesitons from
each section.
2. The candidates are required to attempt atleast two
questions from each section and five in all.
Section-I
Unit-I
Philosophical, sociological and psychological foundations of
education.
Unit-II
Meaning of sociology, relationship between education and
sociology, nature and scope of educational sociology.
Unit-III
Social change-Meaning factors and role of education.
Section-II
Unit-IV
Meaning and importance of value education, imparting value
education
Unit-V
Education and international understanding.
Unit-VI
Moral and religious education.
Unit-VII
Need and importance of population education.
Books Recommended :
1. Aggarwal, J.C. - Principles and Techiques of Education,
Ayra Book Depot, New Delhi.
2. Bhatia and Narang - Theory and Principles of Education,
Ludhiana, Parkash Brothers, 1986.
3. Bhatia and Safaya - Educational : Psychology, Jalandhar
Dhanpat Rai and Sons, 1980.
4. Dhaliwal, A.S. - Vidyak Manovigyan, Patiala : Punjabi
University, 1985.
5. Sandhu, I.K. and - Sikhya Manovigyan : Punjabi
Kaur Amrio University, Patiala.
6. Saxena Swaroop, N.R.- Education in Emerging Indian Society,
and Chaturvedi Sikha R. Lall Book Depot, Meerut, 2005.
7. Sharma, T.R. - Sikhya Manovigyan, Ludhiana :
Lahore Book Shop.
8. Sociological Approach to Indian Eduction, Agra Pustik Mandir.
9. Sodhi, T.S. - Bharti Sikhya, Patiala : R.K.
Publication, 1989.
10. Taneja, V.R. - Socio-Philosophical Approach to
Education, Delhi : Atlantic Publishers,
1983.
EDUCATION
Paper-B
There will be two papers of 100 marks each.
Note : 1. There will be eight questions in all, four questions
from each section.
2. The candidates are required to attempt atleast two
questions from each section and five in all.
Section-I
Unit-I
Meaning, Nature and theories of learning.
Unit-II
Meaning of memory, retention, recall, recognition and
measures of improving memory.
Unit-III
Concept of intelligence, concept of I.O. and its measurement.
Section-II
Unit-IV
Meaning types and Measurement of aptitudes.
Unit-V
Meaning and importance of evaluation, examination reforms.
Unit-VI
Types and importance of co-curricular activities.
Unit-VII
Characteristics and problems of exceptional children.
Gifted, Slow learner & Problem Children.
Books Recommended
1. Bhatia and Narang - Theory and Principles of
Education, Parkash Brothers,
Ludhiana, 1996.
2. Dayakar, Reddy, D. - Value Oriented Education,
Educational Psychology,
Jalandhar, Paul Publishers, 1985.
3. Dhaliwal, A.S. - Vidhyak Manovigyan, Patiala :
Punjabi University, 1985.
4. Govt. of India, - Report of Secondary Education
Ministry of Education Comission (1952-53), New Delhi.
5. Prasad and Chandra, - Sociological Foundation of
Deepak Education KSK Publisher, Delhi,
2007.
6. Saxena Swaroop - Education in Emerging Indian
and Chaturvedi Sikha Society, R. Lall Book Depot,
Meerut, 2005.
7. Sodhi, T.S. - Philosophical and Sociological
Foundations of Education, Bawa
Publication, Patiala, 2007.
8. Taneja, V.R. - Foundations of Education,
Chandigarh, Mahindra.Capital
Punjab, 2006.
9. Walia, J.S. - Philosophical and Sociological
Basis of Education, Ahim Paul
Publisher, Jalandhar, 2007.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Paper-A
Note : - Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners. Each
question paper may consist of three sections as follows:
Section A : The candidates are required to attempt all the six
questions. Each question carrying two marks. 6x2=12 Marks
Section B : The candidates are required to attempt seven out of
twelve questions. Each question carrying four marks.
7x4=28 Marks
Section C : The candidates are required to attempt two out of four
questions. Each question carrying ten marks. 10x2=20 Marks
Part-A
1. Meaning of Learning, Nature of Skill Learning and laws of
Learning.
2. Learning Curve.
3. Motivation in Physical Education.
4. Play meaning and theories.
5. Psychological factors effecting sports performance i.e.
stress tension, anxiety, aggression.
6. Psychological characteristics of the adolescent in sports
situations.
Part-B
1. Transfer of training, its application in sports situations.
2. Growth and development during childhood;
i) Physical
ii) Mental
iii) Emotional
iv) Inter-personal social development.
3. Sports and Economy.

4. Causes of poor performance of Sports in India.
5. Sports and Socialization-integration through sports (National
& International)
6. Sports, Politics and their relationship.
Practical - 40 (Internal - 10, External - 30)
7. Games : Fooball; Volleyball; Tennis; Hockey.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Paper-B

Note : - Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners. Each
question paper may consist of three sections as follows:
Section A : The candidates are required to attempt all the six
questions. Each question carrying two marks. 6x2=12 Marks
Section B : The candidates are required to attempt seven out of
twelve questions. Each question carrying four marks.
7x4=28 Marks
Section C : The candidates are required to attempt two out of four
questions. Each question carrying ten marks. 10x2=20 Marks
Part-A
1. Meaning, aims and types of Yoga.
2. The practice of Asans and their importance, meditative
poses, Padma, Vajra, Sukh Asanas, Cultural poses, Halasan,
Sarvangasana, Bhujangasna, Salbhasana, Dhanurasana,
Chakarasana,
3. Pranayam, its types, objectives and Physiological values.
4. Sudhi kirya; its types, objectives and Physiological values.
5. Effect of Yogic and Physical exercises on various systems
of the body.
Part-B
1. Respiratory system, Organs of respiratory, Mechanism of
respiration.
2. Excretory system; Structure and functions of kidney and
skin.
3. Endocrine system, Meaning of endocrine glands, functions
and location of pituitary, thyroid and adrenal glands.

4. Nervous system : its organs and functions.
5. Circulatory system: Heart and its structure, Mechanism of
circulation of Blood, various types of blood vessels.
6. Care, prevention of causes and cure of sports injuries (sprain,
contusion, dislocation and fractures).
Practicals
Athletics --40 Marks (Internal 10, Externa1 - 30)
One Throw.
One Jump
One Race
References:
1. Blair, Jones, Educational Psychology, The Macmillan
and Simpson Co., New York, 1962.
2. Lindgren, H.E. Educational Psychology in the Class
Room, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1962.
3. Biggeh & Hunt Pyschological Foundations of Education,
Harper & Row Publishers, 1962.
4. Crow, L.D. Educational Psychology, Littlefield
& Crow, A Adams & Co., S. Chand and Co., New
Delhi, 1979.
5. Whiting, HTA Readings in Sports Psychology, Henry
Kimpton Publishers, London, 1972.
6. Puni, A.T. Sports Psychology, (An Abridged)
translation by G.S. Sandhu, N.I.S.
Patiala, 1980.
7. Suin, R.M. Psychology in Sports, Methods and
Applications, Surjeet Publications, New
Delhi, 1982.
Books Recommended :
1. Singh, Kanwaljeet and Singh Inderjeet : Sports Sociology,
Friends Publication, New Delhi, 2000.
2. Tandan, D.K. et.al, : Scienctific basis of Physical Education
and Sports, Frends Publication, New Delhi, 2001.
3. Singh, Ajmer and Gill Jagtar : Essentials of Physical
Education and Olympic movement, Kalyani Publishers,
Ludhiana, 2004.
4. Kang, G.S. : Anatomy, Physiology and Health Education,
Publication Bureau, Punjabi University, Patiala, 2000.
5. Kang, G.S. and Deol, N.S. : An Introduction to Health and
Physical Education, 21st Century, Patiala, 2008.
PHILOSOPHY
Paper-A
Logic : Western and Indian
Time Allowed : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 100
Lectures to be delivered : 75
Pass Marks : 35
Instructions for the Paper-setters
The question paper will consist of five sections : A,B,C,D
and E. Section A,B,C and D will have two questions from the
respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 15 marks each.
Section E will consist of 10 short answer type questions which will
cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 40 marks in all,
each short answer type question carrying 4 marks.
Instructions for the candidates
Candidates are required to attempt one question each from
the sections A, B, C and D of the question paper and the entire
Section E.
Section-A
1. Definition, Nature and Utility of Western Logic.
2. Laws of Thought : Identity, Contradiction, Excluded Middle,
Law of Sufficient Reason and their Characteristics.
3. Terms : Kinds, Connotation, Denotation and Relation
between Connotation and Denotation.
Section-B
4. Proposition : Classification of Propositions, Four-fold division
of Propositions.
5. Immediate Inference : Square of Opposition-contradiction,
contrary, sub-altration.
6. Mediate Inference : Structure and Rules of Validity of
Categorical Syllogism.
Section-C
7. Definition of Deduction and Induction; Distinction between
Deduction and Induction.
8. Causation : Nature of Cause, Plurality of Causes (Mill)
9. Nature and Conditions of a Valid Hypothesis.
Section-D
10. Definition, Scope and Utility of Indian Logic.
11. Nyaya Syllogism.
12. Difference between Nyaya Syllogism and Aristotelian
Syllogism.
Section-E
Ten Short answer type questions.
Recommended Readings
1. Cohen and Negal, Introduction to Logic and Scientific
Methods, Allied Publishers, Bombay, 1976.
2. R.D. Nirakari, Uchera Tarak Shastra (Punjabi).
3. Wazir Singh & Harnam Singh, Tarak Gian De Mudhle
Niyam : (Part-I) (Nigman), Punjabi University, Patiala.
4. Wazir Singh & Harnam Singh, Tarak Gian De Mudhle
Niyam : (Part-II) (Nigman), Punjabi University, Patiala.
5. Wazir Singh & A.P. Sharma, Tarak Gian Di Jan-Pahichan.
6. S.S. Barlingay, A Modern Introduction to Indian Logic,
National Publishing House, Delhi, 1965.
7. Peter A Facione, Logical and Logic thinking, a modular
approach, McGraw Hill, New York 1978.
8- Mk- lqjsUnz] Hkkjrh; rdZ 'kkL=k dh :i js[kk] jktLFkku xazFk vkdneh] t;iqjA
PHILOSOPHY
Paper-B
Applied Ethics (Opt. i)
Lectures to be delivered : 75+50=125
(Only for Regular Students) Max. Marks : 100
Time : 3 Hours Theory Marks : 60
Pass Marks : 35% Project Work & Practical : 40
Note : Instructions for the Paper-Setter :
The question paper will consist of five Sections : A,B,C,D &
E. Sections A,B,C and D will have two questions from the respective
sections of the syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Section E
will consist of 10 short answer type questions which will cover the
entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 20 marks. Each short answer
type question will be of 2 marks. There will be a separate paper for
the project and practical related to the subject. For it there will be
four lectures in a week besides the theory lectures. The focus of
these lectures would be on the applied aspect of the course. A
candidate will have to prepare a project report at least of 15 pages.
A teacher from the affiliated colleges will conduct the viva-voce
before the theory examination and will award the marks on the
basis of project report and viva voce separately. Out of the 40
marks, 20 marks are each for the project report and viva-voce.
Instructions for the Candidates :
the sections A,B,C & D of the question paper and the entire section
E. They will have to prepare a project report of atleast of 15 pages
and will have to appear in viva-voce. The project report and viva
voce will be of 20 marks each.
Section-A
Introduction
1. Applied Ethics : Nature and Scope.
2. De-ontological and Teleological Approaches to Moral
Action.
Section-B
3. Ecology : Definition, Scope and its relation to Ethics.
4. Man-Nature Relationship (Indian Tradition).
Section-C
Ecological Problems
5. Population
6. Pollution
7. Nuclear Threats
Section-D
Professional Ethics
8. Medical Ethics
9. Educational Ethics and Moral Principles
10. Legal Ethics
Section-E
Ten short answer type questions.
Recommended Readings :
1. Surjit Kaur Chahal, Environment and the Moral Life,
Towards a New Paradigm, Ashish Publishing House, New
Delhi, 1994.
2. T.L. Beauchamp & J.E. Childress, (Jr.), Principles of
Biomedical Ethics, 2nd Ed., Oxford University Press,
Oxford, 2001.
3.
R. Attield, Environmental Philosophy : Principles and
Prospects, Aldershot, Avebury, 1994.
4. Harold H. Titus, Ethics for Today, Eurasia Publishing
House, New Delhi, 1966.
5. Oleg Dreyer, Ecological Problems of developing
Countries, Ajanta Publications, Delhi, 1989.
PHILOSOPHY
Paper-B (Opt. ii)
(Social Philosophy)
Lecture to be delivered : 75 Pass Marks : 35%
Instructions for the paper-setter
The Question paper will consist of five Sections : A, B, C, D
& E. Sections A, B, C, D and E will have two questions from the
respective sections of the syllabus and will carry 15 marks each.
Section E will consist of 10 short answer type questions which will
cover the entire syllabus uniformly and will carry 40 marks in all,
each short answer type question carrying 4 marks.
Instructions for the Candidates
the sections A, B, C and D of the question paper and the entire
section E.
Section-A
1. Social Philosophy : Nature and Importance of Social
Philosophy.
2. Social Philosophy and Ethics.
3. Social Philosophy and Political Science.
Section-B
4. Plato's Theory of State
5. Theories about origin of Society : Organic Theory, Social
Contract Theory and Idealistic Theory
6. Social Progress : Meaning and Factors
Section-C
7. Major Social Theories : Socialism and Democracy
8. Gandhism : Swaraj and Sarvodaya
9. Social Philosophy of Sikhism : Justice and Equality
Section-D
10. Social Problems : Dowry, Divorce and Corruption
11. Crime : Meaning and Nature of Crime
12. Punishment : Theories of Punishment and Capital
Punishment
Section-E
Ten short answer type questions
Recommended Readings :
1. Daya Krishan, Social Philosophy : Past and Future,
Indian Institute of Advanced Study, Shimla, 1969.
2. Dr. A.K. Sinha, Social Philosophy, Krishna, Amritsar, n.d.
3. Anthony Quinton (Ed.), Political Philosophy, Oxford,
London, 1973.
4. Ram Nath Sharma, Overview of Philosophy, Lucky Star,
Delhi, 1983.
5. Robert N. Bech, Handbook of Social Philosophy.
6. f`. gurSrnjIq isMG, gurU n`nk b`xI ivclI nYiqkq` d` Ejok`
pRsMg|
Drm EiDEYn
pypr-ey (s`mI Drm)
sm~ : 3 Gµty ku@l Eµk : 100
lYkcr~ dI igxqI : 75 p`s hox leI Eµk : 35%
pypr sYtr leI hdìeq~ :
pypr dy pµj B`g hoxgy : a, E, e, s Eqy h| B`g a, E, e Eqy s
ivcoN 2-2 pRSn pu@Cy j`xgy| ividE`rQIE~ ny iek-iek pRSn krn` ho vyg`
Eqy hr iek pRSn dy 15 Eµk hoxgy| kul Eµk 60 hoxgy| B`g h ivcoN sMKyp
au#qr~ v`ly 10 pRSn hoxgy, ijhVy s`ry slybs iv@coN hoxgy Eqy aunH~ dy 40
Eµk hoxgy| hryk pRSn dy 4-4 Eµk hoxgy|
pRIiKE`rQI leI hdìeq~ :
B`g a, E, e, s ivcoN kyvl ie@k-ie@k pRSn krn` hY Eqy B`g 'h'
dy s`ry pRSn zrUrI hn|
B`g (a) whUdI Drm
1. mu@FlI j`x pC`x--whUdI Drm d` ieiqh`s
2. pYgMbr mUs` d` jIvn qy is@iKE`v~
3. whUdI Drm-gRMQ qor`h (The Law), nbI (The Prophets), ikq`b~
(The Writings) b`ry sMKyp j`xk`rI|
B`g (E) eIsèI m@q
1. eIsèI crc d` E`rMB Eqy p`s`r (nvyN nym dI pµjvIN pusqk
'rsUl~ dy krqb' dI pusqk 'qy E`Dìrq)|
2. wsU msIh d` jIvn qy is@iKE`v~
3. nv~ nym (New Testament) iqMn mu@K B`g:
1. m@qI dI EµjIl sMiKpq j`xk`rI
2. 21 p@qr (Epistles) sMq p`l Eqy dUjy sMq~ dy
3. pRk`S dI poQI (Apocalypes) b`ry sMKyp j`xk`rI
B`g (e) : iesl`m
1. ipCokV, E`rMB Eqy ivk`s, iesl`m qoN pihl~ Erb dI D`rimk
Eqy smìjk siQqI|
2. pYgMbr muhMmd d` jIvn qy is@iKE`v~, iesl`m dy pµj QMm (Five

pillars) eIm`n, sl`q, roz`, h@j, zk`q)
3. pivqr kur`n b`ry sMKyp j`x-pC`x : sMp`dn` Eqy bxqr
B`g (s) : p`rsI m@ q
1. sMKyp j`x-pC`x: aus smyN dyS dI smìjk Eqy D`rimk EvsQ`,
jl`vqnI Eqy B`rq ivc E`gmn|
2. jurquSq d` jIvn qy is@iKE`v~ : nykI-bdI d` isD~q, pirvìrk
Eqy smìjk BèIc`ry dI bxqr|
3. Ehur m`zd`, Ehrmn Eqy jMd-Evysq` dI sMKyp j`xk`rI|
B`g (h) sM K y p au # qr~ v`ly 10 pR S n
su J èIE~ pu s qk~ dI sU c I :
1. jYmz mYsI. msIhIEq : iek pircw, PkIr isMG EYNf sMnz,
EµimRqsr|
2. bèIbl (pµj`bI Enuv`d), bèIbl susìetI E`& ieMfIE`, bMglOr|
3. jI.E`r. isMG Eqy sI. fblaU, fyivf, jhUdI Drm pRisMqIw
Drm, lKnaU pbiliSMg hàUs, lKnaU|
4. gu l vM q isM G : iesl`m Eqy sU & Iv`d, pµ j `bI wU n IvristI,
pitE`l`|
5. gurbcn isMG qìlb, (sMp`.) sMs`r dy kuJ pRmu@K Drm, pµj`bI
wUnIvristI, pitE`l`|
6. David F. Hindson, History of Israel, ISPCK, Kashmiri Gate,
Delhi.
7. John Bright, History of Israel, Lucknow Publishing House,
Lucknow.
8. Christianity, Panjabi University, Patiala.
9. John Foster, The First Advance Church History, ISPCK,
New Delhi.
10. K. Ali, A Study of Islamic History, Idarah-i-Adaboiyat,
Delhi.
11. Islam, Punjabi University, Patiala.
12. P.K. Hitti, History of Ardas, Macmillan Education Ltd.

13. M.M. Pickthal, The Meaning of the Glorious Koran,
Mentor Classics, New York.
14. Alfred Guillaume, Islam, Lion Square, London.
15. Denmise E. Clark, Jesus Christ—His Life & Teachings,
1654, Madarsa Road, Kashmiri Gate, Delhi.
16. Duncan Greenless, The Gospel of Zorathustra, Adyar
Publication, Madras.
17. N. Dhalla, History of Zoroastrianism, K.R. Cama, Orient,
Longman, Delhi.
Drm EiDEYn
pypr-bI
(mDk`lIn Eqy E`Duink D`rimk lihr~)
sm~ : 3 Gµty ku@l Eµk : 100
lYkcr~ dI igxqI : 75 p`s hox leI Eµk : 35%
pypr sYtr leI hdìeq~
pypr dy pµj B`g hoxgy : a, E, e, s Eqy h| B`g a, E, e Eqy s
ivcoN 2-2 pRSn pu@Cy j`xgy| ividE`rQIEE~ ny iek-iek pRSn krn`
hovyg` Eqy hr iek pRSn dy 15 Eµk hoxgy| kul Eµk 60 hoxgy| B`g 'h'
ivcoN sMKyp au#qr~ v`ly 10 pRSn hoxgy, ijhVy s`ry islybs iv@coN hoxgy
Eqy aunH~ dy 40 Eµk hoxgy| hryk pRSn dy 4-4 Eµk hoxgy|
pRIiKE`rQI leI hdìeq~ :
B`g a, E, e. s ivcoN kyvl ie@k-ie@k pRSn krn` hY Eqy B`g 'h'
dy s`ry pRSn zrUrI hn|
B`g (a) : BgqI lihr
1. BgqI lihr : auqpqI qy ivk`s
2. au#qrI B`rq dI inrgux Eqy srgux BgqI prMpr`
3. BgqI lihr dy pRmuK Bgq~ dy jIvn n`mdyv, kbIr, rivd`s
B`g (E) : sUPI m@q
1. E`rMB, ivk`s Eqy ieslìmk ipCokV
2. sUPI m@q dIE~ ivSySq`v~, h`l Eqy muk`m dy hv`ly sihq|
3. icSqI islisl` qy b`b` PrId-jIvn qy is@iKE`v~
B`g (e) : pRmu@K Drm pRvrqk
1. cYqMnw mh`pRBU : jIvn qy is@iKE`v~
2. SMkr dyv : jIvn dy is@iKE`v~
3. mIr~ bèI : jIvn qy is@iKE`v~
B`g (s) :
aunIvIN sdI dIE~ pRmu@K D`rimk lihr~
1. r`m` ikRSn imSn
2. bRhmo sm`j
3. E`rIE` sm`j
B`g (h) : sMKyp au#qr~ v`ly 10 pRSn

suJèIE~ pusqk~ dI sUcI :
1. prsUr`m cqurvydI, au#qrI B`rq kI sMq prMpr`, (ihMdI), B`rqIw
(pusqk BMf`r) lihr pRYs, El`h`b`d|
2. gulvMq isMG, iesl`m qy sU&Iv`d, pµj`bI wUnIvristI, pitE`l`|
3. mnmohn isMG, BgqI Eµdoln Eqy gurU n`nk, mndIp pRk`Sn,
nvIN id@lI|
4. q`rn isMG, blbIr kOr, SyK &rId-jIvn qy rcn` , pµj`bI
wUnIvristI, pitE`l`|
5. mnmohn isMG, BgqI isD~q dy E`D`r sRoq, pµj`bI wUinvristI
pitE`l`, 1991.
6. l`l isMG, BgqI kìv, B`S` ivB`g pµj`b, pitE`l`, 1970.
7. gurSrnjIq isMG (f`.) gurU n`nk b`xI ivclI nYiqkq` d` Ejok`
pRsMg, BèI cqr isMG jIvn isMG, EµimRqsr, 2007.
8. Bahadur Mal, Dayanand and Study in Hinduism, Sadhu
Ashram, Hoshiarpur, 1962.
9. Darshan Singh, Indian Bhakti Tradition and Sikh Gurus,
Lyall Book Depot, Ludhiana.
10. Ganda Singh (Ed), Punajb Past and Present, (Singh Sabha
Issue) Punjabi University, Patiala.
11. J.N. Farquhar, Modern Religious Movements in India,
Munshi Ram, Manohar Lal, Oriented Publishers, Delhi, 1967.
12. T.M.P. Mahadevan, Ten Saints of India, Bharti Vidya
Bhawan, Bombay.
13- izk.kukFk iadt] vfcuklh fxj/kj dh ehjk¡] :ik ,.M dEiuh]
ubZ fnYyh] 2001-
14- Lokeh izHkqikn] Hkxoku Jh pSrU; egkizHkq] HkfDrosnkar cqd VªLV]
eqacbZ] 2002-
MUSIC (INSTRUMENTAL)
Paper - A Theory : 3 Hours Durations Marks : 80
Paper - B Practical : 20 Minutes Marks : 100
Project Work Marks : 20
Total Marks : 200
Teaching work load :
Theory : 3 Periods per week
Practical : 9 Periods per week
Note : There should not be more then ten students in one
group of practical class.
Instructions given to the examiners are as under :
1. There should not be more than ten students in a batch for
practical examination.
2. While sending the syllabus to paper setter in theory the
syllabus prescribed for the practical paper should also be
sent.
3. Separate practical paper should be set for each class from
practical paper-B prescribed syllabus.
4. The paper setter would set nine questions in all. Three in
unit-I, four in unit-II & two in unit-III. The candidate may
be asked to attempt five questions in all selecting at least
one question from each part.
5. Candidate can take both subjects i.e. Vocal & Instrumental
Music as an elective subjects.
6. Candidate can take Tabla subject along with Instrumental
Music (mentioned below in Seriol No. 7).
7. The practical paper will be of 100 marks for the private &
regular candidates. 20 marks for the computer aided project
report in the form of presentation relating to any field of
music (approx. 3 to 5 pages) using computers. (MS-Office)
which will be evaluated by the external examiner at the

time of examination. Separate marks sheet should be used
for project report.
8. In Instrumental Music the candidates have the option to
take any one of the following instruments :-
Sitar, Sarangi, Veena, Sarod, Dilruba, Violin, Guitar, Bansuri,
Shahnai, Rabab, Saranda, Taus, Santoor and other Ins.
Played on the basis of Indian Classical Music.
Paper-A (Theory)
Unit - I
1. Historical developments of Indian Music during the medieval
period i.e. from 12th to 15th century with special reference
to Granths Gharanas & Shallies.
2. Computer & Music
3. The Life sketch and Contributions of the followings :-
a) Ustad Villyat Khan
b) Ali Akar Khan
c) Abdul Halim Zafar Khan
d) Shiv Kumar Sharma
Unit - II
1. Knowledge of the following :-
a) Youth & Classical Music
ii) Tuning of your instrument
iii) The contribution of stage music to the growth of popular
music.
2. Importance of Gharana System in Indian music with its
merits and demerits.
3. Descriptions and Notation of prescribed Ragas (Gats and
Talas) Ragas :- Malkauns, Sohani, Assawari, Puriya,
Bhimpalasi.
4. Talas : Ada-Chautal, Sultal, Rupaktal
5. Brief knowledge of the following Ragas : (Aaroh, Avroh,
Palar etc.) Marwa, Bhairvi, Purvi, Jaunpuri, Chanderkauns.
Unit - III
1. Importance of Instrumental Music in Gurmat Sangeet.
2. Contribution of Guru Teg Bahadur Ji towards Indian Music.
Paper - B
(Practical)
Time : 30 Minutes
Practical : Max. Marks 100
Project work : Marks 20
Total : 120
(a) One Drut Gat with Alap, Jor, Tora and Jhalas in each of the
prescribed Ragas : Malkauns, Assawari, Puriya, Bhimpalasi.
(b) One Vilambit Gat with Alaps and Toras in any of the
prescribed Ragas.
(c) One Gat in Chautal (Dhrupad Style) in Single and double
layakaries in any of the prescribed Ragas.
(d) One Gat in Rupak Tal in Madhya laya with toras.
(e) Ability to recite Ada-Chautal, Sultal and Rupak Tal; by hand
in ekgun and dugun layakaries.
(f) Use of the two Swaras Meend i.e., Sa Re Ga, Re Ga Ma
etc.
(g) Tuning of your instrument.
(h) Ability to play Rupak Jhap Tal on Tabla.
(i) Ability to play four Alankars based on Thats of prescribed
Ragas in the course.
(j) Brief knowledge of Ragas (Aaroh, Avroh, Pakar etc.)
Marwa, Bhairvi, Purvi, Jaunpuri.
Books Recommended
1. Rag Parichaya H.C. Shrivastava (published by
Sangeet Sadan Prakashan
Allahabad) 2004.
2. Sangeet Visharad Sangeet Karayalaya, Hathras, 2004.
3. Hamare Sangeet Rattan Sangeet Karayalaya,

Hathras, 1978.
4. Gurmat Sangeet Dr. Gurnam Singh, Published by
Prabandh Ate Parsar Panjabi Uni., Patiala.
5. Nibandh Sangeet Sangeet Karayalaya, Hathras, 1989.
Project Work M.M. : 20

*It will be Based on computer aided Programme in the
form of presentation relating to any field of Music (Approx. 3 to 5
pages) using computers (MS-Office) which will be evaluated by
the external examiner at the time of examination. Separate mark
sheet should be used for projcet report.
MUSIC (VOCAL)
Paper - A Theory : 3 Hours Durations Marks : 80
Paper - B Practical : 20 Minutes Marks : 100
Total Marks : 200
Teaching work load :
Theory : 3 Periods per week
Practical : 9 Periods per week
Instructions given to the examiners are as under :
1. There should not be more than ten students in a batch for
2. Harmonium will be allowed as an acompaniment in vocal
music.
syllabus prescribed for practical paper should also be sent.
5. The paper setter will set nine questions in all. Three in
unit-i, four in unit-ii & two in unit-iii. The candidate may
one question from each unit.
6. The practical paper will be of 100 marks for the private &
regular candidates. 20 marks for the computer aided project
report in the form of presentation relating to any filed of
music approx. 3 to 5 pages) using computers. (MS-Office)
which will be evaluated by the external examiner at the
time of examination. Separate marks sheet should be used
for project report.
7. Candidate can take both subjects i.e. Vocal & Instrumental
Music as an elective subject.
8. Candidate can take Tabla subject alongwithMusic Vocal.
MUSIC (VOCAL)
Paper - A (Theory)
Time : 3 Hours Max.Marks : 80
Unit-I
1. Historical Development of Indian Music during the period
i.e. from 14th to 17th century with special reference to
Musicians, Granths & Changing Traditions of Music.
2. Definition of the following :-
Bol-Alaap, Bol-Bant, Upaj, Murki, Katka, Mukhra, Gamak,
Varieties of Tan. Teaching & Learning Methods of Music.
3. Contributions in detail and life sketches in brief of the
following great master :-
i) Rajan Sajan Mishra
ii) Reshid Khan
iii) Pt. Bhim Sen Joshi
iv) Kishori Amolker
Unit-II
1. Knowledge of the following :-
i) Laya and Tal in Folk Music
ii) Methods of tuning your instrument (Tanpura)
iii) The place of Harmonium in Vocal Music in present
period.
2. Detailed knowledge of Dhrupad, Dhammar and Khayal
Styles of Singing.
3. Description and notation of the prescribed ragas (Khayals)
& Talas.
Ragas :- Miyan ki Sarang, Bhairvi, Poorvi, Jaunpuri

Malkuns.
4. Talas :- Tilwara, Deepchandi, Chautal.
5. Non detailed ragas :-
Dhanasari, Sorath, Chanderkaus, Asawari
Unit - III
1. Folk Gayan Shallies in Gurmat Sangeet.
2. Salient features of keertan chowki.
MUSIC (VOCAL)
Paper-B (Practical)
Time : 20 Minutes
Practical Max. Marks : 100
Project work Marks : 20
Total Marks : 120
1. One drut Khayal in each of the following ragas :- Bhairavi,
Poorvi, Miyan ki Sarang, Jaunpuri Malkons.
2. One Vilambit Khayal in any ragas prescribed in the course
with alap and tanas.
3. One Dhrupad with Duggen, Tigun and Chougun layakaries
in any of the prescribed ragas.
4. One Shabad in Nirdhaat Raga with proper Gurmat Gayaki.
5. Ability to recite Tilwara, Deepchandi, Chautal by hand.
6. Notation of the khayals and talas prescribed in the syllabus.
7. Description of the ragas and talas prescribed in the syllabi.
8. Ability to demonstrate Teevra and Kehrva on Tabla.
9. Ability to Sing in meed.
Books Recommended
1. Sangeet Vishard Basant, Sangeet Karyalaya Hathras
2004
2. Rag Parichaya G.C.Srivastava 2004
Part-II (Sangeet Sadan Parkashan,
Allahabad)
3. Hamare Sangeet Sangeet Karyalaya Hathras 1978
Rattan
4. Gurmat Sangeet Dr. Gurnam singh Punjabi
Prabandh te Pasar University, Patiala, 2000
5. Nibandh Sangeet Sangeet Karayalaya, Hathras, 1989
INDIAN CLASSICAL DANCE

Paper - A Theory : 3 Hours Durations Max.Marks : 80
Paper - B Practical : 20 Minutes 100 Marks
Project Work 20 Marks
Total 200 Marks
Teaching work load
Theory 3 Periods per week.
Practical - 9 periods per week.
Note : There should not be more than ten students in a group
of practical class.
Instructions given to the examiners are as under :-
1. There should not more than ten students in a ten batch for
2. Harmonium will be allowed as accompaniment to perform
Nagma.
syllabus prescribed for the practical paper should also be
sent.
practical paper-'B' of prescribed syllabus.
5. The paper setter will set nine questions in all. Three in
unit-i, four in unit-ii & two in unit-iii. The candidate may
one question from each part.
6. The practical paper will be of the 100 marks for the private
& regular candidates. 20 marks for the computer aided
project report in the form of presentation relating to any
filed of musicand dance approx. 3 to 5 pages) using
computers. (MS-Office) which will be evaluated by the
external examiner at the time of examination. Separate mark
sheet should be used for project report.

Paper A : - (Theory)
Unit-I
1. Describe the historical development of Group Dance.
2. Historical development of dance in Indian theater.
3. Study of the following styles of Indian Classical Dance.
a) Manipuri Tradition in modern period
b) Kathkali on the modern stage
4. Study of the Natya Shastra with special reference to Indian
Dance.
Unit-II
1. Knowledge of the Folk Dance of Punjab & Uttar Pradesh.
2. Knowledge of Solo Dance and Group Dance and their
Comparison.
3. Biography and contribution of the following dancer in their
respective field of specialization.
i) Uday Shankar
ii) Shambhu Maharaj
4. Essay on :
i) Nayak Nayika Bheda in Dance
ii) Importance of Gayan & Vadan in Dance
iii) Dancing : A door to devine
iv) The role of dances in Indian films
Unit-III
1. Notation & Discription of follwing Talas in Dugan, Tigun
and Chaugan layakaries
Teen Tal, Jhap Tal, Dhamar, Ek-Tal, Rupak Tal
2. Notation of Nagama in Dhamar and Jhaptal

Paper - B Practical
Time : 20 Minutes Practical Max.Marks : 100
Total Marks : 120
1. Chutal (Matra-2)
Simple Tatker with Dugun and Chaugan layakaries
i) Tora 1
ii) Amad 1
iii) Salami 1
iv) Paran 1
v) Chakardar puran 2
2. Ek-Tal (Matra-12)
i) Amad 1
ii) Tora 1
iii) Paran 2
iv) Chakardar-Paran 1
v) Kavit 1
3. Roopak (Matra-7)
i) Tatkar 2
ii) Tukra 2
iii) Amad 1
iv) Tora 2
4. Practical knowledge of any two Gat Bhawa :
i) Holi
ii) Makhan Chori
iii) Goverdhan Lila
5. Paranth of all the Tukra, Tora, Paran, Chakardar Paran
by hand.
6. Theka of Teen Tal Jhap Tal, Dhamar, Ek-Tal Rupak
Tal, Single, Dugun, and Chaugun layakaries by hand
& ability to demonstrate Rupak, Dhamar Keherva on
Tabla.
7. One Trana or Chutrang

8. Ability to play Nagma on Harmonium of the following
Talas:-
i) Jhaptal
ii) Dhamar
iii) Ek-Tal
9. Practical demonstration any one farm of Uttar Pradesh
Folk Dances.
Books Recommended :
1. Kathak Nritya Ka Subbashni Kapoor, Radha
Prichey Publications New Delhi, 1997
2. Kathak Sundaryatmak Shikhakharey Knishka Publishers,
Shashtriya Nritya New Delhi, 2006
3. Atihasik Pripekesh Maya Talk Knishka Publishers,
Mein Kathak Naritya New Delhi, 2005
4. Nibandh Sangeet Laxmi Naryan Garg Sangeet
Karyalaya Hathras, 2004
form of presentation relating to any field of Music and dance
(Approx. 3 to 5 pages) using computers (MS-Office) which will be
evaluated by the external examiner at the time of examination.
Separate mark sheet should be used for projcet report.
TABLA
Paper-A Theory : 3 Hours Durations Max.Marks : 80
Paper-B Practical Marks : 100
Total marks : 200
Teaching work load
Theory : 3 periods per week.
Practical : 9 period per week.
Instructions given to the examiners are as under : -
1. There should not be more than tewelve students in a batch
for practical examination.
2. Harmonium will allowed as accompaniment to perform the
Nagma.

syllabus prescribed for practical paper should also be sent.
5. The paper setter will set nine questions in all. Three question
in each unit. The candidate may be asked to attempt five
questions in all selecting at least one question from each
part.
6. The practical paper will be of the 100 marks for the private
& regular candidates. 20 marks for the computer aided
project report in the form of presentation relating to any
filed of music (approx. 3 to 5 pages) using computers. (MS-
Office) which will be evaluated by the external examiner at
the time of examination. Separate marks sheet should be

used for project report.
7. Candidate can take Tabla subjects with Vocal & Instrumental
music (Sitar, Sarangi, Veena, Sarod, Dilruba, Violin, Guitar,
Bansuri, Shahnai, Rabab, Saranda, Taus, Santoor and any
other Swar Vadhya to be played on the basis of Indian
Classical Music).
TABLA
Paper - A (Theory)
Unit-I
1. Define and explain the following terms : Uthan, Tabla
Vadak, Sangatkar, Rela laggi, Peshkzra, Chakradar.
2. Ten Parans of Tala.
3. Popular Gharanas of Tabla and Pakahawaj, Vadan i.e.
Delhi, Lucknow, Punjab and Ajara.
4. Writing Method of Dvigun, Trigun and Chaugun Layakaries
Tokaras, Parans and Tihaies.
Unit-II
1. Life sketch of Shri Kanthe Maharaj, Shri Anokhe Lal and
Pt. Santa Parsad.
2. Define the following terms in context of Gurmat Sangeet :
Jori, Makao, Sath.
3. The place of Tabla in different musical compositions.
Unit-III
1. Notation and description of the following :-
i) Jhaptal : One quaida, one peshkar, one gat and rela,
paran
ii) Rupak: Peshkar, gat, Two qaida, Paran and Chakardar
Paran
iii) Choutal : Saath, Paran, Chukari
2. Notation of the above mentioned Talas with dugun and
Chugan layakaries
3. Lagi in Dadra Tal
TABLA
Paper - B (Practical)
Time : 20 Minutes Practical Max.Marks : 100
Total Marks : 120
a) Tala Prescribed : Rupak, Tivra, Jhaptal, Sultal, Deep Chandi
and Jhumra.
b) Proper Barhat of the following Talas by hand on Tabla or
Pakhawaj-Rupak, Tivra, Jhaptal, Sultal.
c) Two laggies in Dadra and two in Kehrva.
d) Theka of Jhumra Tal Vilambit Laya.
e) Sultal-Tukras, Paran Bedam, Tehai, Damdar Tehai
Chakradar Paran and Relas.
f) Jhaptal : One quaida, one peshkar, one gat and rela, paran.
g) Rupak : Peshkar, gat, Two qaida, Paran and Chakardar
Paran
Books Recommended :
Sangeet Visharad Basant, Sangeet Karyalaya Hathras,
2004
Tal Prabandh Pt. Chhote Lal Misher, Knishka Publisher,
New Delhi, 2006
Bharti Sangeet Vadhya Lal Muni Misher, Bhartiya Gayan Peeth
Parkashan, 1973
Hamare Sangeet Rattan Sangeet Karyalaya Hathras, 1978
Tal Martand Sataya Narayan Vishesht, Sangeet
Karyalaya Hathras, 1994
Project Work
Marks : 20
form of presentation relating to any field of Music (Approx. 3 to 5
pages) using computers (MS-Office) which will be evaluated by
the external examiner at the time of examination. Separate mark
sheet should be used for project report.
FINE ART
(Drawing and Painting)
Note :
(a)
60 marks for the theory paper and 40 marks per
practical papers and 20 marks for internal assessment
on the basis of session work submitted by the student
shall be assessed by the teacher concerned.
(b) The question paper will cover the entire syllabus.
(c) Questions should be based on world famous paintings
and sculptures whose slides are easily available.
(d) Question paper should cover the syllabus uniformly.
(e) The paper setter should set the paper in three sections,
Section A, B and C.
(f) The division of the marks will be as under :-
Section A—20 marks for 10 short answer questions. Each
question carries 2 marks.
Section B—20 marks 4 questions. The examiner will be set
6 questions; the candidate will attempt 4 questions of 5 marks each.
Section C—20 marks for essay type questions. The examiner
will be set 4 questions; the candidate will attempt 2 questions of 10
marks each. Compartment candidates in the subject of Fine Arts
will appear only in theory paper during the supplementary
examinations. Previous Marks of Practical papers will be considered
for the aggregate.
FINE ART
Paper-A (Theory)
Part-A
Sculpture
Classical Sculpture—The Guptas—Mathura and Sarnath,
Post-Classical Sculpture—Ellora, Elephanta, Mahabalipuram
Chola Bronzes—Parvati, Shiva Natraja, Vishnu and Kali
Suggested Readings
1. Indian Art A Concise story : Roy C. Craven; Thomas &
Hudson, London, 1997.
2. Bharti Murti Kala : Rama Nath Mishra,. Publication Division,
Delhi, 1978.
3. Bhartiya Murti Kala : Dr. Rama Nath Mishra, New Delhi,
MacMillion, 1978.
4. The Heritage of Indian Art : Vasudeva Agarwala;
Publication Divison, New Delhi, 1964.
5. Rowland and Benjamin, The Art and Architecture of India.
6. Saraswati S.K., A Survey of Indian Sculpture.
7. Abninash Bahadur Verma, Bhartya Chitrakala Ka Itihas.
FINE ART
Part—B
Painting
Early Indian Miniature Painting—Eastern School and Western
School.
Mughal School of Art—Akbar, Jahangir and Aurangzeb.
Rajasthani School of Art-—Mewar, Kishangarh, Bundi and Kota.
Pahari School of Art—Kangra and Basohli.
Suggested Readings
Barret, D.& Gray, Painting of India,
B.Brown Percy Indian Painting under the Great Mughals
Chandra, Moti Mewar Painting
Karl Khandalwala Pahari Miniature Painting,
Majumdar, Bhartya Vidya Mandir Series :
R.C. (Editor) The History and Culture of Indian
People, Vol.V, Sculpture and Painting
Section only.
Randhawa, M.S. Kangra Paintings.
Chandra, Moti Indian Painting
L.C. Sharma, Brief History of Indian Painting,
Merut : Geol Publication, 2002.
A. B. Verma Bhartitya Chitra kala ka Ithas,
Bareli Parkash Book Dept, 1996.
Chandra Moti Indian Painting.
Sharma L.C. Indian Painting.
FINE ART
Paper-B
(Practical) Poster/Book Cover
Prepare creative posters for advertisement study of letter
writing in number of colors.
At least six works (04 posters & 02 book covers) will be
prepared for internal assessment.
Medium —Poster Colors
Size—½ Imperial
Book Cover Design
Block lettering, Roman lettering, and free hand brush
lettering.
To design book cover with illustration title, author's name
etc. in any colors number of colors.
Medium—Poster colors
Size—½ Imperial
FINE ART
Paper-C
Head Study
Time: 5 Hours. Max. Marks : 40
Rendering of human headfromk life/caste in monochrome
colors. Emphasis should be given on structure, volume, proportion,
light shade and texture.
Medium—Oil, Pastel Colors and Watercolors.
Size—½ Imperial
Five selected works will be assessed by the teacher concerned.
FINE ART
Paper-D
Landscape Painting (on the spot)
Arrangement of shape based on subjects like human forms
and animal froms in landscape settings, emphasis should be given
on perspective, color its application in harmony.
Medium—Oil, Postel Colors, and Watercolors
Size—½ Imperial
At lested least six works will be prepared for internal
assessment (3 realistic landscapes and 3 stylized landscapes based
on any traditional Indian style of painting).
50 sketches of the size ¼th imperial based on paper B, C
and D in any medium will be submitted.
HISTORY OF ART
Paper-A
Part-A
Note:
i) The question paper, should cover the entire syllabus. It
may contain very specific short-answer questions.
ii) The paper-setter should set 30 questions in all and students
shall attempt 20 questions.
iii) The question can be repeated from the previous question
papers.
History of Indian Painting from C. 9th century A. D. to
C. 1800 A.D. Development of miniature painting : Eastern India,
Western India, Mughals, Rajasthan - Mewar, Bundi, Kishangarh,
Pahari-Basohali, Guler, Gandharas, Kangra.
Part-B
History of Indian Sculpture under the Sunga Gandhara and
Guptas—Mathura, Somnath, Deogarh, Ajanta.
HISTORY OF ART
Paper - B

Note:
i) The question paper should cover the entire syllabus. It may
contain very specific short-answer questions.
ii) The paper-setter should set 30 questions in all and the
students shall attempt 20 questions.
papers.
Part-A
History of European Painting and Sculpture from C. 1300 A.D. to
1850 A.D.
Renaissance-Masccio Michelangelo, Raphael, Titian. Donatello,

Leonardo-Da-Vinci, Michelangelo, Raphael, Titian. Baroque
Caravaggio, Rubens, Rembrandt.
Landscape - Calude Lorrain, John Constable, W. Tumer Painters.
Part-B
Theory and Principle of Art Appreciation. Definition of the term
miniature, six limbs of Indian Painting and their manifestations in
actual works : Indian concept of primary colours and their symbolic
meaning. Indian theory of rasa, bhava and beauty.
COMMERCIAL ART
Paper-A
Theory (Art appreciation & Advertising) 60 Marks
Paper : Layout 60 Marks
Paper C: Poster 60 Marks
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Paper-A : Theory
Note:
(i) The question paper should cover the entire syllabus. It may
contain very specific short answer type questions.
(ii) The paper-setter should set 30 questions in all. Students
will attempt 20 questions.
(iii) The question can be repeated from the previous question
papers.
Meaning of Advertisement. Different Medias of Advertising.
Art and Commercial Art. Commercial Art and Society. Advertising
Agency. TV and Newspaper advertisement, Calliography. Printing
Process. Blocks, Half tone photos and line drawing.
COMMERCIAL ART
Paper - B
Layout (Practical)
Medium : Layout & Illustrations (Coloured)
Size : Newspaper 4 columns x 25cms.
Magazine 81/2 " x 11" Illustration 1/4 imperial
Prepare commercial and educational layouts for newspaper in Black
and White and for Magazine coloured Layouts. Use of Screens
and Transfer letters are allowed.
Prepare illustrations based on stories, human beings in groups, birds
and animals, different scenes etc.
Limited references while preparing rough visual are also allowed.
COMMERCIAL ART
Paper - C
Poster : or Packing (Practical)
Medium : Poster and Pastol Colours
Size : 1/2 imperial
Maximum 4 colours (Tones can be used for each colour).
Prepare commercial and educational posters for advertisement.
Purpose with creative approach. Atleast 5 works will be prepared
for internal assessment.
Packaging subjects : Cosmetics, colours, toys etc.
SCULPTURE
Outlines of Test
Paper-I (Theory)
Time : 3 Hours. Max. Marks : 60
Paper-II (Practical)
Paper-III (Practical)
Internal Assessment Marks : 20

Total Marks : 200
Syllabus and Courses of Reading

Paper - A (Theory)
Note:
i) The question paper should cover the entire syllabus. It may
contain very specific short-answer type questions.
ii) The paper-setter should set 30 questions in all and students
shall attempt 20 questions.
paper.
A brief History of Sculpture, Indus Valley, Mauryan period,
Bharhut, Sanchi, Bodhgaya, Mathura and Gandhara under Kushan
period, Gupta Period, Amaravati and Nagar Junikonea sculptures.
SCULPTURE
Paper-B
(Practical)
Note : Every student, will submit two portraits done in the class as
a sessional work. Sessional work will be assessed by the
teacher concerned and will be submitted to the University
through the Principal of the college.
Head study in clay, modelling from life in life size, these
works should be produced in Plastic cast.
Books Recommended :
1. S.K. Sarswati A Survey of Indian Sculpture
2. Stella Krmisch Indian Sculptures
3. B.M. Barua Bharhut
4. S.M. Asgar Ali Kadvi Moorti Kala Ka Itihas
5. Benjamin Rowland, The Pelican History of Art
6. Dr. Gyacharu Tripathi Prachin Bharat Ki Kala
STILL PHOTOGRAPHY
&
AUDIO PRODUCTION
(Vocational)
Scheme of Study
Paper-I : Photo Journalism Theory 50 marks

Practical 60 marks
Paper-II : Still Photography &
Camera Accessories (Including Viva of 10
marks & Internal
Assessment of 10 marks)
Paper-III : Photo Lab Techniques Practical 60 marks
Paper-IV : Project Work (Internal 30 marks on the

job training)
Total ....... 200 marks
Instructions :
i) Paper II & III above are Practical Papers & on the spot
subject will be given by the external examiner.
STILL PHOTOGRAPHY & AUDIO

PRODUCTION
Paper-I
Photo Journalism
Theory & Technique
Note : Instructions for the paper setter :-
Each question paper will consist of three sections as follows:
will be compulsory. Each question will carry one mark; total
be set by the examiner and eight will be attempted by the
candidates. Each question will carry three marks. The total
question will carry eight marks; total weightage of the section being
16 marks.
1. Scope of Photo Journalism
Importance of Picture & Magazine in news Program.
2. Reporting through photos.
(news of parliament sports, development stories, features
and interviewing etc).
3. Photo-Visualisation of audience tastes, needs and newsfall.
4. Equipment for Photo-Journalism (Choice of right equipment
i.e. lens, Camera, flash raw stock for a particular
assignment).
5. Introduction and practice of rapid development finishing,

drying.
6. Photographing the right moment (rapid focussing technique:
auto focussing of camera (a) lenses (b) range finding
(c) Hyper focal distance.
7. Retrieval methods: Photo C.D., Computer C.D. access
system, photo Catalogue.
8. Photo editing—continuity, Cropping, Captions, size,
placement.
9. Digital Imaging.
10. Photo-Print technology, quality control, Printing techniques,
half tones, colour.

PRODUCTION
Paper-II
Still Photography and Camera Accessories
(Practical)
(30 periods)
1. Shutter types - Their limitations.
2. Circle of confusion its effect on sharpness/blue.
3. Techniques of photographing action.
4. Aperture and its effect, abberation, resolution, depth of field,
depth of focus.
5. Lenses/optical materials, lens coating, plastics/glass, normal
standard, tele lens, wide, zoom, micro, macro lens, laws
governing depths of field.
6. Supplementary lenses.
7. Basic reprography.
8. Flash-type, working, exposure.
9. Exposure: method of estimations, types of exposure meters
& their comparison, reciprocity failure.
10. Types of films & their characteristics filters: types, use,
optical limitation, filter factor.

PRODUCTION
Paper-III
Photo lab techniques, Computerised Photo finishing,
Colour photography and Lighting
(Practical)
Processing and Printing
Processing and Printing
1. Photolab techniques 5 Periods
- types of enlarger.
- types of light sources for enlarger.
- working of an enlarger
- condens lens vs diffuser enlarger.
- lenses for enlarger.
2. Computerised Photo finishing 5 Periods
3. Constituents of developers 10 Periods
i) Techniques of development
ii) Types of developers.
iii) Effect of over/under development.
iv) Effect of temperature on development.
v) Effect of agitation on development.
vi) Types of printing papers, grades, Textures/weights colour/
surfaces.
vii) Mono bath development.
viii) Instant Photography.
4. Special Effects in Printing 5 Periods.
5. Special Effects in Processing 5 Periods.
Colour Photography and Lighting

30 Periods
1. Colour temperature (Mired & Kelvin Scale)
- Tripac film
- Colour additive process.
- Colour subtractive process.
2. Filter for colour
- U.V. filter.
- Polarising
- Sky lighting
- Colour compensation filter
- Colour conversation filter.
3. Lighting
- Shortcoming of single flash unit.
- their correction.
4. Advance printing techniques
- removal of residue
- use of Water/chemical etc.
- Toning.
- Basic sensitometry.
- optical density.
- characteristic curves.
- deniteineteur etc.
5. Flash techniques, Lighting the subject, Light source,
Quality of light, Meters

PRODUCTION
Paper-IV
Project Work
Max. Marks: 30
On the job training:
Project work based on Social and
Educational topics, like
1) Photo essay.
2) Social Landscape.
3) Advertising.
4) Dance & Stage Photography.
5) Effects of filters on colour films.
6) Shooting on different lighting conditions.
On the job training is totally based on Internal Assessment.
Marks will be given by the internal examiner (Project
Incharge).
DRAMATIC ART
Subject : Theatre Art
Theory Marks :100
Practical Marks : 100
Internal Assessment Practical : 20
External Assessment Theory : 100
Practical : 80
Instructions for the Paper Setters :
1. Paper Setter will set 10 questions.
2. The candidate may be asked to attempt 5 questions.
3. All questions carry equal marks.
Theory Paper-A Marks:100
1. Introduction to Indian & Asian Theatre
2. Regional Dramatic History - both professional and
Amateur:-
3. Introduction to Folk Theatre forms of India Jatra, Tamasha,
Nautanki, Ramlila and Bhavai.
4. Drama as an integrated and inter disciplinary art form
Practical Paper-B Marks :100

1. Definition of Acting.
2. Body Exercises,
Yoga in relation to theatre -10 postures, Exercises pertaining
to eye, Abhinaya Mime and improvisations.
3. Make-up
Straight and Character make-up.
4. Make up in different Media -Stage, T.V., Films,
5. Principles of Colour Design, Colour symbolism

6. Designing costumes for one mythological and social play.
7. Pitch and volume
8. Dialogue Delivery - rising and falling inflections
9. Tongue twisting exercises and breathing exercises
10. Voice modulation -weeping, coughing, shouting, yelling etc.
11. Speech - Narration,Commentary, News reading, addressing
audience, story telling, poetry recitation.
GEMOLOGY AND JEWELLERY DESIGN

(Vocational)
Max. Marks : 100
Theory : Paper-A Marks : 60
Practical : Paper-B Internal Assesment : 40
Total : 100
Theory Paper-A
Time: 3 Hrs Max Marks : 60
1. The question paper will cover all the seven topics of the
syllabus.
2. The paper-setter should set the paper in three section i.e.
section A,B & C
Section-A : 12 questions will be set by the examiner. Out of 12
questions the candidate will attempt 10 questions of 1 mark each.
60 Marks
Section-B : 12 questions will set by the examiner. Out of the 12
questions the candidates will attempt 8 questions of 4 marks each.
32 Marks
Section-C : 4 questions will be given to candidates to attempt 2 out
of the 4. Each question will carry 9 marks. 18 Marks
1. Introduction to stone setting.
2. Different styles of stone setting like prong, bezel, channel
etc.
3. Introduction, ruby, cat’s eye, pearl, zirrcon, coral, emerald,
topaz sapphire
4. Inroduction of Indian Jewellery
(i) Tribal Jewellery
(ii) Symbolic Jewellery of South India.
5. Physical properties of gemstones :-
(i) Cleavage Definition
Description
Importance of gemology +
Lapidary work
(ii) Hardness Definition

Moh’s scale of hardness
Application in Gemology +
Lapidary work
(iii) Specific Definition
Gravity Determination of
specific gravity by heavy liquid
method
6. Gemology - Its optical properties
(i) Nature of Light
(ii) Reflection of Light Laws of reflection, Lusture,
Screen, cat’s eye effect, star a
Effect
(iii) Reflection of Light Reflection Index, total internal,
reflection, double Refraction and
briefringence, fire-effect in
Gemstones
(iv) Color of gemstone
(v) Absorption
(vi) Dichrosim
(vii) Absorption Spectrum
(viii) Play of color
7. Cuts of Gemstone - Designing a cut
- Catachon-cut
- Step-cut
- Scissors-cut
- Rose-cut
- Faceted-beads
GEMOLOGY AND JEWELLERY DESIGN

Paper-B
Practical Marks : 100
Internal Assessment : 40 Annual work : 20
Time : 6 Hrs. Project Work : 20
Development of a design of a bangle, bracelet, pendent, ring,
broache, armlet etc. using mark-making, sawing, soldering, tube-
making, bead-making, twisting, stone-setting techniques.
Exercises on
(i) Mark-Making
(ii) Filing
(iii) Sawing
(iv) Soldering
(v) Puzzles-work
(vi) Tube-making
(vii) Bead-making
(viii) Twisting
(ix) Different styles of stone-setting like prong, bezel, channel
etc.
(x) Identification of gems.
Development of Designs of bangles, bracelets, Pendants,
rings, broaches, armlets etc. using above Techniques.
COMMERCE
Paper: A Banking and Insurance
Paper: B Salesmanship
Each paper carries 100 Marks. It is required that the candidate
passes each paper separately.
Paper A
Banking & Insurance
Note : 1. The candidates are allowed to use simple (Non-
scientific) calculators.
2. The question paper covering the entire course
shall be divided into three sections as follows :
Section A : It will consist of 10 very short answer type questions
with answers to each question upto five lines in length. All questions
Section B : It will consist of short answer type question with answer
to each question upto two pages in length. Twelve questions will be
Section C : It will consist of essay type questions with answer to
Each question will carry sixteen marks, total weightage of the section
being 32 marks.
Teaching hours : 80 periods of 45 minutes each.
Introduction to Banking Definition, types and functions of Banks.
Brief outlines of the history of Indian Banking, Banker customer
relations. Deposit mobilisation. Types of deposits, Procedure of
opening a bank account. Types of account holders, Trends in deposit
mobilisation in india.
Loans and advances : Forms of loans, overdraft, cash credit,

joint financing, Hire purchase advances, Bills purchased/discounted.
Principles of sound lending. Application for a bank loan. Analysis
of credity worthiness of borrower, security and margin requirements.
Modes of creating charges. Pledge, hypothecation, simple and
equitable mortgages, Guarantees and indemnities. Trends in bank
lending in India, Credit creation system by commercial bank.
Negotiable instruments, cheques-crossing and endorsements,
payments of cheques, stop payment instruction, role of clearing
house, Collection of cheques. Dishonour of cheques, Bills of
Exchange-Discounting of Bills, Inland Remittances. Demand Draft,
mail transfers, Telegraphic transfers etc.
Definition of insurance, advantages of insurance, kinds of insurance
and forms of insurance organisation. Essentials of insurance
contract, basic principles of insurance. Utmost good faith, insurable
interest, indemnity subrogantion, contribution, proximate cause.
Introduction to general insurance-growth of general insurance,
functions of insurance and contracts of insurance, Basic principles.
Fire insurance, Introduction, standard form policy, scope of cover.
Books Recommended
1. Dorfman, "Introduction to Risk Management and
Insurance", 8th Edition, Prenices Hall of India, 2007.
2. Rejda, "Principles of Risk Management and Insurance",
Pearson Eduacation, 2007.
3. Tripathy and Pal, "Insurance and Risk Management",
Prentice Hall of Inhdia, 2007.
4. Gupta P.K. "Insurance and Risk Management", Himalaya
Publishing House, 2007.
5. Paul Justin and Suresh Padamalatha, "Management of
Banking and Financial Services", Pearson Education, 2007.
6. Shekhar K.C. and Sekhar Lakshmy, "Banking Theory and
Practice", Vikas Publications, 2007.
COMMERCE
Paper B
Salesmanship
Note: i) The candidates are allowed to use simple (Non-
scientific) calculators.
ii) The question paper covering the entire course
shall be divided into three sections as follows :
with answer to each question upto five lines in length. All questions
Section B : It will consist of short answer type questions with
answer to each question upto two pages in length. Twelve questions
will be set by the examiner and eight will be attempted by the
candidates. Each question will carry six marks. The total weightage
of the section shall be 48 marks.
Each question will carry sixteen marks, total weightage of the section
being 32 marks.
Theory : Teaching Hours : 60 periods of 45 minutes each.
Selling- The concept, role of society, careers in selling, characteristics
of sales careers, types of selling jobs; types of sales people
Salesmanship-Definition, nature and scope; origin and development;
salesmanship a science or an art.
Salesman-qualities-physical and mental, salesman's duties and
responsibilities, role in the organisation.
Features, qualities and work performed by counter salesman
travelling salesman, speciality of salesman, staple salesman,
Manufacturers salesman, wholesaler's salesman, Exporters
Salesman, service salesman and Missionary Salesman. Strengths

and limitation of personal selling. Salesman and his territory; co-
ordination of selling efforts.
Significant aspects of human behaviours, buying motives, the art of
persuation, difference between prospects and customer.
A brief introduction to selling theories, selling process, Determining
selling objectives, Prospecting-definition, nature and methods, some
prospecting system.
Planning the sale, objective, sources of information, sizing up the
prospect, the approach-importance and objectives gaining the
interview, methods of approaching prospect making approach
effective. Sales-presentation-objective and strategies of presenta-
tion. Demonstration nature, importance and timing, essentials of
good demonstration.
Handling objection-types of objections, methods of handling
objections. Closing the sales call tactics and methods, ethical
problems in selling.
Recruitment and selection of salesman, training, compensation,
performance, Appraisal of salesman, Salesforce information
system.
1. Gosney and Bolhm, "Customer Relationship Management",
Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
2. Dasgupta, "Sales Management : In the Indian Perspective",
Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
3. Kapoor Ramneek, "Fundamentals of Sales Management",
Mac Millan of Indian Ltd., 2007.
4. Coughlan, "Marketing Channels", Person Education, 2007.
5. Sahu P.K. and Raut Kishore C., "Sales and Distribution
Management", Vikas Publications, 2007.
ECONOMICS
Paper-A
Macroeconomics
Note : (i) The Candidates are allowed to use simple (Non-
Scientific) calculators.
(ii) Each question paper will consist of three sections as
follows :
Section-A : It will consist of 10 very short questions with answer
to each question upto five lines in length. All questions will be
compulsory. Each question will carry two marks; total weightage
being 20 marks.
Section-B : It will consist of short answer questions with answer
Each question will carry six marks. The total weightage of the section
shall be 48 marks.
Section-C : It will consist of essay type questions with answer to
being 32 marks.
Distinction between-Micro and Macro Economics.
Determination of Income and Employment. Classical and Keynesian
models; Say's Law of Market and aggregate demand and supply.
Consumption functions; average (short-run and long run);
average and marginal propersity to consume; static and dynamic
multipliers. Marginal Efficiency of Capital. Investment : Meaning,
Demand schedules and factors affecting investment decision.
Trade cycles-meaning, characterisitics and phases. Accelerator and
multiplier-accelerator interaction. Samuelson and Hicks Models.
Money : Its functions and role. Money and Capital Markets

(Introductory). Quantity Theory of Money. Fisher's and Cambridge's
equations. Liquidity preference theory.
Banking : Definitions of banks. Credit creation and credit
control.
Inflation : Concept, causes and cures. Monetary and Fiscal
Policies for stabilisation. Inflation-unemployment Trade-off (only
Phillips' contribution).
Recommended Texts :
1. Shapiro, E. Macroeconomic Analysis, Harcourt, Brach and
World, New York, 1978.
2. Dernaburg, T.F. and MC Dougall D.M., Macroeconomics :
the Measurement, Analysis and Control of Aggregate
Economic Activity, McGraw-Hill, Kogakusha, Tokyo, 1972.
3. Gupta, S.B. Monetary Economics : Institutions, Theory and
Policy, S. Chand, New Delhi, 2000.
ECONOMICS
Paper-B
International Economics and Public Finance
Note : (i) The candidates are allowed to use simple (Non-
(ii) Each question paper may consist of three sections as
follows :
Section-A : It will consist of 10 very short answer questions with
being 20 marks.
Section-B : It will consist of short answer questions with answer
set by the examiner and eight will be attempted by the candidate.
shall be 48 marks.
Section-C : It will consist of essay type questions with answer to
the examiner and the candidate will be required to attempt two.
Each question will carry sixteen marks. The total weightage of the
International Trade : Internal and External Trade. Classical and
Heckscher. Ohlin Theories, Gains from Trade, Terms of Trade,
(gross, net and income terms of trade). Trade and economic
development.
Commercial Policy : Free trade vs. protection, rationale of a
protectionist policy in less developed area. GATT & WTO
(Introductory).
Balance of Payments : Meaning and components of balance of

payments, Methods for correcting adverse balance of payments,
devaluation and direct control.
Rate of exchange : Meaning and determination, Fixed and flexible
exchange rates.
International Economic Institution—IMF, and World Bank—
their working and achievements.
Public Finance : Nature, scope importance.
Public Expenditure : Meaning, principles, importance, effect of
public expenditure on production and distribution.
Taxes : Meaning, classification, features of a good taxation system,
canons of taxation, incidence and impact of taxation.
Public Debt : Meaning, objectives, importance, its burden.
Recommended Texts
1. Sodersten, B.O. : International Economics, Macmillan,
London, 1980.
2. Salvatore, B. : International Economics (1990),
Macmillan Publishing Company, New
York, 1975.
3. Maclean and : International Institutions in Trade and
Snowdown Finance (1981).
4. Aggarwal, M.R. : International Institutions and
Development in Developing Countries,
Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi,
2001.
QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES
Paper A
Note :i) The candidates are allowed to use simple (Non-
Scientific) calculator.
ii) Each question paper may consist of three sections
as follows :
Section A : It will consist of 10 very short answer questions with
being 20 marks.
Section B : It will consist of short answer questions with answer to
shall be 48 marks.
by the examiner and candidate will be required to attempt two.
Differentiation : Maxima and minima of functions, partial
derivatives, higher order partial derivatives.
Integration : Indefinite integrals. Integration by partial fractions.
Integration by substitution, Integration by parts, definite integrals.
Application of Integration in consumer surplus and producer surplus.
Matrices : Definition, types, addition, subtraction and multiplication
of matrices, scaler multiplication, transposition, determinants and
their properties, minors and co-factors, Inverse of matrix, Crammer's
rule for solution of simultaneous system of equations.
Linear programming : Formulation of problem, assumptions,
Graphical solution, simplex method. Use of artificial variables, Dual
Simplex Method.
Input-Output Analysis : Basic concepts, Input-output tables for

closed and open economies, Leontief basic input-output model,
applications of Input-Output analysis.
Note : Economic Applications of the above techniques may
also be asked.
Recommended Texts
1. Yamane Taro : Mathematics for Economics, Prentice Hall
of India, New Delhi, 1995.
2. Allen R.G.D. : Mathematical Analysis for Economists,
ELBS and Macmillan Press, 1971.
3. Chaing, A. : Fundamental Methods of Mathematical
Economics.
QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES
Paper-B
Note :i) The Candidates are allowed to use Simple (Non-
scientific) Calculators.
ii) Instructions for the paper setter :-
Each question paper may consist of three sections
as follows:
examiner and the candidate will be required to attempt two. Each
being 32 marks.
Multiple regression, concepts, estimation, Non-Linear regressions.
Partial and multiple correlation; concepts derivations, various growth
curves, (modified exponential, Gempertz, logistic).
Analysis of variance: Introduction, assumptions techniques of
analyzing variance, analysis of variance in one-way and two way
classification.
Random variables: Concept, type, probability density and mass
functions, expectation (meaning and properties), moments, moment
generating function and characteristic function.
Probability Distributions : Introduction to Binomial, Poisson and

normal distribution. Properties, applications, fitting of these
distributions to given data.
Books Recommended
1. Mood Graybill and Boes Introduction to the Theory
of Statistics (1974)
2. Snedecor and Cochran Statistical Methods
3. Croxton Cowden and Klein Applied General Statistics
(I 973).
4. Kapur and Gupta Fundamentals of
Mathematical Statistics
5. Murray R. Spiegel Theory and Problems
Statistics (1972).
INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS
Paper-A
Theory of Firm and Market Structure
Note : (i) The candidates are allowed to use Simple (Non-
(ii) Instructions for the paper setter :-
Each question paper may consist of three sections as follows:
being 32 marks.
Theory of the firm, Pricing in theory-pricing. under collusive and
non-collusive oligopoly.
Pricing in practice, full cost pricing, Marginal cost pricing and limit
pricing.
Organisational forms of the firm, ownership, control and alternative
objectives of the firm.
Growth of the firm, Acquisition, diversification, merger, innovation.
Constraints on growth, managerial and financial.
Market Structure: sellers concentration, product differentiation entry

conditions and economies of scale.
Recommended Texts
1. Devine. P.A. et. al. An Introduction to Industrial
Economics.
2. Koutosoyianinis. A. Modern Microeconomics.
3. Barthwal R.R. Industrial Economics,
An Introductory text Book.
INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS
Paper-B
INDUSTRIAL PATTERNS, POLICY AND CONTROLS
Note :(i) The Candidates are allowed to use Simple
(Non-scientific) Calculators.
follows:
being 32 marks.
Theories of Industrial Location : Contribution of Weber Sargent
Florence and Plander. Factors affecting industrial location.
Patterns of industrialization, Centralised versus Balanced regional
development.
Location policy in India since independence. Industrial concentration
and dispersal in India.
Measures to control industrial concentration; licensing, control of
capital issue, controlling monoplies and restrictive trade practices.
Foreign exchange regulation Act. Nationalization, price controls,

incentives and disincentives.
Recommended Books:
1. Barthwal, R.R. Industrial Economics—An Introductory
Text Book.
2. Kuchhal, S.C. The Industrial Economy of India.
3. Chemilam, F. Industrial Economics: Indian
Perspective.
AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS AND

MARKETING
Paper - A
Note : (i) The Candidates are allowed to use Simple (Non-
Each question paper will consist of three sections as
follows :
be set by the examiner and eight will be attempted by the candidate.
examiner and the candidate will be required to attempt two. Each
being 32 marks.
Institutional Changes, land reforms, consolidation of holdings
abolition of intermediaries, ceiling on land-holdings-need, nature
and evaluation with special reference to India.
New Agricultural Technology, its nature, role adoption and
impact on out-put, employment and income distribution.
Agricultural Price-Policy demand and supply of Agricultural
products, evolution of price policy, function objectives, instruments,
determination, impact on income, output and employment, price
agriculture and non-agricultural price policy in India. Institution and

Policy in Agriculture.
Agricultural Finance-Need for agricultural credit agencies,
role of finance in developing agriculture, role of co-operative
commercial banks RRBS, role of NABARD.
Self help groups, joint liability groups. Private Sector, Public
Sector, Service Area Approach Lead Bank scheme, Kisan Credit
Card. Growth in Agricultural credit, Repayment performance,
Principals of credit worthiness.
Agricultural taxation case for agriculture taxation, case for
special treatment, effect of agricultural taxation on economic
development agricultural taxation in India.
Readings :
1. A.S. Kahlon and Agricultural Price Policy in India, Allied
D.S. Tyagi Publishers, New Delhi (1983).
2. Rajbans Kaur Agricultural Price Policy in Economic
Development, Kalyani Publishers, New
Delhi (1975).
3. P.C. Josh Land Reforms in India - Trends and
Perspectives, Allied Publishers, Bombay
(1976).
4. C.B. Memoria Agricultural Problems of India, Kitab
Mahal (1985).
AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS AND

MARKETING
Paper-B
Note :(i) The candidates are allowed to use simple (Non-
Scientific) calculator.
(ii) Each question paper may consist of three sections
as follows :
Section A : It will consist of 10 very short answer questions with
being 20 marks.
Section B : It will consist of short answer questions with answer to
shall be 48 marks.
by the examiner and candidate will be required to attempt two.
Concept of Marketing; marketed and marketable surplus, structure
conduct and performance of agricultural marketing, supply chain.
Marketing margin spread and various channels of markets of
different food grains supply chain.
Food grains marketing system in India with special reference to
Punjab.
Title Agri./Marketing - Efficiency and Institutions.
Stage, intervention in food grains, marketing, role of different
agencies (FCI, PUNSUP, MARKFED, State Deptt.) and the impact
on market efficiency.
Financing of agricultural markets, Role of Directorate of Marketing

and inspection. Role of State Marketing Board, Public Private
Partnership in Marketing.
Recommended Texts
1. Moore, J.R., Johl, S.S. and Khusro, A.M. : Indian
Foodgrains Marketing, 1973.
2. Memoria, C.B. : Principles and Practice of Marketing
in India, 1979.
3. Kainth, G.S. : Foodgrains Marketing System in India,
Structure and Conduct, Associated Publishing House,
1982.
4. Jain, S.C. : Principles and Practice of Agricultural
Marketing in India.
5. Acharya, S.S. and Aggarwal, N.L. : Marketing of Farm
Product in India, Oxford & IBM Publication.
RURAL DEVELOPMENT
Paper A
Rural Marketing, Exports, Indebtedness & Banking
Instructions for the paper setter :-
Note : i) The candidates are allowed to use simple (Non-
as follows :
Section A is compulsory and shall consist of 10 short answer type
questions of 1½ marks each with a total weightage of 15 marks.
The candidates are required to answer each question in/upto five
lines.
Section B shall consist of 12 questions and the candidates will be
required to attempt any eight. Each question will carry four marks
with a total weightage of 32 marks. The candidates are required to
answer each question in/upto two pages.
Section C shall consist of four questions and the candidates will be
required to attempt any two. Each question shall carry 11½ marks
answer each question in/upto five pages.
Marketing concept and types, importance and features;
Defects and consequences; Co-operative Marketing; Government
and Marketing; Sales Promotion.
Agricultural Exports : Agro Processing; Present Position,
Problems and Policy.
Agriculture Prices : Market forces and Government
intervention; Trends and causes of Rise and Fluctuations; Stabilisation
and policy - Buffer-Stocks and Imports.
Rural Indebtedness : Nature, magnitude and consequences;
causes and remedial measure. Commercial Banks, Magnitude of
help, assessment of performance; Regional Rural Banks.
Cooperative Credit : Importance and Growth, Weaknesses and

Improvements.
Students would be given an elementary exposure to the subject.
1. A.N. Aggarwal : Problems, Progress and
Prospects, Indian Agriculture 419
to 465 pages on marketing.
2. A.N. Aggarwal & : Rural Economy of India
Kundan Lal
3. Sadhu and Singh : Fundamentals of Agricultural
Economics, 227 to 251 pages on
Agricultural Marketing
4. K.B. Mukherjee : Agricultural Marketing in
India
5. Kohl, Richard L. : Marketing of Agricultural
Products, Prentice Hall of India,
2002.
6. S.S. Acharya & : Agricultural Marketing in
N.D. Aggarwal India, Third Edition, Oxford
and ivh publishers, New Delhi,
1999.
Rural Development
Paper-B
Crop Husbandry and Principle Practices
Instructions for paper setter :
Note :i) The candidates are allowed to use simple (Non-
as follows :
Section A is compulsory and shall consist of 10 short answer type
questions of 1½ marks each with a total weightage of 15 marks.
The Candidates are required to answer each question in/upto five
lines.
Section B shall consist of 12 questions and the candidates will be
required to attempt any eight. Each question will carry four marks
answer each question in/upto two pages.
Section C shall consist of four questions and the candidates will be
required to attempt any two. Each question shall carry 11½ marks
answer each question in/upto five pages.
Agronomy - Definition and its scope. Classification of field crops.
Crops rotations/essential nutrients for plant growth inorganic and
organic measures including green manuring.
Weeds and losses caused by the Common Kharif and Rabi. Weeds
and methods of their control.
Role of water in crop production for irrigation requirement of
important crops.
Scientific production of food crops, rice, maize, wheat and gram
with special reference to their varieties, seed bed preparation, seed
rate, method of sowing, weed control, irrigation and fertilizer
requirement.
Scientific production of other crops, cotton, groundnut, sugarcane,

raja and barseem harstem with special reference to their varieties,
seed bed preparation, seed rate, method of sowing, weed control,
irrigation and fertilizer requirement.
Practicals
Total Teaching Periods : 75 Max. Marks : 60
Identification of crops and their seeds. Familiarisation with
common weeds, fertilizers, farm hand tools and implements,
Demonstration of rural operations in different crops.
Note : 6 period per week will be devoted each to theory and
practicals. Each period will be at least of 45 minutes duration.
Suggested Readings
1. Thakur, C. : Scientific Crop Production, Vol. I.
2. Indian Council of : Hand Book of Agriculture
Agricultural Research
3. Yawlker, K.B., : Manures and Fertilizers
Aggarwal,
J.P. & Bokde, S.
4. S.S. Acharya & : Agricultural Marketing in India,
N.D. Aggarwal Oxford
DAIRY FARMING
(Vocational)
Paper-A
Theory
Periods per week : Theory : 6
Instructions for the paper setters :
1. Question paper should be set strictly according to the syllabus
and in Punjabi Language.
2. The Language of questions should be straight and simple.
3. Theory paper shall consist of three parts :-
(a) Ten short compulsory questions of two marks each
requiring short replies up to five line each. (Total marks
10x2=20 marks)
(b) Ten questions of six marks each requiring short replies
shall be asked. The candidate has the choice to attempt
eight questions (Total marks 8x6=48)
(c) Four questions of descriptive type requiring five pages
for each answer shall be asked.The candidate has the
choice to attempt two questions (Total marks 16x3=32)
4. The quesiton paper should cover the whole syllabus
General
Factors affecting quality and quantity of milk production.
Essentials of clean milk production. Sources of contamination of
milk. Milking machine. Importance of milk chilling.
Management
Breeding cycle; castration of male calves; methods and
advantages of castration; control and restraining of animals, casting
of animal. Estimation of age and body weight of animals; dry period;
methods of milking, loose and stall feeding, grazing, use of water in
dairy farming; water requirements of dairy animals; factors affecting

water intake. Routine dairy farm operations, labour requirement
for various farm operations.
Housing
The main objectives of housing, advantages of proper
housing, factors affecting construction of dairy farm building,
methods of housing dairy animals; advantages and disadvantages
of various methods of housing; housing requirements of dairy
animals.
Feeding
Food nutrients, functions of various nutrients in animal body.
Energy value of feeds, Factors affecting nutritive value of feeds.
Requirements of nutrients in different steges of age, production,
season and pregnancy. Formulation of rations, feed, pellets,
Transportation and storage of cattle feed, hay and wheat bhusa
enrichment. Availability of forages in different seasons. Schedule
of feeding dairy animals.
Breeding
Importance of sire and dam. Pedigree selection, heredity,
twins and free. Detection of heat in cows and buffaloes. Economic
value of age at first calving and calving interval. Sterility and
infertility, factors affecting infertility, causes of sterility in male and
female. Merits and demerits of artificial insemination. Infections
caused by natural service and artificial insemination. Factors
affecting success in artificial insemination. Principles of upgrading
of cattle. Various systems of breeding, i.e. inbreeding, outbreeding.
DAIRY FARMING (Vocational)

Paper-B
Practical
Periods per week :4 Practical : 80
Internal Ass. : 20
Distribution of Marks
Assignment 20 Marks
Practical Note Book 20 Marks
Four Visits to Dairy Farm 20 Marks
Oral Examination 10 Marks
Written test 10 Marks
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Total : 100 marks
Syllabus :
Note: Preparation of practical notebook on the basis of work done
in the laboratory practical, Weekly write-up of daily job
assignments is compulsory.
1. Visits to Dairy farms having machine milking, fodder
harvesting, feed mixing etc., Veterinary hospitals, Milk
collection centre and milk plant.
2. Identification of various feedstuffs, medicines, chemicals,
equipment, instruments, photographs related to
dairy farming.
3. Revision of work done during previous session.
4. Practice in age determination, body weight, disbudding,
casting, cream separation, use of lactometer. Fat and S.N.F.
estimation of milk sample.
OFFICE MANAGEMENT AND SECRETARIAL

PRACTICE
(Vocational)
__________________________________________________
Year Paper Marks
Th. Pract. Int. Ass
________________________________________________
2nd Year III (Office Practice) 40 40 20
IV (Type writing & 40 40 20
Shorthand in English only)
On the Job Training of 4 weeks
1. The following pattern of setting of question paper shall be
observed :
(a) For Papers-I,II,IV & VI : The question paper will be
divided into two parts. In part-I, 12 short questions will
be set and candidates will be expected to attempt 10
questions. Each question will carry 2 marks. In Part-II
8 questions will be set and the candidates will be
expected to attempt 4 questions. Each question will
carry 5 marks.
(b) For Papers : III & V : The question paper will be divided
into two parts. In part-I, 10 very short answer type
questions will set and the candidates will be expected
to attempt 10 questions. Each question will carry 2
marks. In Part-II, 8 essay type questions will be set
and candidates will be expected to attempt 4 questions.
Each question will carry 5 marks.
2. The Internal Assessment in respect of theory papers shall
be based on tests, assignment and quizzes. In case of
practical papers it will be based on maintainance of records,
actual conduct of practical performance etc.
3. A consolidated report "On the Job Training" after Ist

year and II Year shall be prepared by every student and
must be submitted in the college concerned upto Sep. 30.
The consolidated report will be evaluated by the external
examiner and shall be given the grades as follows :
O - Outstanding
A - Very good
B - Good
C - Average
D - Unsatisfactory
In case, the Training Report is rated as unsatisfactory, the candidate
shall have to submit it again in corporating the changes suggested
by the examiner within one month from the date of intimation to
the candidate by the concerned college.
Paper - III
Offiece Practice
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks (Theory) : 40
(Pract) : 40
Int.Ass. : 20
Note : The candidates are allowed to use simple (Non-
Part-I
Office-meaning, function, importance, concept of an organisation
Centralisation Vs. decentralisation of office services, Principal
departments of a modern office-correspondence, typing and
duplicating, filing, mailing, general office.
Filing and Indexing :
Filing—meaning and importance, essentials of a good filing system,
centralised Vs. decentralised filing system, methods of filing
equipments.
Office Applications and Machines :

A study of various types of commonly used appliances and
machines-duplicator, accounting machanism calculator addressing
machines, punch card machines, franking machines, weighing and
folding machines, sealing machine, dictaphone cheque protector,
cash register, coin sorter, time recorder and such other machines.
Modern Office Machines :

Photocopier, Computer Word Processor, Scanner their operation
and use in the office set up. Introduction of computer-importance,
history and types of computers, hardware and software, computer
operation. Word Processor-Concept of word processing, creating
and editing documents, taking print out DO'S and DON'T'S in details
from application point of view. Scanner-Introduction of Scanner,
its importance and use in offices.
Part-II
Mailing Department :
Meaning and importance of mail, centralisation of mail, handling of
work-its advantages, mail room equipment, sorting table and racks,
letter openers, time and date stamps, postal franking machine,
addressing machine, mailing scales, post offices guide.
Handling Mail :
Inward Mail-Receiving, sorting, opening, recording, marking,
distributing.
Outward Mail :
Folding of letters, preparation of envelopes, sorting, scaling, weighing,
stamping, entering, letter sent book or peon book. Despatching rail
parcel service, air mail service, courier service.
Office Correspondence :
Essentials of a good letter, drafting of business letter, Enquiry,
quotation, order, advice, making payment, trade reference,
complaints, circular letters, follow up letters, official letters, semi
officials.
Assisting Visitors :
Office etiquetes, effective use of language, preparation of
appointment schedules and maintaining visitors' diary furnishing
desired information, instructing co-workers.
Practical
Office Practice
1. Filing and Indexing :
Practice in filing and indexing-alphabeticals numerically,
arranging files subjectwise, searching a particular file,
transforming of old files for future references, weeding out
of records, developing card indexing system for the college
library.
2. Computer Software as MS Office, Windows-98 etc. be
obliqued with typewriter e-mail for practical on Recording
of Inward outward mail.....................
3. Recording of inward/outward mail—e-mail.
4. Or Windows-98/Electric Typewriter.
5. Drafting of the following (on the basis of actual information)
- Application for a job
- Interview letter
- Appointment letter
- Letter of enquiry
- Office notes
- Office order
- Issue of tenders
6. Recording of inward/outward mail.
OFFICE MANAGEMENT AND SECRETARIAL

PRACTICE
Paper-IV
Typing & Shorthand in English Only
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks : (Theory) : 40
(Pract) : 40
(Int.Assmt) : 20
Part-I
Carbon Manifolding
Carbon papers and their kinds, carrying out corrections on carbon
copies : use of eraser, eraser, erasing shield, white correcting fluid
etc. squeezing and spreading, carbon economy.
Stencil Cutting and duplicating
Techniques of stencil cutting, correction of errors on stencil papers
use of correcting fluid, graft methods and use of gumcoated paper
method signatures and lining on stencil paper with the help of stylus
pen and backing sheet.
Duplicator-kinds of duplicators taking out copies on duplicators,
duplicating ink.
Electric and electronic typewriters
Importance and use of electric typewriters.
Advantages of electric typewriters.
Salient features of Electronic typewriters.
Correspondence
-Bux Business
-Official
Practical
Carbon Manifolding
Taking out copies with the help of carbon papers. Carrying out
corrections on carbon copies, carrying out corrections with
squeezing and spreading methods, correction of drafts.
Stencil Cutting and Duplicating
Stencil cutting, carrying out corrections on stencil papers with
different methods. Cyclostyling.
Electric and electronics typewriters.
Practice on above typewriters.
Correspondence
Typewriting of business letters.
Typewriting of official letters.
Part-II
Paper : Shorthand
Extended use of certain consonant :
The Aspirate, tick and dot' H'
Downward and upward' R' upward 'sh'
Compound consonants, Medical Semi-circles.
Halving and doubling principle :
Halving-general principles and their exception, use of halving-
principle in phraseography, doubling-general principles and their
exception, use of doubling, principle in phraseography.
Prefixes, Suffixes, Contractions and Intersections :
Prefixes and Suffixes—meaning and uses, list of prefixes and
suffixes, contractions : general rules and list of contractions.
Intersections-meaning and uses, list of intersections, writing of
figures in shorthand.
Note : Taking techniques and transcription on typewriter.

Practicals
Paper : Short Hand
1. Practising the use of halving and doubling principles, prefixes,
suffixes from text book.
2. Repeated practice of contraction and intersection.
3. Taking dictation of passages for five minutes at a speed of
60 w.p.m. and transcription of the same on typewriter.
4. Taking dictation from tape-recorder.
5. Taking dictation from different voices.
6. Recording class lectures.
Probable work-sites where On-the-job Training may
be organised
- Government Department Offices.
- Business/Commercial Organisation.
- Industrial Establishments
- Hospitals.
- Educational-Institutions.
- Railways, Airlines and other Transport undertakings
- Banking and Insurance Organisation.
- Parliament and State Assemblies.
- Job-work Centres.
This is tentative list. Principal may be given the complete

freedom in selecting any organisation. However, While selecting
the institution care should be taken to select such institution who
show willingness to accept the trainees and have the scope for
providing variety of experiences in Office Practice and stenography
area.
Suggested Department/Section for On-the

Job training at the end of first year :
Department/Section No. of weeks
1. Reception/inward and out ward mail 1
2. Office establishment/filing/office equipment 1
and production
3. Stenography work and typing with various executives and
sections. 1
4. Sales, Advertising and Publicity, stores and accounts 1
4 weeks
Suggested Department/Section for on-the-job training at
the end of Second Year.
Department/Section No. of weeks

1. Private Secretaries of various executives in different
departments of the organisation. 1
2. Office establishment/company. Secretary. Share
Department 1
3. Accounts Department/Time Office/Reception. 1
4. Typing Pool/Advertising/Publicity. 1
4 weeks
Note : The purpose of the on-the-job training is to expose the
student to the world of work and provide professional experience
in real situation. The student shall have to maintain a diary and
submit a detailed report of his activities which shall be certified by
a responsible officer of the establishment. However, the teacher
will also supervise the on-the-job training programme.
Suggested Reading Materials

(a) Shorthand/Books
Title Publisher
1. Pitman Shorthand Dictionary A.H.Wheeler & Company.
2. Pitman Shorthand Reading Pitman Shorthand School
and Dictation Exercises New Delhi.
3. Shorthand made O.P. Kathiall
easy for beginners
with key
4. Hoo to start shorthand -do- & Edger Thrope
Speed building
5. How to avoid confusion -do-
in outline in pitman shorthand
6. A comprehensive List of -O.P. Kuthall
Granalongues & contractions
(b) Type Writing :
Title Publisher
1. H.A. Mehta Typewriting Mehta Publishing
complete course Corporation, Basant Mahal.
Wadala (East) Bombay–4000037
2. H.A. Mehta Typewriting Mehta Publishing
Office Practice set Corporation, Basant Mahal.
Wadala (East)
Bombay–4000037
3. H.A. Mehta Business Mehta Publishing
Letter typing sets Corporation, Basant Mahal.
Wadala (East)
Bombay–4000037
4. Typewriting by Md. Khan Chittoor Publishing
Dictation Exercises House, Chittoor, A.P.
5. Layouts and Forms in State Board of Technical
Typewriting Education,
Hyderabad – 500022
6. 20th Century Typewriting South-Western Publishing

Company, Gincinati, Ohio,
USA.
7. Typewriting Drills for speed Gregg. Publishing
and accuracy Corporation, USA.
8. Principle of Typewriting O.P. Bhatia, S.S. Sangal
9. Typewriting speed & O.P. Kuthials & Thorpe
accuracy
10. Typewriting Theory Practicle R.C. Bhatia
11. Type writing speed & O.P. Kuthiall
Accuracy-I
12. -do- B-II -do-
13. Typewriting Office Practice Mehta Publishing
set by H.A.Mehta
Corpn.,Basant Mahal,
Wadala (East),
Bombay - 400037.
14. Business letter typing sets Mehta Publishing
by H.A.Mehta Corpn.,Basant Mahal,
Wadala (East),
Bombay - 400037.
15. Typewriting Chittoor Publishing
Md. Khan Dictation Exercises House,Chittoor,
Chitoor, A.P.State
16. Lay outs and forms in State Board of Technical
Typewriting Education, Hyderabad -
500022
17. 20th Century Typewriting South-Western Publishing
Company, Cinicinati,
Ohio,U.S.A.
18. .Typewriting Drills for Speed Gregg. Publishing.
and Accuracy Corporation, U.S.A.
(b) Office Practice

1. Office Practice Made Simple W.H. Allen Publishers, By
G.Whitehead 1974.
2. Office Management and Commercial Correspondence,. by
Balraj Duggal 1998. Published by Kitab Mahal.
3. Office Management and Secretarial Practice, Gyan
Publishers House,Delhi by V.P.Singh
4. Business Correspondence and Office Practice by Thakkar
Publication, Bombay, Nagamia and Bhal
5. Business Communication by Doctor and Doctor Seth
Publication, Bombay-4
6. Commercial Correspondence by Majumdar.
7. Modern Commercial Correspondence by R.S.Sharma.
8. Modern Commercial Correspondence by Chandgadkar &
Tele. Vikas Publications, Pune.
9. Secretarial Practice by A.H.Mehta & others.
10. Office Management and Commercial Correspondence,. by
Balraj Duggal 1998. Published by Kitab Mahal, 1998.
11. Office Procedure & Secretarial Practice, O.P. Kuthiala,
Pritam Publications.
12. Office Management R.K. Sharma, Sharma K. Gupta-
Kalayni Publishers L. Sush (Nayar, 2003).
13. Office Management R.K. Choopra, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2000.
14. Drafing & Office Procedure, Edgar Thrope.
Office Management by Marityen Juled Manning Crisp
Publications, 2001.
Comprete Office Handbook : Third Edition by Suson
Jaderstrom, 2002.
TOURISM AND TRAVEL MANAGEMENT

Year Paper Periods per week Marks
L T Ext. Int.
2nd Year III. (Tourism & 3 3 50 50
Marketing)
IV. (Travel Agency, 3 3 50 50
Tour Agency &
Accommodation )
On the Filled Trip of 3 weeks.
1. In each paper 10 questions will be set and the candidates
will be expected to attempt 5 questions. Each question will
carry 10 marks.
2. The Internal Assessment shall be based on periodical tests,
written assignment and class-participation.
3. A consolidated report on'on the Filled Trip' after Ist year
and IInd year shall be prepared by every student and must
be submitted in the college concerned upto September 30.
The consolidated Report will be evaluated by the external
examiner and shall be given the grades as follows :
O - Outstanding
A - Very Good
B - Good
C - Average
D - Unsatisfactory
In case, the training report is rated as unsatisfactory, the
candidate shall have to submit it again incorporating the
changes suggested by the examiner within one month from
the date of intimation to the candidate by the concerned
college.
TOURISM MARKETING
Paper-III
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks : (External) : 50
(Internal) : 50
Introduction
This course covers analysis of the Markets and their possible
developments. Backing of the products, pricing policies and their
publicity and advertising in the Media-print and Electronic. A study
of the marketing and publicity aids like Books, periodicals,
brouchures, posters, hand cut press release, Audio visuals. The
paper would also include Promotional and public relations methods
employed in Tourism Marketing.
Part-I
1. The concept marketing, nature, classification and
characteristics of services and their marketing implications
developing marketing strategies for services firms. Linkages
in tourism and other sectors (Travel, Agency,
Accommodation, Food, Nutrition, Catering).
Part-II
2. Tour Packaging : Concept, characteristics, methodology
consideration and pricing of tour packing, designing and
printing of tour brouchure.
Suggested Readings
1. Kotler, Philip Marketing Management, Universal
Publications, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Maccarthy, D.K.J.Basic Marketing-A Management
Approach, 2005.
3. Douglas Foster Travel and Tourism Management, 1985.
4. Negi, M.S.Tourism and Hotellering, 1997.
5. Wahab,S.Grampter, L Tourism Marketing : Tourism

International Press & Roth Fibbs.London, 1976.
6. Stephan F. Witt & Louis Tourism Marketing and
Management Handbook,Moutinch Prentice Hall, New York
1985.
7. Renal, A, Nykiel Marketing in Hospitality Industry (2nd
Ed.) Van Nostrend Reinhold, 1986.
8. Hunter Mountaining Monument (Tourism in Your Business),
Canadian Hotel and Restaurant Ltd.,1984.
TRAVEL AGENCY & TOUR OPERATIVE

BUSINESS
Paper - IV
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks (External) : 50
(Internal) : 50
Introduction
The study includes the functions, differentiation regulations
organisations, recognition of Travel Agents, Tour Operators and
Excursion Agents.
The role in details of sectors like airline-International,
domestic, Air Taxies, Ticketing, Cargo, Railway-Transport
operations the allied business of Travel Agencies has been included
in the course. A study of types of accommodations, their
organisations and management.
Part-I
1. Definition. Main functions, organisational structure of a
Travel Agency and the Tour operators. Different types of
travel agents and (their responsibilities, procedures for
becoming a travel)agent and tour operator in India.
Part-II
2. Role of Indian Airlines, Indian Railways, Air India and
Vayudoot in the growth of travel agency and tour operators
business.
3. Accommodation-types organisation and management.
Suggested Readings
1. Merrissean Jame, W. Travel Agents and Tourism
2. David H.Howel Principles and Methods of
Scheduling Observations (National
Publishers) 1987.
3. Agarwal, Surinder Travel Agency Management

(Communication India 1983)
4. Geo, Chack Professional Travel Agency
Management, Prentice Hall,
London 1990.
5. Bhatia, A.K. Tourism Development principles
and Policies, Sterling Publishers,
1991, New Delhi
6. National Publishers The world of Travel, National
Publishers, Delhi,1979.
TOURISM AND HOTEL MANAGEMENT

(Vocational)
Paper-A
Theory : 80
Int. Ass. : 20
Instructions for the paper setters:
Section A will consist of 8 very short answer questions with answers
to each question upto 5 lines in length. All quesitons will be
compulsory. Each question will carry two marks, total weightage
to this section being 16 marks.
Section B will consist of short answer type quesitons with answer
be set by the examiner and eigth will be attempted by the candidate.
Each question will carry four marks. The total weightage of the
section shall being 32 marks.
Section C will consist of essay type questions with answer to
Each question will carry 16 marks, total weightage of the section
being 32 marks.
Introduction : This paper is for the basic understanding of Tourism
and Hospitality Industry and Hotel Management. Relationship
between Tourism, Airlines and hospitality Industry and for the basic
understanding of Hotel Management.

(Vocational)
(a) Front Office
1. Types of Hotels
2. Pre-registration activities, Registration, Post registration
activities.
3. Front Office Salesmanship.
4. Front Office procedures for Emergencies.
5. Calculation of Room position.
6. Job description of Front Office Cashier.
7. Job description of Front Office Assistant
8. Foreign Currency.
9. Night Auditor and its duties
(b) House Keeping
1. Role of Housekeeping in hospitality industry.
2. Classification of Equipments.
3. Cleaning Agents and Types.
4. House Keeping Surpervision—Importance, Checklist,
typical areas usually neglected where special attention
is required.
5. Storage facilities and conditions.
6. Cleaning procedures—Cleaning of occupied room,
Cleaning of just vacated room, Inspection, Second
Service, Replenishment of supplies and lines, Room
checklist.
(c) Food and Beverage Service
1. Sectors of Food & Beverage.
2. French Classical Menu.
3. Food and their Accompaniments.

4. Restaurants and their subdivisions—Coffee Shop, Room
Service, Bars, Banquets, Discotheques, Grill Room,
Snack Bar, Night Club.
5. Back area of Food and Beverage service—Still Room,
Wash Up, Plate Room, Kitchen Stewarding.
6. Classification of Crockery, Cultery, Glassware,
Hollowware, Flatware.
7. Maintenance of Equipments.
(d) Food and Beverage Production
1. Classification of Raw Materials.
2. Foundation ingredients—Meaning, Action of Heat on
Carbohydrates, Fats, Protiens, Minerals and Vitamins.
3. Preparation of Ingredients.
4. Classification of Equipments.
5. Stocks—Meaning, Uses, Types, Points to be observed
while preparing stocks.
6. Sauces—Meaning, types and Recipies.
7. Staff Arrangement in Kitchen.
Industrial Training for one month.

(Vocational)
Paper-B
Time : 3 Hrs. Max.Marks : 100
Theory : 80
Int. Ass. : 20
Section A will consist of 8 very short answer questions with answers
to each question upto 5 lines in length. All quesitons will be
compulsory. Each question will carry two marks, total weightage
to this section being 16 marks.
Section B will consist of short answer type quesitons with answer
to each question upto two pagess in length. Twelve questions will
be set by the examiner and eigth will be attempted by the candidate.
Each question will carry four marks. The total weightage of the
section shall being 32 marks.
the examiners and the candidates will be required to attempt two.
Each question will carry 16 marks total weightage of the section
being 32 marks.
1. Role of Various agencies in growth of Tourism like Central
and State Government and Private Players.
2. Positive and Negative impact of Tourism.
3. Tourism Products—Meaning or concept, how they are
different from other consumer products.
4. Facilities—Hostels, Transport—Air, Rail, Road and Water.
5. Technical Terminology of Tourism.
6. Tourist attractions—Tourist destinations or places and tourist
spots having tourist value from heritage spots, having tourist
value from heritage or historical points of view or sports
and recreational point of view, dance, fair festivals, trade
fair, conferences and exhibitions, etc.
7. Tourism Promotions—The Price of the Product, Tourist

Markets, Characteristics of the Travel Market, Classification
of Travellers, Obstacles of Travel Trade, The Demand for
Travel, Tourism Marketing in India, Tourist Transport, Travel
Trade, Hotel Marketing, Tourist Destinations.
8. Domestic Tourism—Benefits of Domestic Tourism,
Domestic Tourism in India, Hotels and Domestic Tourism,
Difficulties of Domestic Tourism boosting Domestic
Tourism.
INCOME TAX PROCEDURE AND

PRACTICE
L T Ext. Int.
2nd Year III (Income Tax 3 3 80 20
Procedure &
Practice)
IV (Wealth Tax 3 3 80 20
& Gift Tax
Procedure
& Practice)
1. The following pattern of setting of question paper shall
be observed.
The question paper covering the entire course shall be devided
into three sections as follows :
Section A : This section will consist of 7 very short answer type
questions with answers to each question upto 5 lines. All quesitons
will be compulsory. Each question will carry two marks, total
weightage to this section being 14 marks.
Section B : This section will consist of short answer type quesitons
with answer to each question upto two pages. Nine questions will
be set by the examiner and the candidates will be expected to
attempt six questions. Each question will carry six marks, total
weightage to the section being 36 marks.
Section C : This section will consist of essay type questions with
answer to each question upto 5 pages. Four questions will be set
by the examiner and the candidates will be expected to attempt
two questions. Each question will carry 15 marks, total weightage
of this section being 30 marks.
2. The Internal assessment shall be based on periodical tests,

written assignments and class-participation.
3. A consolidated Report on 'On the Job Training' after Ist
year and IInd year shall be prepared by every student and
must be submitted in the college concerned upto September
30th. The consolidated Report will be evaluated by the
external examiner and shall be given the grades as
follows :
O - Outstanding
A - Very Good
B - Good
C - Average
D - Unsatisfactory
In case, the training report is rated as unsatisfactory, the candidate
shall have to submit it again incorporating the changes suggested
by the examiner, within one month from the date of intimation to
the candidate by the concerned college.
INCOME TAX-PROCEDURE & PRACTICE

Paper - III
Time : 3 Hours Max.Marks : (External) : 80
(Internal) : 20
Total : 100
Detailed contents :
Section-A
1. Regulatory framework-An overview of Income Tax Act,
1961 and Income Tax Rules, 1962.
2. Income Tax Authorities.
3. Important Definitions, Basis of charge and Incidence of
Tax.
4. Permanent Account No. Procedure for obtaining
Permanent account No.(PAN)-Filling and filing of
application under Form No.49A.
5. Computation of total income Heads of Income, Deductions
under Chapter VIA; Computation of Tax in case of
individual, Hindu Undivided Family, firm, Companies.
6. Payment of Tax : Tax deducted at source, Advance Tax,
Self Assessment Tax.
(A) Tax deducted at source : Filling and filing of applications
from for obtaining TDS number under Form No.49B-
obligation of the person making payment, who and when
the person is liable to deduct tax at source. Procedure
and rate of Tax deducted at source on various payments.
Employers Obligations :
Stage I : Certificate to be issued to the recipient's-filing and issue
of the various TDS Forms (16,16A and 16B).
Stage II : Deposit of tax deducted at source-filling and filing of
the challan and deposit of tax.
Stage III : Submission of returns of TDS under Form No.24, Form
No.26,26A,26B,26C,26D,26E.
Recipient's Obligations :
To obtain TDS certificate from payer; filling and filing of relevant
certificates for lower or no deduction of tax at source (Form
No.13C,14,14B,15,15A,15AA,15B,15D,15E,15F,15G,15H,151).
(B) Advance Tax-Who is liable to pay advance tax,
computation of advance tax, instalment and due date of
Advance Tax, Interest payable by the assessee. Filing of
challan and deposit of Advance Tax.
Section-B
Return of income : Who is liable to file return of income,
time limit, return of loss, Belated Return, Revised Return,
Defective Return, Return by whom to be signed, filling and
filing of Return of Income Tax under :
Assessment Procedures : Inquiring before assessment.
Assessment under Section 143 (1), Self-assesment Tax,
Regular Assessment under Section 143 (2), Best Judgement
assessment, income escaping Assessment, issue of notice
where income has escaped assessment. Time limit for
Notice, Time limit for completion of assessment and
reassessment.
Post Assessment Procedures :
A. Refund : Who can claim refund, Form No.30 for Refund,
Time Limit for claiming refund, Refund of appeal, interest
on refunds.
B. Rectification of mistake (s).
C. Appeals and revisions : When an assessee can file appeal,

appealate authorities, procedure for filing appeal, filling and
filing of Form No.35, Form No.36, Time limit for filing appeal,
Revision by Income-Tax Commissioner.
D. Penalities & Procedure : Procedure for imposing penalities,
waiver of panelty, nature of default and penalities imposable.
Transfer of moveable property; Filling and filing of Form
No.37EE, Form No.37G,Form No.37-I.
Tax clearance certificate and exemption certificate-
procedure and filling and filing of Form No.31.
References :
1. Gaur, V.P. and D.B. Narang (2007), Income-Tax Law &
Practice, Kalyani Publications, Ludhiana.
2. Prasad, Bhagwati (2006), Direct Taxes Law & Practice,
Wihshwa Prakashan, New Delhi.
3. Sinhaima, V.K. and K. Sanghaima (2007) Direct Taxes Law
and Practice Taximann Publications (P) Ltd. New Delhi,
2004.
4. Shrivastava M. (1981) Physical Policy & Economic
Development in India, Chugh Publications, Alahabad.
5. Mehrotra H.C. and P. Mehrotra 2007. Income Tax Law &
Accounts, Sahitya Bahawan Publications, Agra.
6. Taxman's in Director Tax Law as amended by Firance Act
2007. Taxman allied Services (P) Ltd. New Delhi, 2004.
7. www.incometaxindia.give in.
INCOME TAX-PROCEDURE & PRACTICE

Paper-IV
Wealth Tax & Gift Tax—Procedure & Practice
(Internal) : 20
Section-A
Wealth Tax
1. Regulatory framework—An overview of wealth Tax Act,
1957 and Wealth Tax Rules, 1957.
2. Wealth Tax Authorities.
3. Important terms and definitions—Valuation date,
assessment year, meaning of assets, net wealth, debt,
deemed assets, exempted assets,
4. Exempted Assets, Valuation of invaluable property &
jewellery computation of Net Wealth, Computation of Wealth
Tax, Filing of Challan for payment of Wealth Tax and
Deposit Tax.
5. Return of Wealth Tax, limit for filing return filling and filing
of return of wealth under Form A & B.
6. Assessment and Post Assessment procedure in brief.
Section-B
Gift Tax
1. Regulatory framework—An overview of Gift Tax Act, 1958
and Gift Tax Rules, 1958.
2. Gift Tax Authorities.
3. Important Terms and Definition—Donee and doner.
4. Charge of Gift Tax—Deemed gifts, exempted gifts,
valuation/amount of gifts.
5. Return of Gift—Filling and filing under the prescribed form;
time limit for filing the return, computation of gift tax.
6. Assessment and Lost Assessment procedure.

7. Rebate on advance payment of Gift Tax.
References :
1. Datey, V.S. (2006), Taxmann's Indirect Taxes Law &
Practice, Taxmann Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Taxmann's Indirect Tax Laws As amended by Finance Act,
2007. Taxmann Allied Services (p) Ltd., New Delhi, 2004.
3. www.incometaxindia.gov.in
ADVERTISING, SALES PROMOTIONS

AND SALES MANAGEMENT
L T Ext. Int.
2nd Year III (Advertising-II) 3 3 80 20
IV (Personal Selling
& Salesmanship) 3 3 80 20
On the Job Training of 4 weeks.

1. The following pattern of setting of quesiton paper shall be
observed.
The question paper covering the entire course shall
be divided into three sections as follows :
Section A : This section will consist of 7 very short answer type
questions with answer to each question upto 5 lines. All quesitons
will be compulsory. Each question will carry two marks, total
weightage to this section being 14 marks.
Section B : This section will consist of short answer type quesitons
with answer to each question upto two pages. Nine questions will
be set by the examiner and the candidate will be expected to attempt
six questions. Each question will carry six marks, total weightage
to the section being 36 marks.
Section C : This section will consist of essay type questions with
answer to each question upto 5 pages. Four questions will be set
by the examiner and the candidates will be expected to attempt
two questions. Each question will carry 15 marks, total weightage
of this section being 30 marks.
2. The Internal assessment shall be based on periodical tests,
written assignments and class-participation.
3. A consolidated Report on 'On the Job Training' after Ist
year and IInd year shall be prepared by every student and
must be submitted in the college concerned upto September

30th. The consolidated Report will be evaluated by the
external examiner and shall be given the grades as follows:
O - Outstanding
A - Very Good
B - Good
C - Average
D - Unsatisfactory
In case, the training report is rated as unsatisfactory, the
candidate shall have to submit it again incorporating the
changes suggested by the examiner, within one month from
the date of intimation to the candidate by the concerned
college.

Paper - III
Advertising -II
Internal : 20
Part-I
- Advertising Media, Types of Media;Print Media (News
Paper and Magazines, Pamphlets, posters and brouchures),
electronic media (Radio, Television,Audio Visuals,
Cassettes), other Media (Direct Mail outdoor media), their
characteristics, merits and limitations. Media scene in India.
Problems of reaching rural audience and markets.
Exhibitions and mela. Press Conference.
- Media Planning - Selection of Media category. Their reach,
frequency and impact. Cost and other factors influencing
the choice of media.
- Media scheduling.
Part-II
- Evaluation of advertising effectiveness. Importance and
difficulties. Methods of measuring advertising effectiveness.
Pre-testing and post-testing. Communication effect. Sales
effects.
- Regulation of advertising in India. Misleading and deceptive
advertising and false claims.
- Advertising agencies. Their role and importance in
advertising. Their organisation patterns, Functions, Selection
of advertising agency. Agency commission and fee.
- Advertising Department. Its functions and organisation.
Suggested Reading :
Same as for paper-2 (relevant chapters).

Paper - IV
Personal Selling and Salesmanship Time : 3 Hours
Max. Marks : (External : 80
Internal : 20
Part-I
- Nature and Importance of personal selling. Door to door
selling situation where personal selling is more effective
than advertising. Cost of advertising Vs. Cost of personal
selling.
- AID A model of selling. Types of selling situations. Types
of sales persons.
- Buying motives. Types of markets. Consumer and Industrial
markets, their characteristics and implications for the selling
function.
- Process of effective selling : Prospecting, Pre-approach,
approach, presentation and demonstration, handling and
objections. Closing and sale post-sale activities.
Part-II
- Qualities of the successful sales person with particular
reference to consumer services.
- Selling as a career, advantages and difficulties. Measures
for making selling an attractive career.
- Distribution network-relationship.
- Reports and documents; sale manual, order desk, cash
memo, tour dairy, daily and preiodical reports.
- Other problems in selling.
A. Tentative Suggested Readings :

1. Manning, G.L. & B.L. Reece, Setting Today Building Quality
Partnerships, PHI, 2002.
2. Still, Richard R., Edward N. Gndiff and Norman A.P. Govoni,
Sales Management : Decisions, Strategies & Cases, PHI
5th Ed., 2000.
BIOINFORMATICS (Vocational)
Paper-A
Basic Bioinformatics
Note for the paper setters/examiners :
Section A : 8 very short answer questions are to be set. Two from
each unit. The maximum length of answer can be about 1/3 of a
page. All questions are compulsory. Each question will carry one
mark, total weightage being 8 marks.
Section-B : This section will comprise of 8 questions. Five questions
to be attempted and maximum length of answer can be upto two
pages. Each question will carry four marks, total weightage being
20 marks.
Section-C : This section will comprise of four essay type questions.
Two questions to be attempted. Maximum length of answer can be
upto 5 pages. Each question will carry 6 marks, total weightage
being 12 marks.
Unit-I
Prokarayotic and Eukaryotic genome : Structre and
composition of DNA/RNA, types of DNA, organization of DNA in
chromosome in Pro/Eukaryotes, Heterochromatin/Euchromatin,
Unique and repetitive sequences.
Unit-II
Gene expression and regulation : Overview of gene
transcription, splicing of RNA, genetic code, translation, Level of
gene expression : Transcription control, RNA processing control,
mRNA transport control, mRNA translation control, mRNA and
protein degradation control, Gene regulation in development and
expression.
Unit-III
Basic molecular biology, restriction digestion, PCR, cloning
etc. Evolution of genome and basic phycogenetics Genetic
engineering and transgenic organisms, Genome sequencing methods
and analysis. Human genome sequencing project. Functional
genomics.
Unit-IV
Proteomics; Basic concept and analysis, comparative
genomics: definition and applications, Pharmacogenomics and
population genomics : Principle and methods.
Unit-V
Introduction to Biological databases, Protein sequence
databases : Swiss prot, Singal peptide databank, EMBL nucelotide
sequence databank, AIDS virus sequence databank etc. Entry and
retrieval of data from public databases. Other bioinformatics
resoruces in the NET.
List of Books :
1. Brooker, R.J. Genetic Analysis and Principles. Addison
Wisely Longman, N.Y. (2001).
2. Pevzner, J. Introduction to Bioinformatics. John Wiley and
Sons, Y.N. (2003).
3. Baxevanis A.D. Bioinformatics: A practical guide to the
analysis of Gene and Proteins (2nd Edition) 2001.
4. Lodish H, Berk A, Zipursky, S.L., Baltimore, D. Darnel, J.
Molecular Cell Biology. W.H. Freemen and Company, USA
(2000).
Paper-B
Fundamentals of Computers, Web Technology and
Networking
20 marks.
being 12 marks.
Unit-I
Introduction to computer, History of Computers: Evolution,
Generation of computers (I, II, III, IV, V), Classification of computers
(Notebook, Personal Computers, Workstation, Mainframes,
Minicomputers, Microcomputers Supercomputers)—comparison
with memory, power, cost, size-then and now.
Unit-II
Digital Circuits and Computer Architecture: Transistors—
and Integrated Circuits (LSI, VLSI), Operation of processor;
Number Systems and Digital Circuits; ALU; Memory Chips (ROM,
RAM, DRAM), Storage Devices, Memory Hierarchy; I/O Devices;
Bus Systems; Computer Organization and Architecture;
Microprocessor; Moore's Law.
Unit-III
MS-Word : Introduction to word, Introduction to parts of
window (title bar, menu bar, tool bar, ruler, status bar), Creating,
opening, saving and printing a document, Editing a document, Copy
move and replace the text, text formatting, Page Setup, Margins,
Gutters, text alignment, Line spacing, Page break, header and footers,
spell checking. Creation and Manipulation of tables, Mail Merge.
MS-Powerpoint: Introduction, Power point Elements,
Exploring Power Point Menu: opening and closing menu, working
with dialog box, adding text, title. Moving and resizing text, starting
a slide show, opening, saving and printing a slide show.
Views: Slide view, sorter view, notes view, online view,
Formatting Text, Enhancing Text by using bullets, fonts style, font
size, effect and color, Displaying slide show and adding multimedia.
MS-Excel : Introduction, format of electronic worksheet,
adding data in worksheet, cell addressing, saving, opening and
printing a worksheet, Ranges and different type of ranges, applying
formula, copying formula, various, mathematical function, statistical
functional and date functions, charts.
Unit-IV
Network Architectures-Layered protocols-local area
networks, Repeaters, bridges, Routers and structured cabling.
Computer Networks: Network communication infrastructure;
Protocols; Wireless LAN and Mobile Computing.
Unit-V
Loading Linux on a PC, launching various services like web
server, email server and proxy server. Setting network on Linux
machine.
Web Technology : HTML and Web pages; The Internet and
Intranet; WWW; Java Script and Dynamic Web Pages; Multimedia
Application; Computer Network Security; e-Commerce and m-
Commerce.
Recommended Books :
MS Office
* Kapila H. (2003). PC Computing Window Based
computer system. Dinesh Publishers, Jalandhar.
* Grauer B. (2005). Expolring Microsoft Office 2003
(Volume I). Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Computing Fundamentals
* Norton's P. (2001). Introduction to Computing
Fundamental. McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi.
* Sinha P.K. (2001). Fundamental of Computers. BPB
Publication, New Delhi.
HTML and Visual Basic
* Harriger R. Alka (1999). Introduction to Computer
Programming with Visual Basic 6, Prentice Hall
Publications, New Jersey.
* Bayross I. (2002). Programming in Visual Basic 6.0.
BPB Publication, New Delhi.
* Deborah S. Ray, Eric J. Ray (2002) Mastering HTML
and XHTML, Sybex Inc.
* HTML Complete, 3rd Edition (2003), Sybex Inc.
Paper-C
Introduction to Database Management System

20 marks.
being 12 marks.
Unit-I
Introduction, Characteristics of Data base approach,
Database users, Intended uses of databases, Implication of database
approach.
Database System Concepts and Architecture, Data Models,
Schemes bad Instances, DBMS Architectrue and data indepen-
dence, database languages, Classification of DBMS.
Unit-II
Database Design: Informal Design guidelines for relation
Schemes, Functional Dependencies, Normal forms based on primary
keys, General Definition of 2nd and 3rd Normal Forms, BCNF,
Need of further Normalization.
Unit-III
Data Modeling using ER diagram, ER Model Concepts,
Notation for ER Diagrams. The relational Model, Relational Model
Concepts, Relational Model Constraints, Introduction to Relational
Algebra.
Unit-IV
SQL: Introduction, Data Definition in SQL, Quries in SQL,
Update statement in SQL, Views SQL, Simple programs in PL/
SQL.
Unit-V
Data Mining, Definition, Data Mining and KDD, Data Mining
on relational databases, Data Warehouses, Transactional Databases
etc. Data Mining Functionalities, Pattern Minning. Association
Analysis, Classification and Prediction, Cluster Analysis, Evolution
Analysis, Data Mining on Biological data.
Recommended Books:
1. Fundamentals of Database Systems by Elmasari and
Navathe, Prentice Hall (India), 2001.
2. Data Mining Concepts and Techniques-Jiawei Han,
Micheline Kamber, Morgan Kaufmann Publisher, 2001.
Paper-D
Lab in Database Management System & Computer
Fundamentals, Web Technology
Practical
MS-WORD
1. To create, open, close a document and toolbars operations.
2. Practical based on page setup, print a document.
3. To add headers, footer, pagebreak.
4. Table handling Mail Merge.
MS-POWERPOINT
1. Concept of slide, presentation, custom animation.
2. To insert pictures and sound file to slide.
Slide Transition.
MS-EXCEL
1. To create, open, close worksheet.
2. To add numeric as well as character data in a cell.
3. To develop formulas, modify charts.
* Installation of LINUX
* Basic Exercises on HTML.
* Exercises to understand RDBMS: Oracle, SQL etc.;
Usage of important Commands/instructions.
Paper-E
On Job Training
Time : 2 Hrs.
This should be taken up during summer vacations over a
period of one month in Bioinformatics/Computer.
BOTANY
Distribution of Marks and Time
Paper-A 75 Marks 3 Hrs.
Paper-B 75 Marks 3 Hrs.
Practical-A 25 Marks 3 Hrs.
Practical-B 25 Marks 3 Hrs.
There will be a total of nine questions. Question No. 1 will be
compulsory and will be of short answer-type (3-4 lines). No multiple
choice questions, answer of one-word answer type be set. The
remaining 8 questions will include two questions from each unit.
Candidates will be required to attempt 1 question from each of the
4 units. All question including Question No. 1 will have equal marks.
Paper-A
Diversity of Seed Plants and Their Systematics
Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks Theory : 75
Practical : 25
Total : 100
Unit I
1. Characteristics of seed plants; evolution of the seed habit;
Distinguishing features of angiosperms and gymnosperms.
2. Major contribution of cytology, phytochemistry and
taximetrics to taxonomy.
Unit II
3. General features of gymnosperms and their classification;
evolution and diversity of gymnosperms including fossil and
living gymnosperms; geological time scale and fossilization.
4. Morphology of vegetative and reproductive parts; anatomy
of root, stem and leaf; reproduction and life cycle of Pinus,
Cycas, Epherda and Ginkgo.
Unit III
5. Angiosperms : Origin and evolution. Some examples of
primitive angiosperms.
6. Angiosperm taxonomy; brief history, aims and fundamental

components (alpha-taxonomy, omega-taxonomy,
holotaxonomy); identification, keys. Taxonomic literature.
7. Botanical nomenclature : taxonomic ranks; type concept;
principle of priority.
Unit IV
8. Classification of angiosperms; salient features of the systems
proposed by Bentham and Hooker, Engler and Prantl.
9. Diversity of flowering plants as illustrated by members of
the families Ranuculaceae, Brassicaceae, Rutaceae,
Fabaceae, Apiaceae, Acanthaceae, Apocynaceae,
Asclepiadaceae, Solanaceae, Lamiaceae. Chenopodiaceae,
Euphorbiaceae, Liliaceae and Poaceae.
Note for teachers
The students should be made familiar with the families listed
at Serial No. 9 only in the practical classes with representative
species or any other that may be available locally. See the list for
practical classes. However, questions pertaining to these may be
asked in the theory examination.
The teachers should prevent students from collecting plants
from the wild and submitting them for the practical examination.
Instead, the students should be asked to prepare field reports.
Suggested Readings
1. Bhatnagar, S.P. and Moitra, A. 1996. Gymnosperms, New
Age Internationl Limited, New Delhi.
2. Davis, P.H. and Heywood, V.H., 1963, Principles of
Angiosperm Taxonomy, Oliver and Boyd, London.
3. Gifford, E.M. and Foster, A.S., 1988, Morphology and
Evolution of Vascular Plants, W.H. Freeman & Company,
New York.
4. Jeffrey, C. 1982, An Introduction to Plant Taxonomy,
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, London.
5. Jones, S.B., Jr. and Luchsinger, A.E., 1986, Plant

Systematics (2nd edition), McGraw-Hill Book Co., New
York.
6. Radford, A.E., 1986, Fundamental of Plant Systematics,
7. Singh, G. 1999, Plant Systematics : Theory and Practice,
Oxford and IBH Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
8. Sporne, K.R., 1965, The Morphology of Gymnosperms,
Hutchinson & Co. (Publishers) Ltd., London.
Suggested Laboratory Exercises
Angiosperms
The following species are suitable for study. This list is only
indicative. Teachers may select plants available in their locality.
1. Ranunculaceae : Ranunculus, Delphinium
2. Brassicaceae : Brassica, Alyssum, Iberis, Coronopus.
3. Malvaceae : Hibiscus, Abutilon.
4. Rutaceae : Murraya, Citrus.
5. Fabaceae : Faboideae : Lathyrus, Cajanus, Melilotus,
Trigonella, Caesalpinioideae : Cassia, Caeslpainia,
Mimosoideae : Prosopis, Mimosa, Aeacia.
6. Apiaceae : Coriandrum. Foeniculum, Anethum.
7. Acanthaceae : Adhatoda, Peristrophe.
8. Apocynaceae : Vinca, Thevetia, Nerium.
9. Asclepiadaceae : Calotropis.
10. Solanaceae : Solanum, Withania, Datura.
11. Euphorbiaceae : Euphorbia, Phyllanthus.
12. Lamiaceae : Ocimum, Salvia.
13. Chenopodiaceae : Chenopodium, Beta.
14. Liliaceae : Asphodelus, Asparagus.
15. Poaceae : Avena, Triticum, Hordeum Poa, Sorghum. The

students should be made familiar with the use of identification
keys including use of computers in taxonomy.
Gymnosperms
Cycas
i) Habit, armour, of leaf bases on the stem (if specimen is not
available show photography), very young leaf (circinate
vernation) and old foliage leaves, sclae leaf, bulbils, male
cone (specimen); Microsporophyll, megasporophyll mature
seed.
ii) Study through permanent slides—normal root (T.S.), stem
(T.S.) (if sections are not available show photographs), ovule
(L.S.).
iii) Study through hand sections or dissections-coralloid root
(T.S.), rachis (T.S.), leaflet (V.S.), microsporophyll (V.S.)
pollen grains (W.M.).
Pinus
i) Habit, long and dwarf shoot showing cataphylls and scale
leaves, T.S. wood showing growth rings, male cone, 1st
year, 2nd year and 3rd year female cones, winged seeds.
ii) Study through permanent slides-root (T.S.), female cone
(L.S.) ovule (L.S.), embryo (W.M.) showing
polycotyledonous condition.
iii) Study through hand sections or dissections-young stem (T.S.),
old stem (wood) (T.L.S. and R.L.S.), needle (T.S. male
cone (L.S.), male cone (T.S.), Pollen grains (W.M.).
Ephedra
i) Habit and structure of whole and female cones.
ii) Permanent slides-female cone (L.S.).
iii) Hand sections/dissections-node (L.S.), internode (T.S.),
macerated stem to see vessel structure; epidermal peel
mount of vegetative parts to study stomata, male cone (T.S.
and L.S.), pollen grains.
BOTANY
Paper-B
Structure, Development and Reproduction in Flowering
Plants
Time : 3 Hrs.
Hours of Teaching : Theory : 60 Max.Marks Theory : 75
Practical : 100 Practical : 25
Total : 160 Total : 100
Instructions for Paper Setter :
There will be a total of nine questions. Question No. 1 will be
compulsory and will be of short answer type (3-4 lines). However
no multiple choice, one-word answer type questions shall be set.
The remaining 8 questions will include two questions from each
unit. Candidates will be required to attempt one question from each
of the four units. They will have to attempt five questions in all and
all questions will carry equal marks.
Unit-I
1. The basic body plan of a flowering plant-modular type of
growth.
2. The Shoot System : The shoort apical meristem and its
histological organization; meristematic and permanent tissue,
formation of internodes, branching pattern; monopodial and
sympodial growth; canopy architecture; cambium and its
functions; formation of secondary xylem; a general account
of wood structure in relation to conduction of water and
minerals; characteristics of growth rings, sapwood and heart
wood; role of woody skeleton; secondary phloem-structure-
function relationships; Periderm.
Unit-II
3. Diversity in plant form in annuals, biennials and perennials;
trees-largest and longest-lived.
4. Leaf : origin, development, arrangement and diversity in
size and shape; internal structure in relation to photosynthesis
and water loss; adaptations to water stress; senescence
and abscission.
Unit-III
5. The Root System : The root apical meristem; differentiation
of primary and secondary tissues and their roles; structural
modification for storage, respiration, reproduction and for
interaction with microbes.
6. Vegetative Reproduction : Various methods of vegetative
propagation. Detailed study and types of grafting and
budding, economic aspects.
7. Flower : A modified shoot; structure, development and
varieties of flower; functions; structure of anther and pistil;
the male and female gametophytes; types of pollination;
attractions and rewars for pollinators; (sucking and foraging
types); pollen-pistu interaction self incompatiability; double
fertilization: formation of seed endosperm and embroy : fruit
development and maturation.
8. Significance of seed : Suspended animation; ecological
adaptation; unit of genetic recombination with reference to
reshuffling of genes and replenishment; dispersal strategies.
Note for teachers :
Wherever required, role of environment and hormones in plant
development and reproduction should be emphasized.
Suggested Readings
1. Bhojwani, S.S. and Bhatnagar, S.P. 2000. The Embryology
of Angiosperms, 4th revised and enlarged edition. Vikas
Publishing House, Delhi.
2. Hartmann, H.T. and Kestler, D.E., 1976, Plant Propagation:
Principles and Practices, 3rd edition, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Mauseth, J.D., 1988, Plant Anatomy, The Benjamin/
Cummings Publishing Company Inc., Menlo Park, California,
USA.
4. Peau, K., 1977, Anatomy of Seed Plants, 3rd edition. John
Wiley & Sons, New York.
5. Pegeri, K. and Vander Pijl 1979, The Principles of Pollination

Biology, Pergamon Press, Oxford.
6. Raven, P.H., Evert, R.F. and Eichhorn, S.E., 1999, Biology
of Plants, 5th edition. W.H. Freeman and Co., Worth
Publishers, New York.
7. Thomas, P., 2000, Trees : Their Natural History, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge.
Suggested Laboratory Exercises
1. Study of any commonly occurring dicotyledonous plant (for
example Solanum nigrum or Kalanchoe) to the body plan,
organography and modular type of growth.
2. Life forms exhibited by flowering plants (by a visit to a
forest or a garden, Study of tree-like habit in cycads, bamboo,
banana, traveller's tree (Revenala madagascariensis) and
yucca and comparison with true trees as exemplified by
conifers and dicotyledons.
3. L.S. Shoot tip to study the cytohistological zonation and
origion of leaf primordia.
4. Monopodial and sympodial types of branching in stems
(especially rhizomes).
5. Anatomy of primary and secondary growth in monocots
and dicots using free hand razor technique (Solanum,
Boethaevi Helianthus, Mirabilis, Nyctanthus, Draceana,
Maize) hand sections (or prepared slides). Structure of
secondary phloem and xylem. Growth rings in wood,
Microscopic study of wood in T.S., T.L.S. and R.L.S.
6. Field study of diversity in leaf shape, size, thickness, surface
properties. Internal structure of leaf. Structure and
development of stomata (using epidermal peels of leaf.
7. Anatomy of the root. Primary and secondary structure.
8. Examination of a wide range of flowers available in the
locality and methods of their pollination.
9. Structure of anther, microsperogenesis (using slides) and

pollen grains (using whole mounts). Pollen viability using in
vitro pollen germination.
10. Structure of ovule and embryo sac development using serial
sections) from permanent slides.
11. Nuclear and cellular endosperm. Embryo development in
monocots and dicots (using permanent slides/dissections).
12. Simple experiments to show vegetative propagation (leaf
cuttings in Bryophyllum. Sansevieria, Begonia; stem cuttings
in rose, salix, money plant, Sugarcane and Bougainvillea).
13. Germination of non-dormant and dormant seeds.
Suggested Readings (for laboratory exercises)
1. Bhojwani, S.S. and Bhatnagar, P., 2000, The Embryology
of Angiosperms (4th revised and enlarged edition), Vikas
Publishing House, New Delhi.
2. Mauseth, J.D., 1988, Plant Anatomy, The Benjamin/
Cumminas Publishing Co., Inc., Mehlo Park, California,
USA.
3. Raven, P.H., Evert, R.F. and Eichhorn, S.E., 1992, Biology
of Plants (5th Edition). Worth Publishers, New York.
4. Steeves, T.A. and Sussex, I.M., 1989, Patterns in Plant
Development (2nd Edition). Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge.
ZOOLOGY
Paper Maximum Hours or Examination
Marks Equivalent duration
periods hr.
per week
Paper A* 75 3 Hours 3 Hours
Paper B** 75 3 Hours 3 Hours
Practical-I 25 2¼ Hours 3 Hours
(related to Paper-A)
Practical-II 25 2¼ Hours 3 Hours
(related to Paper-B)
*Paper-A : Evolution & Biodiversity-III (Chordates)

Section-I Evolution
Section-II Biodiversity-III (Chordates)
**Paper-B : Biochemistry & Animal Physiology
Section-I Biochemistry
Section-II Animal Physiology
ZOOLOGY
Paper-A
Evolution & Biodiversity-III (Chordates)
Examination Time : 3 hrs. Maximum Marks : 75
Section-I
Evolution
— Concepts and evidences of organic evolution.
— Theories of organic evolution.
— Origin of life.
— Concepts of micro, macro and mega-evlution.
— Concepts and Species.
— Fossils and evolutionary rate.
— Evolution of man.
Section-II
Biodiversity-III (Chordates)
Chordates - Origin.
Prochordates - Urochordata-Type study-Herdmania,
Cephalochordata-Type study-Amphioxus.
Cyclostomata - External Characters of Petromyzon &
affinities of Cyclostomata
Pisces - Type study-Labeo,
Scales & fins. Migration & Parental Care.
Amphibia - Type study-Frog,
- Origin & Parental Care.
Reptilia - Type study-Uromastix,
Origin & Extinct reptiles,
Poisonous and non-Poisonous Snakes,
poison apparatus.
Aves - Type study-Pigeon,

Flight adaptation & Bird migration.
Mammals - Type study-Rat
Adaptive radiation, Dentition.
Characteristics of vertebrata and its groups
Classification of the animals up to orders relating to the
following groups along with brief ecological notes of the following:
Prochordates : Herdmania, Molgula, Pyrosoma,
Doliolum, Salpa, Oikopleura &
Amphioxus
Cyclostomata : Myxine, Petromyzon & Ammocoetus larva.
Chondricthyes : Zygaena (hammer head shark), Pristis (saw
fish), Narcine (electric ray), Trygon,
Rhinobatus and Chimaera (rabbit fish).
Actinopterygii : Polypterus, Acipenser, Lepidosteus,
Muraena, Mystus, Catla, Hippocampus,
Syngathus, Exocoetus, Anabas, Diodon,
Tetradon, Echeneis and Solea.
Dipneusti (Dipnoi) : Protopterus (lung fish)
Amphibia : Uraeotyphlus, Necturus, Amphiuma,
Amblystoma its Axoloti Larva, Triton,
Salamandra, Hyla, Rhacophorus.
Reptilia : Chelone (turtle) and Testudo (tortoise),
Hemidactylus (wall lizared), Calotes,
Draco, Varanus, Phrynosoma,
Chamaeleon,Typhlops, Python, Eryx,
Bungarus, Naja, Hydrus, Vipera,
Crocodilus. Gavialis and Alligator.
Aves : Ardea, Milvus, Pavo, Tyto, Alcedo,
Eudynamis and Casuarius.
Mammalia : Ornithorhynchus, Echidna, Didelphis,

Macropus (kangaroo), Loris, Macaca,
Mains (scaly ant eater) Hystrix (porcupine),
Funambulus (squirrel), Panthera, Canis,
Herpestes (mongoose), Capra, Pterous.
Note for the paper setters :
- Nine questions are to be set in all.
- Question No. 1 is compulsory consisting of short/multiple
answer type questions covering the whole syllabus. It will
have 10 parts of 1½ marks each.
- Three Questions from Section-I & Five questions/long
answers are to be set from section-II, the Questions can
have sub-parts.
Instructions for the students :
- Four questions/long answers are to be attempted, at least
one from section-I and two from section-II, the fourth can
be attempted from either of the section.
- In all, Five questions are to be attempted including
compulsory one.
ZOOLOGY
Paper-B
Biochemistry & Animal Physiology
Examination Time : 3 hrs. Maximum Marks : 75
Section-I
Biochemistry
- Biochemistry and its scope;
- Carbohydrates, proteins. Lipids and nucleic acids : their
classifications and functions.
- Enzymes : Nature, their classification and coenzymes.
- Carbohydrates metabolism : The Embden Meyerhoff, Parnas
Pathway (glycolysis) the tricarboxylic acid cycle, the hexose
monophosphate shunt, glycogensis and glycogenolysis.
- Lipid metabolism : β-Oxidation of fatty acids, rate of glycerol
and gluconeogenesis, interaction of carbohydrates and lipids,
lipogensis in tissues, ketosis.
- Protein metabolism : Protein metabolism of amino acids
(oxidative deamination, transamination and decarboxylation,
hydrolysis of proteins and ornithine cycle).
Section-II
Animal Physiology
Digestion : Digestion of dietary constituents, regulation of
digestive processes and absorption. Types of
nutrition, feeding mechanisms, extra and intra
cellular digestion, enzymatic digestion and symbiotic
digestion.
Blood : Composition and functions of blood and lymph.
Molecular structure and function of haemoglobin,
blood clotting. Blood groups including Rh factor,
haemopoiesis and haemostasis.
Heart : Origin and regulation of heart beat, cardiac cycle,
electrocardiogram, cardiac output, fluid pressure
and flow pressure in closed and open circulatory

systems, blood pressure and micro-circulation.
Respiration : Transport of O2 and CO2, Oxygen dissociation
curve of haemoglobin, Bohr effect, chloride (-) shift,
Haldane effect and control of breathing.
Excretion : Urine formation and osmoregulation.
Muscles : Ultrastructure, chemical and physiological basis of
skeletal muscle contraction.
Neural : Structure of neuron, resting membrane potential,
integration origin and propagation of impulse along the axon,
synapse and myoneural function.
Physiology : Taxes and reflexes, instinctive and motivate learning
of Behavior and reasoning
Endocrine : Structure and physiology of thyroid, parathyroid,
adrenal, hypothalamus, pituitary, pancreas and
gonads.
Note for the paper setters :
- Nine questions are to be set in all.
- Question No. 1 is compulsory consisting of short/multiple
answer type questions covering the whole syllabus. It will
have 10 parts of 1½ marks each.
- Three questions from Section-I and Five Questions/long
answers are to be set from section-II, the Questions can
have sub-parts.
Instructions for the students :
- Four questions/long answers are to be attempted, at least
one from section I and two from section II, the fourth can
be attempted from either of the section.
- In all, Five questions are to be attempted including
compulsory one.
Suggested Readings
1. Parker, T.J. and Haswell, W.A, Text Book of Zoology, Vol. II
(Vertebrates), ELBS and Macmillian Press Ltd., 1981.
2. Dobzhansky, Ayala, Stebbins & Valentine, Evolution W.H.
Freeman, 1952.
3. Colbert. E.H., Evolution of Vertebrates, II Edition, Wiley
Eastern Ltd., 1989.
4. Dhami, P.S. & Dhami J.K., Vertebrates, R. Chand & Co.,
New Delhi, 1998.
5. Taneja, S.K., Biochemistry & Animal Physiology, Trueman
Book Co., 1997.
6. Guyton, A.S., Text Book of Medical Physiology, 7th Edition,
W.B. Saunders Company, 1994.
7. Robert, K., Murray, Mayes Daryl, K. Granner, Victor, W.,
Woodwell, Harper's Biochemistry, 22nd Edition, Prentice Hall
International Inc., 1990.
8. Lehninger, A., Principles of Biochemistry, Worth Publishers,
Inc., USA, 2000.
9. Bhamarah, H.S., Juneka K., Cytogenetics & Evolution,
Anmol Publication Pvt. Ltd., 1993.
Practical-I (Related to Paper A)

Maximum Marks : 25
Examination Time : 3 hrs.
1. Classification up to order level, except in case of Pisces and
Aves where classification up to subclass level, habits, habitat, external
characters and economic importance (if any) of the following animals
is required :
Urochordata : Herdmania, Molgula, Pyrosoma,
Doliolum, Salpa & Oikopleura.
Cephalochordata : Amphioxus.
Cyclostomata : Myxine, Petromyzon & Ammocoetes
Larva.
Chondrinchthyes : Zygaena (hammer head shark), Pristis
(saw fish), Narcine (electric ray), Trygon,
Rhinobatus and Chimaera (rabbit fish).
Actinoptergii : Polypterus, Acipenser, Lepidosteus,
Muraena, Mystus, Catla, Hippocampus,
Syngnathus, Exocoetus, Anabas, Diodon,
Tetradon, Echeneis and Solea.
Dipneusti (Dipnoi) : Protopterus (african lung fish)
Amphibia : Uraeotyphlus, Necturus, Amphiuma,
Amblystoma and its Axolotl Larva, Triton,
Salamandra, Hyla, Rhycophorus
Reptila : Hemidactylus, Calotes, Draco, Varanus,
Phrynosoma, Chamaeleon, Typhlops,
Python, Eryx, Ptyas, Bungarus, Naja,
Hydrus, Vipera, Crocodilus, Gavialis,
Chelone (turtle) and Testudo (tortoise)
Aves : Casuarius, Ardea, Anas, Milvus, Pavo,
Eudynamics, Tyto and Alcedo.
Mammalia : Ornithorynchus, Echidna, Didelphis,
Macropus, Loris, Macaca, Manis,
Hystrix, Funambulus, Panthera, Canis,
Herpestes, Capra, Pteropus.
2. Examine and dissect the following animals :

Herdmania : - General anatomy
Labeo : - Digestive and reproductive systems, heart,
afferent and branchia arteries, cranial
nerves and internal ear.
Chick : - Digestive, arterial, venous and urino-genital
systems.
White Rat : - Digestive, arterial, venous and urino-genital
systems.
Make temporary preparations of the following :
Temporary preparation of Spicules of Herdmania.
Permanent preparation of whole amount of Pharynx of
Herdmania and Amphioxus.
Cycloid scales of Labeo, blood smear of mammal.
Guidelines for conduct of Practical-I Examination
1. Dissect the animal provides so as to expose its-------system.
Make labeled sketch of the dissection and demonstrate the
same to the Examiner. (6)
2. Make temporary mount of the material A. Identify and make
labeled sketch. Show the preparation to the Examiner. (4)
3. Identify and classify the specimens B to F upto orders. Write
short note on habitat, special features of G & H, feeding
habits and economic importance of speciman. (2x5=10)
4. Viva-Voce+Note Book (4+1=5)
ZOOLOGY
Practical-II
(Related to Paper-B)
Maximum Marks : 25 Examination Time : 3 hrs.
1. Study of the skeletal of Rana (frog), Scoliodon, Varanus,
Gallus and Oryctolagus (Rabbit).
2. Study of the following prepared slides :
T.S. Amphioxus through various regions.
Spicules & Pharynx of Herdmania & Pharynx of
Amphioxus.
Histology of rat/rabbit (compound tissues)
3. Identification of food stuffs: starch, glucose, proteins and
fats in solution.
4. Demonstration of osmosis and diffusion.
5. Demonstrate the presence of amylase in saliva, denaturation
by pH and temperature.
6. Determination coagulation and bleeding time of blood in man/
rat/rabbit.
7. Determination of blood groups of human blood sample.
8. Recording of blood pressure of man.
9. Analysis of urine for urea, chloride, glucose and uric acid.
10. Estimation of haemoglobin content.
Field study : Visit to a fossil Park/Lab.
Familiarity with the local vertebrate fauna.
Guidelines for conduct of Practical-II Examination
1. Identify the given bones A & B. Make labeled sketches of
their respective—views (6)
2. Minor experiment of Physiology such as blood groups
determination/identification of some food stuffs/presence
of chloride or glucose in urine etc. (5)
3. Perform the given physiology experiment, write the
procedure and show it to the examiner. (5)
4. Identify the slides C & D giving two reasons for each
identification. (4)
5. Viva-voce+Note Book (4+1)=5
MICROBIAL & FOOD TECHNOLOGY

Paper-A
Basic Food Mircobiology
There will be a total of nine questions. Question No. 1
will be compulsory and will be of short answer type (3-4 lines).
However no multiple choice one-word answer type questions
shall be set. The remaining 8 questions will include two
questions from each unit. Candidates will be required to
attempt one question from each of the four units. They will
have to attempt five questions in all and all questions will
carry equal marks.
Unit-I
Food as a substrate for microorganisms, intrinsic and extrinsic
factors affecting the growth of various microorganisms in foods.
Microorganisms important in food microbiology-bacteria, yeasts and
molds, sources of contamination in Foods.
Unit-II
Fermented foods, origin of fermentation as a method of
preparing indigenous foods, bread, dahi, dosa, idli, dhokla, etc.
Unit-III
Principles of food preservation and spoilage, asepsis, anaerobic
conditions, aseptic packaging, preservation methods, high
temperature, low temperature, drying, chemical preservatives.
Unit-IV
Spoilage of various milk and milk products, cereal and cereal
products, vegetable and fruits, meat and meat products, canned
foods. Food poisoning and food infection, staphylococcal, Clostridium
and Salmonella intoxications.
Books Recommended
* Frazier, W.C. and Westhoff, D.C. 1978. Food Microbiology,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., New Delhi.
* Banwart, G.J., 1987. Basic Food Microbiology. CBS
Publishers and Distributions, New Delhi.
* Power, C.B. and Dagniwals, H.F. 1992. General
Microbiology. Volume II. Himalaya Publishing House, New
Delhi.

Paper-B
Principles of Food Nutrition
carry equal marks.
Uuit-I
Introduction to Nutrition
Food as a source of nutrients. functions of foods, Malnutrition.
Food guide—Basic five food groups, Concept or Blanced diet.
Energy requirement or the body.
Unit-II
Food Chemistry
Composition, metabolism & functions of carbohydrates, proteins
& fate.
Vitamins & Minerals : Sources, Bioavailability, Functions &
deficiency.
Water : Sources, Requirement, functions, water-balance, effects of
deficiency.
Unit-III
Meal Planning
Bais principles of meal planning objectives
Steps in meal planning food cost.
Planning normal diets for following age groups :
a) Adult male & female

b) Pregnancy & weaning
c) Infancy & school going
d) Adolescence
e) Old age
Unit-IV
Therapeutic diets
In following conditions :
a) Diarrhea
b) Hypertension
c) Constipation
d) Fever
Recommended Books
Swaminathan M. Essentials of Food & Nutrition. Vol. I, Bangalore
Printing & Publishing Ltd.
Swaminathan M. Essentials of Food & Nutrition. Vol.II, Bangalore
Printing & Publishing Ltd.
Meyer L.H. Food Chemistry. CBS Publishers & Distributors

Practical-II
1. Determination of calorific value of a given food.
2. Preparation & Calculation of calories, proteins, carboydrates,
fats & fiber of the diets for the following age groups :
a) Adult male & female
b) Pregnancy & weaning
c) Infancy & school going
d) Adolescence
e) Old age
3. Preparation & calculation of calories, proteings, fats,
carbohydrates & fiber of therapeutic diets in the following
conditions.
a) Diarrhea
b) Hypertension
c) Constipation
d) Fever
4. To study microbiological quality of raw milk, pasteurized
milk & dry milk by methylene blue reduction test & standard
plate count.
5. To examine the micro flora of various foods like bread, raw
milk, cheese, fruits & cereals.
6. To prepare the fermented food sauerkraut & study its
microbiology & spoilage characteristics.
7. To isolate & recognize the microorganisms responsible for
the fermentation of yoghurt.
8. To determine & compare the effect of deep freezing &
refrigeration on the viability of microorganisms.
MICROBIOLOGY (Vocational)
Paper-A
Microbial Nutrition and Metabolism
carry equal marks.
Unit-I
1. Nutrition, requirements for growth of Microorganisms,
Nutrients and accessory constituents, medium designing.
Unit-II
2. Transport of nutrients across the cell membrane, active
transport, passive transport, diffusion and group translocation
for the transport of nutrients across the membrane.
Unit-III
3. Growth and metabolism, catabolism and energy, Pathways,
for breakdown of glucose (glycolysis, Kreb's cycle
fermentation, pentose phosphate pathways), gluconeogenesis,
assimilation of nitrogen energy metabolism in aerobic and
anaerobic microorganisms, metabolism of starch & cellulose
by bacteria.
Unit-IV
4. Laws of thermodynamics, entrophy, enthalpy and free energy
of reaction standard, oxidative phosphorylation, Electron
transport, respiratory chains of bacteria. Biosynthesis of
nucleic acids, for synthsis of purine and pyrimidine
nucleotides. Enzymes, kinetics, Michaelis Menten equation

and allosteric enzymes.
Books Recommended
1. Pleczar, M.J., Chan, E.C.S. Krieg. N.R., 1993, Microbiology,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co, Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Stanier, R.Y., Ingraham, J.L., Wheelis, M.L. and Painter,
P.R.,1986, General Microbiology, MacMillan Education Ltd.,
Publishers.
3. Power, C.B. and Dangniwala, H.F.1992, General
Microbiology Volume I and II, Himalaya Publishing House,
New Delhi.
4. Sharma,P.D.1997, Microbiology, Rastogi Publications,
Meerut.
Paper-B
Microbial Ecology
There will be a total of nine questions. Question No 1
carry equal marks.
Unit-I
1. Diversity of microbial habitats : Environmental selecting
factors, physical, chemical and biological types of microbial
habitats, atmospheric, aquatic and terrestrial environments.
Unit-II
2. Microbial interactions, Competition for survival in nature (for
nutrients, space, oxygen), antagonism, commensalism,
symbiosis, parasitism miscellaneous associations in nature.
Unit-III
3. Role of microorganisms in geochemicals cycles : Carbon
cycle, nitrogen cycle, phosphorus cycle. Sulphur cycle,
microbial toxins in the enviornment: Types of Microbial toxins,
ecological consequences of microbial toxins as insectical
agents, bioinsecticides.
Unit-IV
4. Microbiological aspects of pollution caused by domestic and
industrial sewages, water pollution, air pollution, potable and
non-potable water, concept of BOD and COD, effluent
treatment by primary, secondary and tertiary methods,
biofertilizers bioinsecticides.
Books Recommended
1. Edmonds, P., 1978, Microbiology : An environmental
perspective, MacMillan Publishing Co., Inc., New York.
2. Powar C.B. and Danginwala, H.F., 1992, General
Microbiology, Volume II, Himalaya Publishing House, New
Delhi.
3. Sharma, P.D., 1997, Microbiology, Rastogi Publication,
Meerut.
4. Pleczar, M.J., Chan, E.C.S. and Krieg N.R., 1993,
Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd., New
Delhi.
5. Patel, A.H., 1984, Industrial Microbiology, Macmillan India
Ltd., Delhi.
Practicals-II
1. Isolation and enumeration of total bacteria from soil by pour
plating and spread plating.
2. Isolation of yeasts from fermented foods.
3. Isolation and enumeration of fungi from soil and air.
4. Isolation of symbiotic and non-symbiotic nitrogen fixing
bacteria.
5. Distinction between fermenting and non-fermenting
microorganisms.
6. Effects of various concentrations of carbon source on
microbial growth.
7. Effects of various concentrations of nitrogen source on
microbial growth.
8. Effect of temperature on microbial growth.
9. Effect of pH on microbial growth.
10. Determination of bacteriological quality of drinking water.
11. Determination of COD in water sample.
12. Determination of dissolved oxygen in water sample.
INDUSTRIAL MICROBIOLOGY
(Vocational)
Paper-A
Microbial Physiology

However no multiple choice, one-word answer type questions
carry equal marks.
Unit-I
Brief account of forms (viz.cell wall, cell membrane, nucleus
ribosome) and their function in microbes, salient properties of water
as biological solvent, pH homeostasis, buffers.
Unit-II
Structural properties of membranes. Transport across cell
membrane diffusion, gaseous, exchange, osmosis, plasmolysis,
passive and active transport, biochemical factors regulating the
transport, role of ionophores, group translocation across membrane.
Laws of thermodynamics, entropy, enthalpy and free energy of
reaction standard Redox potential, hydrolysis of energy rich
intermediates and ATP. Respiratory electron transport and proton-
pump chemiosmotic theory. Oxidative phosphorylation (ATP
synthesis).
Unit-III
Photosynthetic microbes, oxygenic/non oxygenic reaction
centres, electron transport, photophosphorylation, Calvin Cycle, (dark
reaction), phospheonol carboxylase photorespiration and it's
significance. Effect of light, temperature, pH, CO2 concentration,

on photosynthesis, Measurement of net phosphosynthetic yield.
Respiratory pathway, breakdown of carbohydrates though glycolysis,
Kreb's cycle fermentation, pentose phosphate pathways, oxidative
and substrate level phosphorylation, significance of Kreb's cycle,
gluconeogenesis, regulation of glycogenesis and glycogenolysis.
Unit-IV
Nitrogen fixation in symbiotoc and free living system,
photosynthetic and non photosynthetic system, oxygen and hydrogen
regulation of nitrogen fixation, nitrification, denitrification and
ammonifying bacteria, pathway of nitrate assimilation in
photosynthetic and non photosynthetic system, transamination and
deamination reactions.
Books Recommended
1. Microbial Physiology (2004) by Moat, A.G.and Foster, J.W.,
John Wiley and Sons.
2. Comprehensive Biotechnology, 1984, Vol.I to IV, Ed., Moo
Young, Pergamon Press. Mocrobial Technology, 1977, Ed.,
H.J.Peppler, Reinhold Publishing Company, New York.
3. Pelezar, M.J.Reid, R.D.and Chan,E.C.S., 1993, Microbiology,
Vth Edition, McGraw Hills.
4. Lehninger, A (2002), Biochemistry, Worth Publication, U.S.A.
5. Peppler, H.J.and Periman, D., 1976, Microbial Technology,
Vol.I., Microbial Processes Academic Press.
(Vocational)
Paper - B
Microbial Biochemistry
carry equal marks.
Unit-I
1. Classification of carbohydrates, optical properties, chemical
properties of carbohydrates, chemical structure and properties
of starch, cellulose, glycogen. Saturated and unsaturated fatty
acids, biosynthesis of fatty acid, distribution and function of
lipids and microorganism. Degradation of lipids by alpha, beta
and omega oxidation, lipid peroxidation.
Unit-II
2. Properties of proteins (acids base property and solubility),
Primary, secondary, tertiary structures of proteins. Amino
acids classification of essential amino acids. Hendersen and
Hasselbalch equation for ionisation of amino acids and
Zwitterions property. Synthesis of peptides.
Unit-III
3. Enzymes Classification, coenzyme, cofactor, thermodynamics
Explanation of enzyme catalysis, reaction order, derivation
of Michaelis-Menten equation, transfomation of Michaelis-
Menten Kinetics to line weaver-Burke Plot, competitive,
uncompetitive and non competitive inhibition, kinetics of
allosteric regulation of enzyme. Isozymes, factors contributing

to catalytic efficiency of enzymes (Mode of catalysis).
Unit-IV
4. The general structure of DNA, RNA (mRNA,tRNA),
synthesis of RNA in Eukaryotes and prokaryotes, concept
of operon, promotors and repressor, post transcriptional
processing of RNA, regulation of gene expression, (positive
and negative control).
Books Recommended
1. Cohn E. E and Stumph P.K., (1988). Outline of Biochemistry,
John Wiley and Sons.
2. Lehninger, A., (1978), Biochemistry, Worth Publication,
U.S.A.
3. Peppler, H.J.and Periman, D., 1979, Microbial Technology,
Vol.I, Microbial Processes, Academic Press.
4. Microbial Physiology, (1981) by Moat, A.G. and Foster, J.W.,
John Wiley and Sons, Third Edition.
5. General Microbiology, Vol.I by Power and Daginawala,
Himalayan Publisher.
(Vocational)
Practicals
1. Growth curve of Bacteria and fungi in shake flask using,
Optical density, Biomass and Cell numbers
2. Effect of pH on the growth of Bacteria and fungi.
3. Effect of temperature on the growth of fungi/bacteria.
4. Estimation of Extracellular Protein in cell culture.
5. Estimation of sugars in cell culture broth.
6. Extraction and identification of lipids by this layer
chromatography.
7. Isolation of micro organisms from air.
8. Isolation of micro organisms from soil.
9. Isolation of micro organisms from water.
10. Paper chromatographic separation of amino acid and
pigments by one way descending.
11. Measurement of Mutation frequency in bacteria.
12. Mutant isolation by gradient plate technique.
13. Effect of UV light on mutation frequency in Bacteria.
BIOTECHNOLOGY (Vocational)
Scheme
Credit Hrs. Marks
Paper A Biophysics and Molecular Biology 3 60
Paper B Immunology and Animal Tissue Culture 3 60
Paper C Practicals
Immunological and Animal Tissue 6 60
Culture Techniques
On Job Training - 20
Total 200
Paper-A
Biophysics and Molecular Biology
Time : 3 Hrs. Periods-3
Marks-60
Note for the paper setters/examiners:
Section A: 10 very short answer type questions are to be set, two
from each unit. The maximum length of answer can be about 1/3 of
a page. All questions are compulsory. Each question will carry 1½
marks, total weightage being 15 marks.
Section B: This section will comprise of 8 questions. Five questions
pages. Each question will carry five marks, total weightage being
25 marks.
Section C: This section will comprise of four essay type questions.
Two questions are to be attempted. Maximum length of answer
can be upto 5 pages. Each question will carry 10 marks, total
Biophysics
Unit-I
Energetics of a living body. Sources of heat limits to
temperature, Heat dissipation and conservation, Lambert-Beer
law, General spectroscopy-UV-vis, fluorescence, IR, Raman
spectra.
Unit-II
Radioisotopic techniques : Base concepts of radioisotopy, theory
and applications of Geiger-Multer tube, solid and liquid scintillation
counters, primary and scondary flours. Safety rules for radioisotopic
studies.
Electrophoresis : Basic principles, theory and application of native,
SDS-Page and Agarose Gel electrophoresis. Introduction to IEF,
(Iso-electric focusing) 2-D gel. Applications in biology for isolation
of biomolecules based on charge and molecular weight.
Chromatography : Theory, principle and application of column,
paper, thin layer, ion-exchange affinity chromatography, GLC,
HPLC.
Unit-III
Molecular basis of life, Structure of DNA, DNA replication in
prokaryotes and eukaryotes, DNA recombination : molecular
mechanisms in prokaryotes and eukaryotes. Insertion elements and
transposons.
Unit-IV
Structure of prokaryotic genes, Prokaryotic transcription, Prokaryotic
translation,Prokaryotic gene expression (lac, his, trpoperons,
catabolic repression).
Unit-V
Structure of eukaryotic genes, Eukaryotic transcription, Eukaryotic
translation, Eukaryotic gene expression, transcription factors
etc.,Gene expression in yeast, Gene expression in protozoan
parasites,Gene organization and expression in - mitochondria,
chloroplasts, Post-translation regulation of gene expression,
Development and environmental regulation of gene expression.
Books Recommended:
1. Damal. J, Lodish, H., and Baltimore, D. (1990), Molecular
Cell Biology, 2nd, .. Scientific American Books, Distributed
by W. H. Freeman and Co., New York.
2. Freifelder, D., (1982), Physical Biochemistry, Application to

Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, 2nd ed., W. H. Freemen
and Company, San Fransisco.
3. Friefelder, D. 2nd ed. Jones & Bartlett Publishers, Inc.
Boston.
4. Lewin, B., (1997), Gene VI, Oxford University Press.
5. R. W. Old and S. B. Primerose (1989): Principles of Gene
Manipulation: An Introduction to Genetic Engineering, Black
Well Scientific Publications.
6. William, B.L. and Wilson, K., (1986), A Biologist Guide to
Principles and Techniques Practical Biochemistry, 3rd ed.,
Edward Arnold Publisher, Baltimore, Maryland (USA).
Paper B
Immunology and Animal Tissue Culture
Time: 3 hrs. Periods-3
Marks : 60
Note for the paper setters/examiners:
Section A: 10 very short answer questions are to be set. Two
from each unit.The maximum length of answer can be about 1/3 of
a page. All questions are compulsory. Each question will carry 1/2
marks, total weightage being 15 marks.
Section B: This section will comprise of 8 questions. Five questions
pages. Each question will carry five marks, total weightage being
25 marks.
Section-C: This section will comprise of four essay type questions.
Two questions are to be attempted. Maximum length of answer
can be upto 5 pages. Each question will carry 10 marks, total
Immunology
Unit-I
The Immune system and Immunity along with historical perspective,
Antigen-antibody and their structure. The organs and the cells of
the immune system and their function, Antigen-antibody interaction.
Unit-II
Humoral and cell mediated immunity (role of MHC and genetic
restriction), Origin of diversity in the immune system, Effector
mechanisms, Immunity to infectious diseases, vaccines.
Animal Tissue Culture
Unit-III
History of development of cell cultures, The natural surroundings
of animal cells, Metabolic capabilities of animal cells, Simulating
natural conditions for growing animal cells, Importance of growth
factors of the serum.
Unit-IV
Primary cultures, Anchorage dependance of growth, Non-
anchorage dependent cells, Secondary cultures, Transformed animal
cells, Established/continuous cell lines, Commonly used animal cell
lines-their origin and characteristics, Growth kinetics of cells in
culture.
Unit-V
Applications of animal cell culture for studies on gene expression,
Organ culture,Transfection of animal cells : Selectable markers,
HAT selection, antibiotic resistance etc., Cell fusion, Transplantation
of cultured cells, Differentiation of cells.
Books Recommended:
1. Austyn, J. M. and Wood, K. J., (1993), Principles of Cellular
and molecular Immunology, Oxford University Press Inc.,
New York
2. Butler, M., (1987), Animal Cell Technology-Principles and
Practices, Oxford University Press.
3. Butler, M., (1991), Mammalian Cell Biotechnology—A
Practical Approach, IRL, Oxford University Press.
4. Buller, M., (1996), The Animal Cell Culture and Technology,
IRL, Oxford Uni. Press
5. Freshney R.T., (1994), Culture of Animal Cells, John Wiley
and Sons, New York.
6. Gareth, E. J., (1996), Human Cell Culture Protocols, Humana
Press.
7. Kuby, J., (1992), Immunology, W. H. Freeman and Company,
New York.
8. Paul, W.E., (1995), Fundamental Immunology, 3rd ed., Raven
Press, NewYork. Applications Wiley Liss
9. Roitt, I.M., Brostoff, J and Male, D. K. (1989), Immunology,
Grower Medical Publishing, New York.
10. Strites D. P., Terr. A.I. & Parslow T.G., (1997), Medical
Immunology, 9th ed.,PHI, Cambridge.
Paper-C (Practicals)
Immunological and Animal Tissue Techniques
Time: 3 hrs. Periods- 6
Marks : 60
Cytological preparations :
-Fixation, dehydration and staining.
-Squash in stain.
-Embedding and sectioning.
Measurements with the help of light microscope :
-Calibration of ocular micrometer.
-Finding out average cell size.
-Choromosome length.
Methods for cells lysis: rupture Osmotic/Chemical/Enzymatic lysis,
of cell followed by centrifugation. Monitoring cells lysis by release
of cellular material and by change in light scattering etc.
Preparation of Hanks Balanced salt solution
Preparation minimal essential growth medium
Isolation of lymphocytes for culturing
Isolation of rat macrophages from peritoneum for culturing
Primary lymphoid culture
Isolation of monouclear cells from spleen and their culture
Separation of the constituent molecules of the extract in aqueous
buffer :
-Gel filteration.
-Ion exchange chromatography.
Immunological Methods
Cell counting methods :
-The haemaocytometer and other aides.
Separation of cell types (from blood)
Purification of Antibodies.
Hemaglutination assay
Raising polyclonal antibodies.
Conjugation and labelling of antibodies.
Enzyme-linked immunoassay .
Radial immunodiffusion analysis.
Separation of serum from the blood.
Books Recommended:
1. Birch, J.R., Lennox, E.S., (1995), Monoclonal Antibodies:
Principles and Applications, John Willey & Sons Inc., New
York.
2. Celis, J.E., (1998), Cell Biology: A laboratory handbook
Vol-I to IV, Academic Press, U.K.
3. Maniatis, T.,E.F. Fritch, and J.Sambrook, 1982, Molecular
cloning: A laboratory manual, Ist edition, Cold Spring
Harbour Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbour, New York.
4. Stevens, C,D., (1996), Clinical Immunology and Serology: A
laboratory perspective, F.A. Devis Company, Philadelphia.
Biotechnology (Vocational) -Part -II

Marks : 20
On Job Training
This should be taken up during summer over a period of one month
preferably in an immunology/veterinary/virology Institute or a
laboratory using recombinant DNA methods.
Scheme of B.Sc. Human Genetics

Part-II
Fundamentals of Human Growth, 75 - 75 60
Physique and Body Composition
Human Evolution and Population 75 - 75 60
Genetics
Fundamentals of Human Growth, - 50 50 50
Physique and Body Composition
(Practical)
Total 150 50 200
B.Sc. Human Genetics

Paper-I
Fundamentals of Human Growth, Physique and Body
Composition
Total Hours : 60
Unit-I
Definition and scope of growth and development, Periods of
growth, Laws of growth, Methods of studying growth, growth curves,
Assessment of physical growth, Developmental milestones,
Behavioral and cognitive development, Factors affecting growth
and development.
Unit-II
Human foetal growth, Adolescent growth spurt, Precocious
puberty, Delayed puberty, Sex differences in rate of growth, Ageing
and morphological changes with age.
Unit-III
Definition and approach to the study of human physique and
body composition, Body composition changes with growth,
Dysplasia, Gynandromorphy.
Unit-IV
Disorders of growth like short stature, gigantism, and
chromosomal disorders. Obesity and growth patterns in chronic
diseases. Measures of maturity i.e. skeletal maturity, dental maturity,
sexual maturity, morphological maturity.
Books Recommended :
Ghai, O.P., Gupta, P. and Paul, V.K. (2005). Essential
Pediatrics. CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi.
McArdle, W.D., Katch, F.I. and Katch, V.L. (2006).
Essentials of Exercise Physiology, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins,
Baltimore.
Singh, I.P. and Bhasin, M.K. (1998). Anthropometry. Kamla-

Raj Enterprises, New Delhi.
Singh, S.P. and Malhotra, P. (1989) Kinanthropometry. Lunar
Publications, Patiala.
Ulijaszek S.J., Johnston and Preece, M.A. (1998). Human
Growth and Development: The Cambridge Encyclopedia.
Cambridge University Press.
Wiener, J.S. and Lourie, J.A. (1981) Practical Human
Biology. Academic Press, London.
B.Sc. Human Genetics

Paper-II
Human Evolution and Population Genetics
Total Hours : 60
Unit-I
Introduction and application of population genetics. Frequency
of genes and genotypes; Hardy-Weinberg Law. Application of
Hardy-Weinberg law for autosomal genes (one locus and two alleles
and one locus multiple alleles) and sex-linked loci (co-dominant sex-
linked alleles and dominant and recessive sex-linked alleles).
Unit-II
Systematic changes of gene frequency, Mutation (recurrent
and non-recurrent), Kinetics of mutation pressure, Estimation of
mutation rates. Selection, change of gene frequency against recessive
and dominant genes. Genetic load and selection coefficient. Balance
between mutation and selection. Kinetics of migration and genetic
drift.
Unit-III
Biological effects of mating systems, consanguineous mating.
Calculation of inbreeding coefficient of an individual and population.
Inbreeding and genetic load. Sampling, Effective population size.
Founder effect, Migration and population diversity.
Unit-IV
Modern synthetic theory and the neutral theory of molecular
evolution and its conflict. Stages of human evolution like
Australopithecine stage, Pithecanthropine stage, Neanderthal and
Moden stage. Characteristics of Modern man. Classification and
significant characteristics of living primates.
Books Recommended :
Brace, C.L. (1990). The Stages of Human Evolution. Prentice
Hall, New Jersey.
Cavelli-Sforza, L.L. and Bodmer, W.F. (1970). The Genetics

of Human Population. W.H. Freeman and Co., San Francisco.
Hartl, D.L. and Clark, A.G. (1997). Principles of Population
Genetics, Sinaur Associates, Inc. Massachusetts.
Hedrick, P.W. (2000). Genetics of Population. Jones and
Bartlett Publishers, Massachusetts.
Strickberger, M.W. (2000). Evolution. Jones and Bartlett
Publication, USA.
Vogel, F. and Motulsky, A.G. (1997). Human Genetics:
Problems and Approaches. Springer-Verlag, Berlin. 3rd ed.
Fundamentals of Human Growth, Physique

and Body Composition (Practical)
Definition and location of various landmarks on body,

technique of various anthropometric measurements, Growth curves
direction of growth curve assessment of growth status and growth
rate. Somatotyping by Sheldon's, Heath and Carter's method,
Anthropometric determination of body composition by various
predication equations (i.e. body density, percent body fat and lean
body mass).
MATHEMATICS
Paper-I
Calculus-II
Note : 1. Questions paper will be consist of two sections. Each
section will consist of five questions set from
corresponding section of the syllabus.
2. The students will attempt five questions in all selecting
at least two questions from each Section.
3. Teaching time for Mathematics would be five periods
per week for each paper.
Section-A
Definition of a sequence. Theorems on limits of sequences.
Bounded and monotonic sequences. Cauchy's convergence
criterion. Series of non-negative terms. Comparison tests. Cauchy's
integral tests. Ratio tests. Cauchy's root test. Raabe's test logarithmic
test. De'morgan's and Bertrand's tests. Kummer's test, Cauchy
Condensation test, Gauss test, alternative series. Leibnitz's test.
absolute and conditional convergence.
Section-B
Limit and Continuity of functions of two variables. Partial
differentiation. Change of variables. Partial derivation and
differentiability of real-valued functions of two variables. Schwartz's
and Young's theorem. Statements of Inverse and implicit function
theorems and applications.
Euler's theorem on homogeneous functions. Taylor's theorem
for functions of two variables. Jacobins.
Envelopes. Evolutes. Maxima, Minima and saddle points of
functions of two variables. Lagrange's undetermined multiplier
method.
Books Recommended :
1. Narayan, S.: A Course of Mathematical Analysis, Sultan
Chand & Sons, New Delhi (2000).
2. Narayan S.: Differential Calculus, Sultan Chand & Sons.
New Delhi (2005).
3. Malik, S.C.: Mathematical Analysis, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
(1991).
MATHEMATICS
Paper-II
Integral Calculus
Note : 1. Questions paper will be consist of two sections. Each
Section-A
Partitions, Upper and lower sums. Upper and lower integrals,
Riemann integrability. Conditions of existence of Riemann
integrability of continuous functions and of monotone functions.
Algebra of integrable functions. Inequalities involving integrals.
Improper integrals and statements of their conditions of existence.
Test of the convergence of improper integral. Standard improper
integrals of the first and second kinds. Beta and Gamma functions.
Section-B
Double and Triple Integrals, Change of Variables. Applications
to evaluation of areas, Volume, Centre of gravity, and moments of
inertia etc. Change of order of integration in double integrals.
Books Recommended :
1. Malik, S.C.: Mathematical Analysis, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
(1991).
2. Apostal, T.M. : Mathematical Analysis, Addison Wesley
Series in Mathematics (1974).
3. Narayan, S. : Integral Calculus, Sultan Chand & Sons.
4. Kreyszig, E. : Advanced Engineering Mathematics.
5. Shanti Narayan. : Course of Mathematics Analysis, Sultan
and Company, (2008).
MATHEMATICS
Paper-III
Vector Calculus and Solid Geometry
Note : 1. Questions paper will consist of two sections. Each
Section-A
Vector differentiation, Gradient, divergence and curl operators,
line integrals, Vector identity, Vector integration, Theorems of Gauss,
Green, Stokes and problems based on these.
Intersection of three planes : Condition for three planes to
intersect in a point or along a line or to form a prism. Change of
axes, Shift of origin, rotation of axes. Equation of surface of
revolution obtained by rotating the curve.
f(x,y)=0 about the Z-axis in the form of f(x2+y2, z)=0
Equation of ellipsoid, hyperboloid and paraboloid in standard
forms. Surfaces (represented by general equation of 2nd degree
S=0. Tangent lines tangent planes. Normal plane.
Section-B
Sphere, Section of a sphere by a plane, spheres of a given
circle. Intersection of a line and a sphere. Tangent line, tangent
plane, power of a point w.r.to a shpere, radical planes. Cylinder as
surface generated by a line moving parallel to a fixed line and through
fixed curve. Different kinds of cylinders such as right circular, elliptic,
hyperbolic and parabolic in standard forms, Cone with a vertex at
the origin as the graph of homogeneous equation of second degree

in x,y,z. cone as a surface generated by a line passing through a
fixed curve and fixed point outside the plane of the curve, right
circular and elliptic cones.
Books Recommended :
1. Narayan, S. : Analytical Solid Geometry, Sultan Chand &
Sons (2005).
2. Kreyszig, E. : Advanced Engineering Mathematics.
3. Thomos, G.B. and Finney, R.L. : Calculus and Analytic
Geometry.
4. Spiegal M.R. : Integration to Vector Calculus and Tensor.
STATISTICS
Paper A
Probability-II
Note : 1. The candidates are allowed to use Non-
Programmable calculators.
2. Question paper will consist of two sections. Each
3. The student will attempt five questions in all
selecting at least two questions from each section.
4. Teaching time for Satistics would be five periods
Note : The paper setters may be asked to send solutions for
the questions set in the question paper.
Section-A
Two dimensional random variables, their joint probability mass
function and joint probability density function, marginal and conditional
probability distributions, independent random variables, functions of
two random variables, distribution of addition, subtraction Product
and quotient of two independent random variables.
Expected value of real valued function of a two-dimentional
random vector and properties of the expected value. Chebyshev's
inequality and its applications.
The covariance, the correlation coefficient, conditional
expectation and regression of the means.
The Multinomial distribution, its expected value and variance.
The bivariate normal distribution, the marginal and conditional
probability distributions associated with the bivariate normal
distribution.
Section B
Moment generating function of the sum of finite number of
independent random variables. Reproductive properties of the
Binomial, Poisson, Normal, and Gamma Distribution. Sequence of
random variables, the correspondence between the limiting moment
generating function of a sequence of random variables and the
limiting cumulative distribution function.
The law of large numbers, Bernoulli's form of the law of
large numbers, the difference between convergence in probability
and the ordinary convergence of calculus, normal approximation to
the Binomial distribution, the central limit theorem for independent
identically distributed random variables and the outline of its proof
using moment generating function. Applications of central limit
theorem.
Books Recommended
Meyer, P.L. Introductory Probability and Statistical Applications,
Addison—Wesley, (1970). Chapters : 6 (Excluding 6.6), 7
(7.3.,7.6, 7.8, 7.9, 7.10, 7.11 only). 8 (8.8 only), 9 (9.10 only)
10 (10.5, 10.6 only), 12 (excluding 12.5).
Books Suggested for Supplementary Reading
Biswal, P.C. Probability and Statistics, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
Ross, S. A First Course in Probability, Pearson Education, 2007.
Miller, I and Miller, M. Mathematical Statistics with Applications,
Seventh Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
STATISTICS
Paper B
Estimation and Testing Hypothesis
2. Question paper may consist of two sections. Each
3. The student will attempt five question in all
Section-A
Point estimation, estimator and estimates, criteria for good
estimators- unbiasedness, consistency, efficiency and sufficiency
(only the definitions and examples), Minimum variance unbiased
estimator, Rao Blackwell Theorem, Scheffe's lemma Crammer, Rao
Inequality (only statements and their applications). Methods of
estimation: moments and maximum likelihood method of estimation,
interval estimation and interval estimate of the mean of a normal
distribution.
Neyman and Pearson's theory of testing hypothesis, the
concepts of statistical hypothesis, two types of errors, critical region,
significance level, power and power function. Most powerful test,
The Neyman Pearson theorem (only the statement) and its
applications for testing a simple hypothesis against a simple
alternative.
Sampling distributions; Chi-square, t and F distributions;

sampling distribution of the mean of a set of independent random
observations from a normal population, sampling distribution of the
sample variance of independent random observations from a normal
population (derivation of sample variance distribution is excluded).
Expectation and variance of sampling mean and variance.
Section-B
Tests for the independence of two attributes, tests, about the
mean and variance of a univariate normal distribution, comparison
of two univariate normal distributions through their means and
variances. Testing the significance of the correlation coefficient.
Approximate tests for proportions and for Poisson
Parameters, Z-transformation of the sample correlation, tests
regarding the population correlation coefficient based on the Z-
transformation and confidence limits for the coefficient based on it.
Chi-square tests for goodness of fit, for homogeneity and for
independence of attributes, Simplified formula for Chi-square for
testing homogeneity and for independence in 2x2 tables and kxb
contingency tables. Yates correction for continuity in 2x2 tables.
Book Recommended :
Goon. A.M. Gupta. M.K. and Dasgupta B., Fundamentals of
Statistics, Vol.I, World Press, 2005.
Books Suggested for Supplementary Reading :
Hogg. R.V. and Mckean, J.W. and Craig. A.T., Introduction to
Mathematical Statistics, Pearson Education, 2007.
Miller, I and Miller, M. Mathematical Statistics with Applications,
Pearson Education, 2007.
APPLIED STATISTICS
Note :
1. This Course shall not be opted for alongwith courses in
B.A./B.Sc. Mathematics and for B.A./B.Sc. Statistics.
2. The candidate opting for this course will not be eligible for
admission to M.A/M.Sc. Statistics.
3. There are two papers code named, papers A and B in the
subject of Applied Statistics in B.A./B.Sc. each of one credit
and having a total of 100 marks. These are to be taught
simultaneously throughout the year.
Paper - A
Mathematical Methods-II
3. The student will attempt five question in all
Section-A
Coordinate Geometry of 3 dimensions : Cartesian, Cylinderical
Spherical Coordinates, equations of line, plane, sphere, cone and
cylinder.
Matrices and Linear Algebra : Determinants, algebra of matrices
rank of a matrix, inverse of a matrix, symmetric skew symmetric,
hermitian and skew hermitian matrices (up to 4x4 matrices only),

Eigen value, Eigen vector, Caley Hamilton Theorem, Quadratic
form.
Section-B
Matrices and Linear Algebra : Systems of Linear equations and
their solutions. Calculus of several variables : Functions of two
variables, Partial derivatives, and double integrals, triple integral.
Applications to evaluation of area and volume.
Books Prescribed
Bindra, J.S. & Gill, K.S., Applied Mathematics, S.K. Katria & Sons.
2003.
Grewal, B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers,
2007.
Books Suggested for Supplementary Reading
Babu, A.C. Seshan, C.R., New Engineering Mathematics, Narosa
Publishers, 2006.
Strauss, M.J. Bradley, G.L. and Smith K.J., Calculus, third Edition,
Pearson Education, 2007
APPLIED STATISTICS
Paper B
Statistical Methods
3. The student will attempt five questions in all
4. Teaching time for statistics would be five periods
Section-A
Scope and limitation of statistics, collection, classificaiton,
tabulation and diagrammatic representation of statistical data,
Concepts of statistical population random sample and frequency
curve. Central tendency, measures of central tendency, dispersion,
measures of dispersion, skewness and kurtosis and their
meaures.Two dimensional random variable, joint probability
distribution, marginal and conditional probability distributions,
conditional expectation, covariance and correlation coefficient.
Section-B
Measures of association and contingency, Bivariate data,
scatter diagram, covariance, correlation coefficient and its properties,
and line of regression involving two variables only. Bivariate normal
distribution, marginal and conditional distributions.
Statement of weak law of large numbers and central limit
theorem for independent and identical random variable and its
application.
Sampling distributions, expectation and variance of mean, Chi-

square, t and F in sampling from normal populations (without proof).
Book Recommended
Goon, A.M., Gupta M.K., and Das Gupta, B., Fundamentals of
Statistics, Vol.I, World Press, 2005.
Books Suggested for Supplementry Reading :
Goon, A.M. Gupta, M.K. and Das Gupta B. Basic Statistics, World
Press, 2005.
Gupta,S.C. Statistical Methods. Himalayan Publishing House, 2003.
Gupta, S.C. and Kapoor, V.K. Fundamentals of Mathematical
Statistics, Sultan Chand and Company, 2007.
PHYSICS
Note :
1. There will be three papers of theory and one laboratory
(practical) course.
2. The number of lectures per week will be three for each
theory paper.
3. The number of lectures per week will be six for practical.
4. The examination time for each theory paper will be three
hours.
5. The examination time for practical will be four hours.
6. The use of nonprogrammable calculator will be allowed in
the examination centre but these will not be provided by the
university/college.
Paper A : Statistical Physics 50 marks Total teaching hours 60
and Thermodynamics
Paper B : Optics and Lasers 50 marks Total teaching hours 60
Paper C : Quantum Physics 50 marks Total teaching hours 60
Physics Practicals 50 marks Total teaching hours 90
Each theory paper will consist of Five Units.
Unit-I
There will be two questions from this unit. Each question will
carry 10 marks. Only one question is to be attempted.
Unit-II
Unit-III
Unit-IV
Unit-V
There will be Eight parts (each carrying 2 marks) of small
answer type covering the syllabi of all these four units (units I-IV)
out of these five parts are to be attempted.
PHYSICS
Paper A
Statistical Physics and Thermodynamics
Max. Marks : 50 Total Teaching Hours : 60
Pass Marks : 35% Time Allowed : 3 hours
The Paper will consist of Five Units :
Unit-I There will be two questions from this unit. Each question
will carry ten marks. Only one question is to be attempted.
Unit-II There will be two questions from this unit. Each question
Unit-III There will be two question from this unit. Each question
Unit-IV There will be two questions from this unit. Each question
Unit-V There will be Eight questions from small answer type
covering the syllabi of all the four units (I-IV). Five
questions are to be attempted. Each question will carry
two marks.
Unit-I
Basic ideas of statistical physics. Scope of statistical physics,
Basic ideas about probability, distribution of four distinguishable
particles in two compartment of equal size. Concept of macro states,
microstates, thermodynamic probability. Effects of constraints on
the system. Distribution of n particles in two compartments.
Deviation from the state of maximum probability, equilibrium state
of dynamic system. Distribution of distinguishable n particles in k
compartments of unequal sizes.
Unit-II
Phase space and its division into elementary cells. Three kinds
of statistics. The basic approach in the three statistics. Maxwell
Boltzman (MB) statistics applied to an ideal gas in equilibrium.

Experimental verification of Maxwell Boltzman law of distribution
of molecular speeds. Need for quantum statistics-Bose-Einstein
(B.E.) statistics. Derivation of Planck's law of radiation. Deduction
of Wien displacement law and Stefan's law from Planck's law,
Fermi-Dirac (E.D.) statistics, Comparison of M.B., B.E. and F.D.
statistics.
Unit-III
Statistical definition of entropy, Change of entropy of a
system, Additive nature of entropy, Law of increase of entropy.
Reversible and irreversible process and their examples. Work done
in a reversible process, Examples of increase of entropy in natural
processes, Entropy and disorder. Brief review of terms and laws of
thermodynamics. Carnot's cycle, Entropy changes in Carnot cycle.
Applications of thermodynamics to thermoelectric effect. Change
of entropy along a reversible path in a P.V. diagram. Entropy of a
perfect gas. Equation of state of an ideal gas from simple statistical
consideration, Heat death of the universe.
Unit-IV
Derivation of Maxwell's thermo dynamical relations, Cooling
produced by adiabatic stretching. Adiabatic compression, Change
of internal energy with volume, specific heat and constant pressure
and constant volume, Expression for Cr-Cy. Change of state and
Claypron equation. Thermo dynamical treatment of Joule-Thomson
effect. Use of Joule-Thomson effect, liquefaction of helium.
Production very low temperature by adiabatic demagnetization.
Text Reference Books

1. Statistical Physics and Thermodynamic, V.S. Bhatia (Sohan
Lal Nagin Chand, Jalandhar.
2. A Treatise on Heat, M.N. Saha & B.N. Srivastava (The

Indian Press Pvt. Ltd., Allahabad), 1965.
3. Statistical Mechanics : An Introductory Text, Bhattacharjee,
J.K., (Allied Pub., Delhi), 2000.
4. Statistical Physics, Bhattacharjee, J.K., (Allied Pub., Delhi)
2000.
5. Statistical Mechanics, B.B. Laud, (Macmillan India Ltd.)
1981.
PHYSICS
Paper B
Optics and Lasers
Maximum Marks : 50 Total Teaching Hours : 60
The Paper will consist of Five Units :
Unit-II There will be two question from this unit. Each question
Unit-IV There will be two question from this unit. Each question
Unit-V There will be Eight questions of small answer type
covering the syllabi of all the four units(I-IV). Five
two marks.
Unit-I
Interference : Concept of coherence, Spatial and temporal
coherence, Coherence time, Coherence length, Area of coherence.
Conditions for observing interference fringes. Interfere length by
wave front division and amplitude division. Michelson's
interferometer—working, Principle and nature of fringes.
Interference in thin films. Role of interference in anti-reflection
and high-reflection dielectric coatings, Multiple beam interference,
Fabry-Perot interferometer. Nature of fringes.
Unit-II
Diffraction : Huygens-Fresnel theory, half-period zones, Zone
plates. Distinction between Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction.
Fraunhofer diffraction at rectangular and circular apartures. Effects

of diffraction in optical imaging, resolving power of telescope. The
diffraction grating, its use as a spectroscopic element and its resolving
power, Polarization : Concept and analytical treatment of un-
polarized, plane polarized and eliptically polarized light. Double
refraction, Nicol prism, Sheet polarizer, Retardation plates.
Production and analysis of polarized light (quarter and half wave
plates).
Unit-III
Laser Fundamentals : Derivation of Einstein's relations.
Concept of simulated emission and population inversion, Broadening
of spectral lines, natural, collision, and Doppler broadening Line
width, Line profile. Absorption and amplification of a parallel beam
of light passing through a medium. Threshold condition, three level
and four level laser schemes, elementary theory of optical cavity,
Longitudinal and transverse modes.
Unit-IV
Laser systems : types of lasers, Ruby and Nd:Yag lasers
He-Ne and CO lasers construction mode of creating population
inversion and output characteristics. Semiconductor lasers, Dye
lasers, Q-switching, Mode locking, Applications of lasers—a general
outline, Basics of holography.
Text and Reference Books

1. Fundamentals of Optics, F.A. Jenkins and Harvey E. White,
(McGraw Hill) 4th edition, 2001.
2. Optics, Ajoy Ghatak, (McMillan India) 2nd edition, 7th reprint,
1997.
3. Introduction to Atomic Spectra, H.E. White (McGraw Hill,
Book Co., inc., New York).
4. Laser Fundamentals, W.T. Silfvast (Foundation Books), New

Delhi, 1996.
5. Lasers and Non-linear Optics, B.B. Laud (New Age Pub.)
2002.
6. Optics, Born and Wolf, (Pergamon Press) 3rd edition, 1965.
7. Lasers, Svelto, (Plenum Press), 3rd Ed., New York.
PHYSICS
Paper C
Quantum Physics
Maximum Marks : 50 Total Teaching Hours : 60
The Paper will consist of Five Units:
Unit-II There will be two question from this unit. Each question
Unit-IV There will be two question from this unit. Each question
Unit-V There will be Eight questions of small answer type
covering the syllabi of all the four units (I-IV). Five
two marks.
Unit-I
Formalism of Wave Mechanics : Brief introduction to
need and development of quantum mechanics, Wave-particle duality,
de-Broglie hypothesis. Complimentarity and uncertainty principle,
Gaussian wave packet, Schrodinger equation for a free particle.
Operator correspondence and equation for a particle subject to
forces. Normalization and probability interpretation of wave
function. Superposition principle, Expectation value, Probability
current and conservation of probability. Admissibility conditions on
the wave function. Ehrenfest theorem, Fundamental postulates of
wave mechanics. Eigen functions and eigen values. Operator
formalism, Orthogonal systems, Expansion in eigen functions.
Hermitian operators. Simultaneous eigen functions, Equation of
motion.
Unit-II
Problems in one and three dimensions : Time dependent
Schrodinger equation. Application to stationary states for one
dimension. Potential sep. Potential barrier, Rectangular potential
well. Degeneracy, Orthogonality, Linear harmonic oscillator.
Schrodinger equation for spherically symmetric potential, Spherical
harmonics, Hydrogen atom energy levels and eigen functions,
Degeneracy, Angular momentum.
Unit-III
One Electron Atomic Spectra : Interaction of atom with
radiation, Transition probability, Spontaneous transition. Selection
rules and life times. Spectrum of hydrogen atom. Line structure,
Normal Zeeman effect, Electron spin, Stern Gerlach experiment,
Spin orbit coupling (election magnetic moment, total angular
momentum). Hyperfine structure, Examples of one electron systems,
Anomalous Zeeman effect Lande-g factor (sodium D-lines).
Unit-IV
Many Electron System Spectra : Exchange symmetry of
wave functions, exclusion principle, Shells, Sub shells in atoms, atomic
spectra (Helium). L.S. coupling, Selection rules, Regularities in
atomic spectra, Interaction energy ideas X-ray spectra. Mosley
law, Absorption spectra, Auger effect, Molecular bonding, Molecular
spectra, Selection rules, Symmetric structures. Rotational, vibrational
electronic level and spectra of molecules, Magnetic resonance
experiments. Raman spectra, Introduction to Raman spectra.
Text and Reference Books
1. A Text Book of Quantum Mechanics, P.M. Mathews and
K. Venkatesan, (Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co., Delhi) 2002.
2. Quantum Mechanics, J.L. Powell and B. Crasemann (Narosa
Pub. House, N. Delhi) 1997.
3. Concepts of Modern Physics, Arthur Beiser (McGraw Hill
Pub. Co., Delhi, 9th Ed.), 1995.
4. Elements of Modern Physics, S.H. Patil (McGraw Hill), 1998.

5. Quantum Mechanics, E. Merzbacher (John Wiley, 2nd Ed.).
6. Fundamental of Molecular Spectroscopy, C.N. Banwell (Tata
McGraw Hill Pub. Co., Delhi), 2001.
7. Atomic Spectra, H.G. Kuhn (Longmans), 2nd Ed., 1969.
8. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, L. Pauling and E.B.
Wilson (Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co., Delhi), 2002.
9. Quantum Mechanics, W. Greiner (Springer Verlag), 1994.
PHYSICS
Practical
Total Teaching Hours : 90 Hrs. Maximum Marks : 50
Pass Marks : 35% Time Allowed : 4 Hours
Guidelines for Physics Practical examination
1. The distribution of marks is as follows :
(i) One full experiment out of Unit-I equiring 20 marks
the students to take some data, analyse
it and draw conclusions. (Candidates
are expected to state their results with
limits of error.
(ii) Brief theory 05 marks
(iii) One exercise based on experiment or 10 marks
computer programming (to be allotted
by the external examiner at the time of
examination)
(iv) Viva-voce 10 marks
(v) Record (Practical file) 05 marks
2. The examiner should take care that the experiment allotted
to an examinee from Unit-I and exercise allotted from
Unit-II are not directly related to each other.
3. Number of candidates in a group for practical examination
should not exceed 12.
4. In a single group, no experiment be allotted to more than
three examinees.
List of Experiments
I. Statistical Physics and thermodynamics
Activities
(i) Adiabatic expansion of a gas.
(ii) Thermal expansion of crystal using interference fringes.

(iii) Thermal conduction in poor conductor (variation with
geometry) by Lee's method.
(iv) Thermo e.m.f. calibration comparison.
(v) Total steafan radiation law, temperature dependence of
radiation.
(vi) Probability distribution using coloured dice and coins.
II. Optics and Lasers
Activities
(vii) To determine the refractive index of liquid using
spectrometer.
(viii) To determine the Caushy's constants.
(ix) To study the referactive index of a doubly referacting prism.
(x) Study the rotation of plane of polarization with a polarimeter.
(xi) Set up Newton's rings to determine wavelength of a given
light using biprism.
(xiii) To determine the wavelength and dispersive power using
plane diffraction grating (use Hg source).
(xiv) To determine the resolving power of a telescope.
(xv) To determine the resolving power of a grating.
(xvi) To measure an inaccessible height using sextant.
(xvii) To determine the principal points of a lense system.
(xviii) To determine the divergence and wavelength of a given
laser source.
III. Quantum Physics
Activities
(xix) Study the Photoelectric effect and determine the value of
Plank's constant.
(xx) To study the gas discharge spectrum of hydrogen.
(xxi) To study the absorption spectra of iodine vapours.
(xxii) To determine the ionization potential of mercury.
Exercises: Any exercise based on above given experiments.

OR
(i) To measure the angle of rotation of plane of plarization for
the given liquid.
(ii) To measure the diameterof Newton's rings.
(iii) To determine the least count and setup the spectrometer
for minimum deviation position of prism.
(iv) Study of variation of light intensity using photovoltiac cell/
inverse square law.
(v) To measure the thermo e.m.f.
(vi) To determine the heating efficiency of an electric kettle
with varying voltages.
(vii) To determine the angle of wedge using interference method.
(viii) To measure the angle of elevation of a tall building.
OR
Computer Based Exercises:
(i) Calculations of days between two dates of a year.
(ii) To check if triangle exists and the type of the triangle.
(iii) To find the sum of the sine and cosine series and print out
the curve.
(iv) To solve simultaneous equations by elimination method.
(v) Fitting a straight line or a simple curve of a given data.
(vi) Convert a given integer into binary and octal systems and
vice versa.
(vii) Inverse a matrix.
(viii) Spiral array.
GEOGRAPHY
Paper A
Geophysics-I
Paper will consist of Five Units :
Unit-I There will be two questions from this unit. Each
question will carry 14 marks. Only one question is
to be attemped.
Unit-II There will be two questions from this unit. Each
to be attemped.
Unit-III There will be two questions from this unit. Each
to be attemped.
Unit-IV There will be two questions from this unit. Each
to be attemped.
Unit-V There will be 10 questions of small answer type
covering the syllabi of all the four unit (1-4). Seven
questions are to be attempted. Each question will
carry two marks.
Unit—I
Disaster-Meaning, Factors, Types, Causes and effects.
Disaster scenario in the World and India, Typology of Disasters—
Earthquakes, Floods, Cyclones, Droghts, Famines, Landslides and
snow avalanche, Fire and forest fires, Industrial and technical
disasters, Epidemics. (Lectures 15)
Unit—II
Disaster Preparedness—Planning, Communication,
Leadership and Co-ordination, Warehousing and stock piling,
Disaster management and awareness—Human behaviour and

response, Community participation and awareness, Public awareness
programmes, Role of various agencies—District administration,
Military and Para military, Ministries and Departments at centre
and state level, NGOs, International agencies, Media.
(Lectures 15)
Unit—III
Preparedness and Mitigation—Disaster mapping,
Predictability, Forecasting and warning, Disaster preparedness plan,
land use zoning for disaster management, Preparing community
through Information, Education and Communication (IEC),
Mitigation. Relief Measures—Search, Rescue, Evacuation, Shelter
for victim, Clearness of debris and disposal of dead, Control of
fires, Damage assessment. (Lectures 15)
Unit—IV
Community Health and Casualty Management—Community
health during disasters, Emergency health operations, Drinking water,
Food and nutrition, Hygiene and sanitation, Reconstruction and
rehabilitation—Social and economic aspect, Housing, Agriculture
and irrigation. (Lectures 15)
Text and Reference Books :
1. Carter, W. Nick, 1992, Disaster Management : A Disaster
Managers Handbook, Asian Development Bank, Manila.
2. Mishra, Girish K. and G.C. Mathur (Eds.), 1995, Natural
Disaster Reduction, Reliance Publishing House, New Delhi.
3. Parkash, Indu, 1995, Disaster Management, Rashtra Prahari
Prakashan, Ghaziabad.
4. Tuner Barry A. and Nick, F. Pidgeon, 1977, Manmade
Disaster, Butter Worth-Heineman: Oxford.
5. Ross, Simon, 1987, Hazard Geography : Logman, U.K.
6. Ashutosh Gautam, 1994, Earthquake—A Natural Disaster:
Ashish Publishing House, New Delhi.
7. Sharma Vinod K. 1994, Disaster Management: Indian

Institute of Public Administration, New Delhi.
8. Mandal, GS, 1993, "Natural Disaster Reduction". Reliance
Publishing House, New Delhi.
9. Pisharoty, PR, 1993, Tropical Cyclone, Bhartiya Vidya
Bhawan, Mumbai.
10. Smith Keith, 1996, Environmental Hazards, Assessing risk
and redcuing disaster: Routeledge, London.
11. Indu Prakash, 1994, Disaster Management: Rashtra Prahari
Prakashan, Ghaziabad.
12. Kumar, Jayant, 1995, Community based disaster
management—A case study from coastal Andhra Pradesh
(Monograph).
13. Sharma, S.C., 1987: Media Communication and
Development, Rawat Publication, Jaipur.
14. The Institution of Civil Engineers, 1995, Mega cities:
Reducing vulnerability to natural disaster, Thomas Telford,
London.
GEOGRAPHY
Paper B
Geophysics-II
Paper will consist of Five Units
Unit-I There will be two questions from this unit. Each
to be attemped.
Unit-II There will be two questions from this unit. Each
to be attemped.
Unit-III There will be two questions from this unit. Each
to be attemped.
Unit-IV There will be two questions from this unit. Each
to be attemped.
Unit-V There will be 10 questions of small answer type
covering the syllabi of all the four unit (1-4) Seven
questions are to be attempted. Each question will
carry two marks.
Unit-I
Seismic waves, type and propagation inside the earth, the
variation of the velocity of P and S waves inside the earth. The
study of the interior of the earth through seismic waves, Reflection
and refraction of seismic waves inside the earth.
(Lecutres 15)
Unit—II
Earthquake, effects of earthquakes, types of earthquake—
tectonic, volcanic and man made, some important historical
earthquakes, mechanism, Elastic rebound theory, Microseismicity.

Magnitude and intensity scale.
(Lectures 15)
Unit—III
Focal parameter, Epicenter, Hypocenter, Origin time and their
determination by different methods, Global distribution of
earthquakes, Foreshock—Aftershock and their significance, Energy
release during earthquake, Microseism.
(Lecutres 15)
Unit—IV
Seismograph, Principle of mechanical and electromagnetic
type, Vertical and horizontal component seismometer, Ground motion
response curves displacements meter, Velocity meter and
Accelerometer, Concept of short period (SP), long period (LP) and
broad band (BB) recoding, Arrays and networks of seismic stations,
Travel time-table and curves.
(Lecutres 15)
Text and Reference Books :
1. Introduction to Seismology—M. Bath.
2. Elementary Seismology—Richer
3. Method of Geophysics—P.V. Sharma
4. Applied Geophysics—W.M. Telford, Geldart, Sherief, Keys
GEOGRAPHY
Paper C
Lab Practical and Field Training
1. Lab Practicals related with the theory 50 Marks
2. Field Training 50 Marks
CHEMISTRY
Paper Course Teaching Hrs.
I Inorganic Chemistry 60 9 periods
II Organic Chemistry 60 per week
III Physical Chemistry 60
IV Laboratory Practical 6 periods per week
Total = 15 periods/week
(Common instructions for three papers)
Note : The question paper shall consist of three parts, as
detailed below :
Part-A
It shall consist of 10 very short answer type questions
(Q.Nos. 1 to 10) from the entire syllabus and the maximum
length of each question may not exceed ¼th of a page. Minimum of
3 questions are to be set from each section of the syllabus. Each
question will be of 1 mark and the candidate may be asked to attempt
all the 10 questions. Marks Allotted : 10
Part-B
It shall consist of 15 short answer type questions (Q.Nos.
11 to 25) from the entire syllabus and the maximum length of
each question may not exceed one-half of a page. Five questions
are to be set from each section of the syllabus.Each question
will be of 3 marks and the candidate may be asked to attempt any
10 questions. Marks Allotted : 30
Part-C
It shall consist of 3 descriptive type questions (Q. Nos. 26 to
28) from the entire syllabus and the maximum length of each question
may not exceed four pages. One question is to be set from each
section of the syllabus. Each question will be of 5 marks and the
candidate may be asked to attempt any 2 questions.
Marks Allotted : 10
CHEMISTRY
Paper I
Inorganic Chemistry
Time : 3 Hrs. 60 Hrs (2 Hrs/week)
M.Marks : 50 3 Periods/week
Section-1
I. Chemistry of Elements of First Transition Series
10 Hrs.
Characteristic properties of d-block elements. Properties of
the elements of the first transition series, their simple
compounds and complexes illustrating relative stability of their
oxidation states, coordination number and geometry.
II. Chemistry of Elements of Second and Third Transition
Series 10 Hrs.
General characteristics, comparative treatment with their 3d-
analogues in respect of ionic radii, oxidation states, magnetic
behaviour, spectral properties and stereochemistry.
Section-2
III. Coordination Compounds 10 Hrs.
Werner's coordination theory and its experimental verification,
effective atomic number concept, chelates, nomenclature of
coordination compounds, isomerism in coordination
compounds, valence bond theory of transition metal
complexes.
IV. Chemistry of Lanthanide Elements 6 Hrs.
Electronic structure, oxidation states and ionic radii and
lanthanide contraction, complex formation, occurrence and
isolation, lanthanide compounds.
V. Chemistry of Actinides 4 Hrs.
General features and chemistry of actinides, chemistry of
separation of Np, Pu and Am from U, similarities between
the later actinides and the later lanthanides.
Section-3
VI. Oxidation and Reduction 8 Hrs.
Use of redox potential data-analysis of redox cycle, redox
stability in water-Frost, Latimer and Pourbaix diagrams.
Principles involved in the extraction of the elements.
VII. Acids and bases 6 Hrs.
Arrhenius, Bronsted-Lowry, the Lux-Flood, solvent system
and Lewis concepts of acids and bases.
VIII. Non-aqueous Solvents 6 Hrs.
Physical properties of a solvent, types of solvents and their
general characteristics, reactions in non-aqueous solvents
with reference to liquid NH3 and liquid SO2.
CHEMISTRY
Paper-II
Organic Chemistry-II
Time : 3 Hrs. M.Marks : 50
60 Hrs (2 Hrs/week)
3 Periods/week
Section-I
I. Alcohols 6 Hrs.
Classification and nomenclature.
Monohydric alcohols—nomenclature, methods of formation
by reduction of aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic acids and
esters. hydrogen bonding. Acidic nature. Reactions of
alcohols.
Dihydric alcohols—nomenclature, methods of formation,
chemical reactions of vicinal glycols, oxidative cleavage
[Pb(OAC) 4 and HIO 4 ] and pinacol-pinacolone
rearrangement. Trihydric alcohols—nomenclature and
methods of formation, chemical reactions of glycerol.
II. Phenols 6 Hrs.
Nomenclature, structure and bonding, Preparation of phenols,
physical properties and acidic character, Comparative acidic
strengths of alcohols and phenols, resonance stabilization of
phenoxide ion. Reactions of phenols—electrophilic aromatic
substitution, acylation and carboxylation. Mechanisms of Fries
rearrangement, Claisen rearrangement, Gatterman synthesis,
Hauben-Hoesch reaction, Lederer-Manass reaction and
Reimer Tiemann reaction.
III. Synthetic Dyes 8 Hrs.
Colour and constitution (electronic concept). Classification
of dyes. Chemistry and synthesis of Methyl orange, Congo
red, Malachite green, Crystal violet, Phenolphthalein,
Fluorescein, Alizarin and Indigo.
Section-II
IV. Aldehydes and Ketones 14 Hrs.
Nomenclature and structure of the carbonyl group. Synthesis
of aldehydes and ketones with particular reference to the
synthesis of aldehydes from acid chlorides, synthesis of
aldehydes and ketones using 1,3-dithianes, synthesis of
ketones from nitriles and from carboxylic acids. Physical
properties.
Mechanism of nucleophilic additions to carbonyl group with
particular emphasis on benzoin, aldol, Perkin and Knoevenagel
condensations. Condensation with ammonia and its
derivatives. Witting reaction. Mannich reaction.
Use of acetals as protecting group. Oxidation of aldehydes,
Baeyer-Villiger oxidation of Ketones, Cannizzaro reaction.
MPV, Clemmensen, Wolff-Kishner, LIAIH4 and NaBH4
reductions. Halogenation of enolizable ketones, reductions.
Halogenation of enoliable ketones.
An introduction to α, β unsaturated aldehydes and ketones,
Michael addition.
V. Carboxylic Acids 6 Hrs.
Nomenclature, structure and bonding, physical properties,
acidity of carboxylic acids, effects of substituents on acid
strength. Preparation of carboxylic acids. Reactions of
carboxylic acids. Hell-Volhard-Zelinsky reaction. Synthesis
of acid chlorides, esters and amides. Reduction of carboxylic
acids. Mechanism of decarboxylation.
Methods of formation and chemical reactions of halo acids.
Hydroxy acids : malic, tartaric and citric acids. (Structural
features only).
Methods of formation and chemical reactions of unsaturated
monocarboxylic acids.
Dicarboxylic acids: methods of formation and effect of heat
and dehydrating agents.
Section-III
VI. Carboxylic Acid Derivatives 3 Hrs.
Structure and nomenclature of acid chlorides, esters, amides
and acid anhydrides, Relative stability & reactivity of acyl
derivatives. Physical properties, interconversion of acid
derivatives by nucleophilic acyl substitution.
Preparation of carboxylic acid derivatives, chemical reactions.
Mechanisms of esterification and hydrolysis (acidic and basic).
VII. Ethers and Epoxides 3 Hrs.
Nomenclature of ethers and methods of their formation,
physical properties. Chemical reaction-cleavage and
autoxidation, Ziesel's method.
Synthesis of epoxides. Acid and base-catalyzed ring opening
of epoxides, orientation of apoxide ring opening, reactions of
Grignard and organolithium reagents with epoxiedes.
VIII. Fats, Oils and Detergents 2 Hrs.
Natural fats, edible and industrial oils of vegetable origin,
common fatty acids, glycerides, hydrogenation of unsaturated
oils, Saponification value, iodine value, acid value. soaps,
synthetic detergents, alkyl and aryl sulphonates.
IX. Organic Compounds of Nitrogen 12 Hrs.
Preparation of nitroalkanes and nitroarenes. Chemical
reactions of nitroalkanes, Mechanisms of nucleophilc
substitution in nitroarenes and their reduction in acidic, neutral
and alkaline media. Picric acid.
Halonitroarenes : reactivity
Structure and nomenclature of amines, physical properties.
Stereochemistry of amines. separation of a mixture of
primary, secondary and tertiary amines. Structural features
effecting basicity of amines. Amine salts as phase-transfer
catalysts. Preparation of alkyl and aryl amines (reduction of
nitro compounds nitriles), reductive amination of aldehydic
and ketonic compounds. Gabriel-phthalimide reaction,
Hofmann bromamide reaction.
CHEMISTRY
Paper-III
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
Time : 3 Hrs. M. Marks : 50
60 Hrs (2 Hrs/week)
3 Periods/week
Section-I
1. Thermodynamics-I 12 Hrs.
Definition of thermodynamic terms: System, surroundings
etc. Types of systems, intensive and extensive properties.
State and path functions and their differentials.
Thermodynamic process. Concept of heat and work.
First Law of Thermodynamics : Statement, definition of
internal energy and enthalpy. Heat capacity, heat capacities
at constant volume and pressure and their relationship. Joule's
law-Joule-Thomson coefficient and inversion temperature,
Calculation of w,q,dU & dH for the expansion of ideal gases
under isothermal and adiabatic conditions for reversible
process.
Thermochemistry : Standard state, standard enthalpy of
formation-Hess's Law of heat summation and its applications.
Heat of reaction at constant pressure and at constant volume.
Enthalpy of neutralization. Bond dissociation energy and its
calculation from thermo-chemical data, temperature
dependence of enthalpy. Kirchhoff's equation.
II. Thermodynamics-II 8 Hrs.
Second law of thermodynamics: Need for the law, different
statements of the law, Carnot cycle and its efficiency, Carnot
theorem. Thermodynamic scale of temperature.
Concept of entropy : Entropy as a state function, entropy
as a function of V & T, entropy as a function of P & T,
entropy change in physical change, Clausius inequality,
entropy as a criteria of spontaneity and equilibrium. Entropy
change in ideal gases and mixing of gases.
Section-II
III. Thermodynamics-III 5 Hrs.
Third law of thermodynamics: Nernst heat theorem,
statement and concept of residual entropy, evaluation of
absolute entropy from heat capacity data. Gibbs and
Helmholtz functions; Gibbs function (G) and Helmholtz
function (A) as thermodynamic quantities, A & G as criteria
for thermodynamic equilibrium and spontaneity, their
advantage over entropy change, Variation of G and A with
P,V and T.
IV. Chemical Equilibrium 5 Hrs.
Equilibrium constant and free energy. Thermodynamic
derivation of law of mass action. Le Chateller' principle.
Reaction isotherm and reaction isochore-Clapeyron equation
and Clausius-Clapeyron equation, applications.
V. Phase Equilibrium 10 Hrs.
Statement and meaning of the terms-phase, component and
degree of freedom, derivation of Gibbs phase rule, phase
equilibria of one component system-water, CO 2 and S
systems.
Phase equilibria of two component system-solid-liquid
equilibria, simple eutectic-Bi-Cd, Pb-Ag systems,
desilverisation of lead.
Solid solutions-compound formation with congruent melting
point (Mg-Zn) and incongruent melting point, (NaCI-H2O),
(FaCl3-H2O) and CuSO4-H2O) system. Freezing mixtures,
acetone-dry ice.
Liquid-liquid mixtures-Ideal liquid mixtures, Raoult's and
Henry's law. Non-ideal system-azeotropes-HCI-H2O and
ethanol-water systems.
Partially miscible liquids Phenol water trinse thylamin water
Nicotine water System.
Lower and upper consolute temperature. Effect of impurity

on consolute temperature immiscible liquids, steam distillation.
Nernst distribution law-thermodynamic derivation, appli-
cations.
Section-III
VI. Electrochemistry-I 10 Hrs.
Electrical transport-conduction in metals and in electrolyte
solutions, specific conductance and equivalent conductance,
measurement of equivalent conductance, variation of
equivalent and specific conductance with dilution .
Migration of ions and Kohlrausch law, Arrhenius theory of
electrolyte dissociation and its limitations, weak and strong
electrolytes, Ostwald's dilution law its uses and limitations.
Debye-Huckel-Onsager's equation for strong electrolytes
(elementary treatment only). Transport number, definition and
dermination by Hittof method and moving boundary method.
Applications of conductivity measurements: determination
of degree of dissociation, determination of Ka of acids,
determination of solubility product of a sparingly soluble salt,
conductometric titrations.
VII. Electrochemistry-II 10 Hrs.
Types of reversible electrodes-gas metal ion, metal ion, metal-
insolblue salt-anion and redox electrodes. Electrode reactions.
Nernst equation, derivation of cell E.M.F. and Single electrode
potential, standard hydrogen electrode-reference electrodes-
standard electrode potential, sign conventions, electrochemical
series and its significance.
Electrolytic and Galvanic cells-reversible and irreversible
cells, conventional representation of electrochemi cells.
EMF of a cell and its meaurements. Computation of cell
EMF. Calculation of thermodynamic quantities of cell
reactions (∆G ∆H and K), polarization, over potential and
hydrogen overvoltage.
Concentration cell with and wihout transport, liquid junction

potential, application of concentration cells, valency of ions,
solubility product and activity coefficient, potentiometric
titrations.
Definition of pH and pKa determination of pH using hydrogen,
quinhydrone and glass electrodes, by potentiometric methods.
Buffers-mechanism of buffer action, Henderson-Hazel
equation, Hydrolysis of salts.
Corrosion-types, theories and methods of combating it.
CHEMISTRY
(Practical)
M.Marks : 50
Duration 3.1/2 hrs.
6 Periods/week
Inorganic Chemistry
Quantitative Analysis
Volumetric Analysis
a. Determination of acetic acid in commercial vinegar using
NaOH.
b. Determination of alkali content-antacid tablet using HCI.
c. Estimation of calcium content in chalk as calcium oxalate by
permanganometry.
d. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA.
e. Estimation of ferrous and ferric by dichromate method.
f. Estimation of copper using sodiumthiosulphate.
Gravimetric Analysis
Analysis of Cu as CuSCN and Ni as Ni (dimethylgloxime)
Organic Chemistry
Laboratory Techniques
A. Thin Layer Chromatography
Determination of Rf values and identification of organic
compounds.
a. Separation of green leaf pigments (spinach leaves may
be used).
b. Preparation and separation of 2, 4. dinitrophenylhydra-
zones of acetone, 2-butone, 2-butanone, hexan-2and
3-one using toluene and light petroleum (40 : 60).
c. Separation of a mixture of dyes using cyclohexane and
ethyl acetate (8.5:1.5).
Qualitative Analysis
Detection of elements (N,S and halogens) and functional
groups (phenolic, carboxylic, carbonyl, esters, carbohydrates,
amines, amides, nitro and anilide) in simple organic
compounds.
Thermochemistry
1. To determine the solubility of benzoic acid at different
temperatures and to determine ∆H of the dissolution process.
2. To determine the enthalpy of neutralisation of a weak acid/
weak base versus strong base/strong acid and determine the
enthalpy of ionisation of the weak acid/weak base.
3. To determine the enthalpy of dissolution of solid calcium
chloride and calculate the lattice energy of calcium chloride
from its enthalpy data using Born Haber cycle.
Paper-A (Evening)
M.Marks : 20
Duration 3.1/2 Hrs.
1) Gravimetric/volumetric Analysis - 10
2) Organic Compound Analysis - 10
Paper-B (Morning)
M. Marks : 30
Duration 3.1/2 Hrs.
1) Physical Experiment - 10
2) Thin Layer Chromatography - 10
3) Viva Voce - 06
4) Note Book - 04
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION FOR CLINICAL NUTRITION AND DIETETICS (VOCATIONAL)
316
THEORY PRACTICALS
Papers No. of Duration Marks No.of Duration Marks Grand
Paper Total
1. Paper-A 1 3 Hrs. 50 - - 10 Int. 60
Basic Dietetics and Assess
Food Commodities
2. Paper-B 1 3 Hrs. 50 1 3 Hrs. 40 90
Sanitation & Hygiene
& Quantity food
Production and service
3. Paper-C
Book Keeping Cost-
Accountancy and
B.A./B.Sc Part-II (12+3 System of Education)
Personnel Management 1 3 Hours 50 - - - 50

Total 200
SCHEME OF STUDIES FOR CLINICAL

NUTRITION AND DIETETICS (VOCATIONAL)
S.No. Subject No.of the No. of Pract.
Periods Periods
1. Paper-A
Basic Dietetics and 4 6 period/per group/per
food Commodities weeks (10 practicals of
Basic Dietetic rest for
running of cafeteria)
2. Paper-B
Sanitation and 4 6 period/per group/per
Hygiene quantity weeks
Food production
and service
3. Paper-C
Book Keeping and 3 -
cost Accountancy
and Personnel
Management
Note : For "On the Job Training" the Students are required to run
a) Cafeteria in the institutions (each student will run one
cafeteria).
b) Undergo ten days (10) training in hotels.
CLINICAL NUTRITION AND DIETETICS

(VOCATIONAL)
Paper-A
Part-I (Basic Dietetics)
Instructions for the peper setters
As per the scheme of the examination for Clinical Nutrition
and Dietetics (Vocational) in part II papers A, B and C (Theory
are of 50 marks each for this , each question paper will consist of
three sections as follows :
will be compulsory. Each question will carry I mark, total weightage
being 10 marks only.
will be 16 marks.
I. Role of Dietition in the hospital and Community.
II. Basic concepts of Diet Therapy.
III. Therapeutic Adaptation the normal diet.
IV. Routine hospital Diets. Regular diet, light diet, soft diet,
full liquid diet, and tube feedings.
V. Modifications of Diet. Surgical conditions.
VI. Feeding infants and children-problems in feeding
children in the hospital.
VII. Feeding the patient-psychology feeding the patient,
assessment of patient needs.

(Vocational)
Paper A
(Basic Dietetics) Internal Assessment
Marks : 10
I. Standardisation of common feed preparation.
II. Planning and preparation of full or normal diet.
III. Planning & preparation of soft diet.
IV. Planning and preparation of liquid diet.
V. Planning & preparation of High and low caloria diet with
modified fat carbohydrate level.
Part- II Food Commodities (Theory)
Description of the course :
It involves an understanding of the basic commodities, both
raw and processed generally used in food service institutions with
due emphasis on cost.
Objectives :
1. To understand the basic commodities both raw and processed,
used in catering and various aspects of their production and
distribution.
To discuss the qualities and standards of available commodities
and their suitability for different purposes.
I. Cereals & Pulses, Cereals and millets, breakfast cereals,
cereal products Fast foods - structure, processing, use in
variety of preparations, selection, variety storage, nutritional
aspects and cost. Pulses & Legumes-Production ( in brief)
selection and variety, storage, processing, use in variety of
preparations, nutritional aspects and cost.
II. Eggs : Production, grade, quality, selection, storage, spoilage,
uses, cost and nutritional aspects.
III. Fish, Poultry and Meat : Selection, purchase, storage,

uses, cost and nutritional aspects.
IV. Vegetables and Fruits : Variety, Selection, Purchase,
storage, availability, cost, use and nutritional aspects of raw
and processed vegetables and fruits.
V. Sugar & Sugar Products : Different forms of sugar (sugar,
jaggery, honey syrup) manufacture, selection, storage &
use, pre-serves.
VII. Fats and Oils : Types and sources of fats and oils (animal
and vegetable) processing, use, storage, cost and nutritional
aspects.
VIII. Raising agents Types, consituents, bassin cookery and
bakery, preservation methods.
IX. Food Products : Spices, condiments, herbs, extracts
concentrates, essences & food colours, origin, classi-fication,
description, uses, specifications, procurement and storage.
X. Convenience Foods : Role, types, advantages, uses, cost
and contribution to diet.
XI. Salt : Types, uses in the diet.
XII. Tea, Coffee, Chocolate and Cocoa powder Growth,
cultivation, processing, cost and nutritional aspects.
Evaluation :
Assignment on collection of various food commodities
2 Unit tests : Topic 1 - 5 Ist Test
6 - 12 IInd Test

(Vocational)
Paper-B
Sanitation and Hygiene (Theory)
Part-I
Instructions for the paper setters.
As per the scheme of the examination for Clinical Nutrition and
Dietetics (vocational) in Part II Paper A,B,C (Theory) are of 50
marks each. For this, each question paper will consist of three
sections as follows :
with answer to each question up to five lines in length. All questions
candidate. Each question will carry three marks. The total weightage
will be 16 marks.
1. Importance of personal hygiene of food handler. Habits-
clothes, illness. Education of food handler in handling and
serving food.
2. Safety in food procurement, storage, handling and
preparation control of spoilage-safety of left off left over
foods.
3. Cleaning methods-sterlisation and disinfection-products and

methods-use of detergents, heat chemicals, tests for
Samitiser strength.
Materials used :
4.(a) Sanitation-Kitchen design equipment and layout of food
premises maintaining clean environment.
(b) Selecting and installing equipment, cleaning equipment.
(c) Basic concept, safety consideration, electric parts &
wiring to suit installan & use of equipment.
(d) Basic materials used for finishes, insulation materials
for necessary parts, strength & limitations.
5. Waste product handling- Planning for waste disposal. Solid
wastes and liquid wastes.
6. Control of Infestation-rodent Control-Rats, Mice-Rodent,
profing, destruction, vector Control-Use of pesticides.
7.(a) Food sanitation, control and inspection, planning and
implementation of training programme for health
personnel.
(b) Municipal rules & legislatures.
References
1. Essentials of Food Safety & Sanilal3 edition M.C. Swane
Pearson Edv. Prentice Hall.
2. Food Safety Handbook by Schmidt John Willy.
3. Fundamental Food Microbiology by Ray 4th Ed. Routledge.
4. Managing Food Industry Waste: Common Sense Method
for food Processory by Robert R. Zall Wiley Backwe112004.
5. The HACCP Food Safety M;anual by Joan K Loken.
6. Quantity Food Sanitateon Sth Ed. by Kalra Longree Gerirude
Armbrusters 1996.
7. Quantity Food Sanitation 5th Ed. Springer Pub 2006 by
Marroitt.

(Vocational)
Paper B
Quantity Food production and Service
Part-II
Code No.FSN 310 Credits-2
Objectives :
1. To understand the application of basic principles to bulk
production of the food.
2. To gain knowledge regarding selection and purchase of
food.
3. To develop skills in menu planning for quantity preparation.
4. To understand the different styles of food service in volume
feedings.
Course Content :
1. Aims and objectives of different food service outlets
a) industrial b) institutional c) hospitals
2. Different foods and beverage outlet
3. Menu planning-sequence of course
Indian (Regional i.e.North Indian, South Indian, West Indian
at Gujaratis), Western and others. Technique of writing
menus (give excercises for planning menus).
4. Types of meals-and styles of service breakfast, lunch, dinner,
afternoon tea, snacks (table d'hote and a'la cartemenu)
BF (1) ala carte (2) TDH (3)
5. Introduction to basic and special equipment for food
production and Service.
a) indicate and list

b) bare and use of equipment-silver, cutlery, glass laying
up for number (Practicals, Use AV aids and handouts)
6. 5 types of services of food and beverage outlets
7. Staff organisation of different outlets (a La carte and table
d'hote)
Manager, Hostess, Supervisor, Steward, Waiter
8. Beverages, alcoholic and non alcoholic, hot and cold.
Classification of beverages, use and importance in meals
and snacks, suitable glassware for beverage service.
9. Use of bills and checks in control system outlet
10. 1 Unit Test
1 Project report on names of different organisations and
suppliers of crockery, cutlery etc. With manufacture's name
and prices and report on serviette folds.
References :
1. Foods and Beverage Service, D.R.Lillicrap, 7th edition,
2006.
2. Table Decoration, Dorothy Tompkins 2nd edition, Droke
Publishers.
3. Concepts of Food Service Operations & Management, 2nd
edition by Mahmood A Khan.
4. Design and Equipment for Resturants & Food Service-A
Management View Jrd edition by Costas Kesigers
Christhomus Mahmood A Khan.
5. Design & Layout of Food Service Faculties- 3rd edition by
John C. Birthfield, John Birchfiled, John Birchfield Jr. Dec.,
2007.
6. Dictionary of Nutrition & Dietetics by Karen Eich Drumond

Aug.1996.
7. Foods and Beverage Service Manual by Casuda Matt A.
8. Principals of Food, Beverage and Labour Cost Controls 9th
edition by Paul R. Dittimer, J. Desmond Keefe, III, 2008.
9. Profeesional Table Service by Sylvia Mayor, Edy Schmid
Chrustel Spuler, 1990.
10. Quality Resturant Service Guaranteed : A Training Outline
by Nancy Loman Scanlon 1998.

(Vocational)
Paper B
Quantity Food production and Service
(Practicals)
Objectives :
1. Develop skills in quantity food production and service.
Course Contents :
1. Organizing, preparing and serving food for three different
meals for 50 members or more (list attached).
2. Setting up the restaurant-lying of table cloth changing, setting
up the silvers and other table appointments. Folding of
serviettes, correct Use of waiter's cloth. Preparing for
customers.
3. Serving and clearing practice, French and English service.
4. Service of beverages tea, coffee, juices and alcoholic
beverages.
5. Lying for breakfast.
6. Tray service
7. Order taking, making out checks, bills, presentation of bills.
8. Up keep and cleaning of cutlery, crockery & other equipment.
I. Rice Preparations : Plain & fried rice, pulao, masala rice,
tomato rice, vegetable biryani, mugalai biryani, mutton biryani,
chicken biryani, yakhani pulao. (any four)
II. Wheat Preparations : Chapati, parantha plain, parantha
stuffed, puris, bhaturas, nan.
III. Pulse Preparations : Punjabi dal, sambar, dalfry, sprouted
pulses, Alu-chhole, masala rajmah, Dhanshak (any four).
IV. Vegetable Preparations : Alu matar, alu palak, dum alu,

fried veg, palak paneer, vegetable kofta, vegetable korma
(any four)
V. Salads : Tossed Salad, Russian salad, moulded salad,
decorative salad.
VI. Meat Preparations : Kofta curry, roghan-josh, mutton chilli
fry, mutton palak, vindaloo, murg masala, brain masala, tanduri
chicken, chicken curry, prawns curry, fish curry. (any four)
VII. Snacks : Variety of sandwiches, vegetable puffs, fried
snacks, fermented and steamed snacks.
VIII. Sweets : Laddu, Gujiya, burfi, shrikhand, gulabjamun,
puranpoli, kheer, halwas. (any four)
IX. Western Cookery : Soups : Mixed Veg, tomato cream soup,
carrot cream soup, mulligatawny soup, minestrone soup,
chicken soup and corn soup.
Sauces : White sauce, cheese sauce, mayonnaise sauce,
curry sauce.
Entrees : Vegetables pie, hollandaise, vegetable and meat
loaf, chicken, casserol, hamburgers, vegetable burgers. (any
four).
Vegetables : Vegetables and gratin, Baked cauliflower,
savoury, vegetables, baked, stuffed capsicum.
Sweets : Bread pudding, sauffles, trifle, coffee mousse,
gateaux.
Bakery Products : Short crust pastries Different types of
tarts, pies and turn overs. Vegetables and mutton pattis.
Cakes and cookies : Plain cake, fruit cake, ba bread, date
and walnut cake and varieties of cookies.
Breads : breads, different kinds of rolls, daughnuts, : different
types of icings.
Evaluation : Continuous assessment will be done.

Visit to different types of Foods service institutions to study-
Hospitals, Kitchen (jughi), Hotel, restaurant, Industrial
Canteen, College Canteen for
(a) Organization
(b) Physical plan & layout
(c) Food Service Equipment
(d) Sanitation and Hygiene

(Vocational)
Paper-C
Personnel management
Part-I
Time : 3 Hours M. Marks : 50
3 Periods/week
Instructions for the paper setters.
As per the scheme of the examination for Clinical Nutrition and
Dietetics (Vocational) in Part II Paper A,B & C. (Theory) are of
50 marks each .For this, each question paper will consist of three
sections as follows:
Section-A It will consist of 10 very short answer type questions
with answers to each question up to five lines in length. All question
Section-B : It will consist of short answer type questions with
candidate. Each question will carry three marks. The total weightage
Section C: It will consist of essay type questions with answer to
will be 16 marks.
1. Management
- Definition, scope and functions
- Principles of Management
- Techniques of effective management
- Energy and time management and its application to food
preparation and service.
2. Food material management

- Meaning, definition, importance
- Food selection, purchasing, receiving and storing
- Material identification, modification and standardization.
- Inventory control, meaning, objectives, order and reorder
level, minimum and maximum level, longer level, valuation
of inventory, EOQ
- Storekeeping, definition, objectives, functions, factors
underlying successful storekeeping, duties and
responsibilities of a storekeeper
- Quality Control
3. Personnel Management
- Recuritment, selection and training of personnel, work
standards, productivity, supervision, performance appraisal,
motivation, incentives for effective performance. Labour
policies and legislation. (personnel policies related to salaries,
other emoluments, allowances, leave, uniform and other prize
benefits, Labour laws and organization).
Books Recommended
1. Bora, P.M., Food Administration in India ; A Study of an
Indian State, 1982.
2. Kinton and Casarani, Theory of Catering Butter and Tanner
Ltd; 1981.
3. Boella, M.J. Personnel Management in the hotel and
Catering Industry, Ist. ed., Barrie and Jenhnins, London,
1974.
4. Mundel, M.E. Motion and Time Study Principles and
Practice, 5th ed., Prentice Hall, India 1981.
5. Kiesar, J., Controlling. Analysing Costs in Food Service
Operations, 2nd ed., Macmillan Publi. Co., 1986.
6. Kumar, H.L.Personnel Mgt. In the Hotel and Catering

Industry, 1st ed., Metropolitan Book Co., Delhi, 1986.
7. Monor, L.J. and R.F. Cichy, Food Service Systems
management, Avi. Public. Co., Connecticut, 1984.
8. West, B.B.L. Wood, U.F. Hayer and G.F. Shugart, Food
service in Institutions, John Wiley and Sons, 1977.
9. Publications by National Productivity council, Management
guide, New Delhi, Series.
10. Hitchcock M.J., Food Service Systems, Administration,
Macmillan publi. Co., New York, 1980.
11. Mohini Sethi and Surjeet Malhan, Catering Management,
An Integrated Approach, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1987.
Paper-C
BOOK KEEPING & COST ACCOUNTANCY
Part-II
1. Introduction, objectives, principles and advantages of double
entry.
2. Introduction to Journal.
3. Preparation of cash book-Single column and double column.
4. Cost Accounting : Meaning of cost accounting and
preparation of cost sheet (cost accounting shall have
reference to food cost accountancy.
5. Budgets and Budgetary control : Definition, meaning,
purpose, advantages, key factor in budgeting. Budget-short
term and long term, fixed and flexible, various functional
budgets like sales, purchases, production, stores personnel,
expense and master budget.
6. Marginal Costing : Cost classification by behaviour,
definition, marginal costing features, assumptions,
applicability, advantages and limitations. Break-even
analysis; break even point, margin of safety, profit volume
ratio, opportunity cost.
References
Book Keeping & Accountancy
Prof. Baljinder Singh
Prof. J.S. Arora
Prof. A.K. Dhir
Cost Accounting
By Bhalla, Gupta & Sharma
By Jain & Narang
By Maheshwari & Mittal
Management Accounting
By Sharma & Gupta
By Vashisht & Pascriche
FASHION DESIGNING AND GARMENT

CONSTRUCTION
(Vocational)
Scheme of Studies
Instructions of Paper Setters :
The theory paper consist of eight questions, out of
which the student will be required to attempt any five. All
questions carry equal marks.
Name of Paper Perieds/Week
Th. Pr.
Paper-I 4 -
Paper-II - 6
Paper-III - 6
Training & Project Report
Reprint the student will be required to take 3 weeks training
an export or fashion house. They will be required to submit a
Comprehensive report - 25 marks.
Schemes of Examination
Name of Paper Theory Practical Time Marks Internal Total
1. Fundamentals of One - 3 Hrs. 50 - 50
Textiles Paper-I
2. Pattern Making - One 4 Hrs. 40 10 50

Paper-II
3. Designing & Garment - One 4 Hrs. 60 15 75

Construction paper-III
4. Job Training - - - - 25 25
Total : 200
FUNDAMENTALS OF TEXTILES
Paper-I
Instructions for paper setter :
1. Classification of textile fibres and Terminology.
2. Properties & manufacturing process of following:
a) Cotton
b) Linen
c) Wool
d) Silk
e) Nylon
f) Rayon-Vicose & acetate
g) Lycra
3. Brief study of the following yerns :
a) Simple
b) Novelty
c) Bulk/Textured
4. Fabric-construction-A study of :
a) Weaing
b) Knitting
c) Felting
d) Bonding
5. Finishes-Mercerising, Tentering. Calendering,
Moiering, Stain resistan finish.
6. Printing-Block printing, screen printing and roller
printing.
7. Seminar
Fashion Designing & Garment Construction

Paper-II (Practical)
Paper : 40
Int. Ass. :10
Pattern Making and Grading
A. Dart manipulation by flat pattern and pivot method
a) Shifting of darts
b) Combining darts
c) Converting darts into gathers
d) Converting darts into seamlines
B. Variation of tops
a) Variation of tops
b) Variation of Skirt-Flared, Gathered with yoke, peg Skirt,
Pleated Skirt.
c) Adaptation of Sleeves, Saddle, Cowl.
d) Adaptation of collars-Notched, Shawl, Coat Collar,
Convertible, Stand and fall.
C. Grading
a) Circumference, Length, Width grades
b) Upgrading
c) Downgrading
d) Grading of - 1. Skirt 2. Tops
Instructions for Paper Setter (Paper-II)
Paper : 40 Marks
Int. Ass. : 10 Marks
Q.1 from Part-A carrying 10 marks.
Q.2 from Part-B carrying 15 marks
Q.3 from Part-C carrying 10 marks
Q.4 Fil 5 marks
Paper-III (Practical)
Paper : 60
Int. Ass. : 15
1. Drafting and Garments Construction :
a) Adults Bodice Block, sleeve block
b) Adults skirt Block
c) Sleeves : Dolman, Peasant
d) Collars: Shawl,Coat,Stand and fall,convertible,Chinese.
e) Necklines : Cowl, turtle
2. Designing, Drafting and Construction of :
a) Skirt
b) Tops
c) Ladies Blouse
d) Designer suit
3. Traditional Embroidery :
a) Phulkari
b) Kashmiri
c) Kantha
d) Chickankari
Instructions for Paper Setter (Practical-III)
Paper : 60 marks
Int. Ass. : 15 marks
Q.1 Design any one garment from syllabus on 5 Mark
paper bag—front and back
Q.2 Adaptation to be made from sloper 10 Marks
Q.3 Cutting and placement 10 Marks
Q.4 Construction and finishing of garments 25 Marks
Q.5 File and scheme work 10 Marks
Note : Please send the material list alongwith.
REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING

(Vocational Subject)
Scheme of Examinations
Note : The theory paper is of 50 marks, the distribution of
the marks is as given below:
1. (a) Time allowed Theory : 3 hours
Practical : 3 hours
(b) Maximum Marks Theory :
Paper-A : 50
Paper-B : 50
Practical : 50
Practical Int. Asses. : 50
2. Hours for Teaching the Subject-Theory 6 Hours
Hours for Teaching the Subject-Practical 6 Hours
per week
Section A : This will consist of 10 very short answer type questions
will be compulsory. Each question will carry 1 mark the total
Section B : This will consist of short-answer type questions with
Section C : This will consist of essay type questions with answer
to each question upto 5 pages in length. Four questions will be set
by the examiner and the candidates will be required to attempt two.
Each question will carry eight marks; total weightage of the section
being 16 marks.
Note : Number of hours for theory & practical are five & Three
hours resp. Use of calculators is allowed in the examination centre
but it will not be provided by University/College.

(Vocational)
Paper A
Refrigeration Hardware
(1) Compressors : Introduction, Types Hermetic, Semi
Hermatic open compressors. Centrifugal & Rotary
Compressors construction. Features volumeteric
Efficiencies Multicylinder Compression & Capacity control.
(2) Compressor lubrication : Methods of Lubrication & the
properties of a Lubricating oil Indentification of sources of
problem in operation Value failure, Shaft Seals 3- way
Values cylinder to head gascats.
(3) Condensers : Definition, Basic Principle, Types of
Condensers.
1. Air cooled Condenser 2. Water Cooled Condenser
3. Evaporative Condenser.
Their Constructional features, comparison between Waters
& Air cooled condenser & their Advantages &
disadvantages.
4. Cooling Towers ; Definition. Types natural & Mechanical
Draft, cooling pond, shell & tube shell of coil chillers. Fouling
& de scaling of condensers. Brine System.
5. Expansion Devices : Capillary Tube, Constant Pressure.
Thermo Static Exp. Values, Sizing of Cappillary. Standard
Sizes, Testing & adjustment of expansion devices. High &
Low side float value. Refrigerant receivers. Dryers Filters.
6. Refrigeration & Air Conditioning System Practice :
Piping layout Selection of pip material & size for various
Refrigerant, Methods of joining, flairing & brazing System,
euacuation, depyartation, charging balancing, leak testing,
Use of Selenoid values pressure equalizers.

(Vocational)
Scheme of Examinations
Note : The theory paper is of 50 marks, the distribution of
the marks is as given below:
1. (a) Time Allowed Theory : 3 Hours
Practical : 3 Hours
(b) Maximum Marks Theory :
Paper-A : 50
Paper-B : 50
Practical : : 50
Practical Int. Asses. : 50
2. Hours for Teaching the Subject : Theory : 6 Hours
Hours for Teaching the Subject: Practical : 6 Hours
per week
Section A : This will consist of 10 very short answer questions
with answers to each question upto five lines in length. All questions
will be compulsory. Each question will carry 1 marks the total
Section B : This will consist of short-answer question with answer
to each question upto two pages in legth. Twelve questions will be
Each question will carry three marks. The total weightage of the
Section C : This will consist of essay type questions with answers
by the examiner and the candidates will be required to attempt two.
Each question will carry eight and half marks; total weightage of
the section being 16 marks.
Note : Number of hours for theory & practical are five & Three
hours respectively Use of calculators is allowed in the examination
centre but it will not be provided by University/College.

(Vocational)
Paper B
Refrigeration Equiments
1. Domestic refrigerators : Introduction, Construction &
Operational features of domestic Refrigerators. Defrosting
Automatic Pressure & Electric Defrosting etc.
2. Cold storages : Introduction, Construction, Sealing &
Insulation of Cold Storages. Refrigeration, Requirements
for various food items. Water coolers. Storage & Pressure
Type Water Coolers Their filtering. Constructional features
& Insulation Bottle Coolers, Ice Creams.
3. Air Conditioning Machines & Components : Types of
cooling. Humidification & Dehumidification coils, Heating
coils. Fans & blowers eilters & dampers.
4. Duct Construction : Buelt systems. Loop perimeter, Radial
Perimeter & Exunded Pleanum Duct System. Water Pumps:
Vertical Types & Horizontal Type.
5. Evaporators : Introduction, Types of Evaporator Flooded
Type Evaporator. Dry Expansion Type Evaporator Baudelot
cooler Bare Tube, Plate Surface, Finned Evaporator, Their
construction & Operational features.
Note : A Job Training of one month in summer will be given to the
students carrying 40 marks.

(Vocational)
List of Practical
Time : 3 hours Max. Marks : 50
1. To Study the various control devices e.g. Thermostat, Relays
& dryers etc.
2. To Study the vapour compression System.
3. To Study an electrolux Refrigerator.
4. To Study the (i) Window Type Air Conditioner, Split Type
air Conditioner.
5. To Study Ammonia-Water Plant.
6. To Study a cooling Tower.
7. To Study a desert cooler & Pump used for this type.
8. Gas charging in the Refrigerator System & Testing for
leakage.
9. To test chek the capacitors, Relays, automatic Value,
Solenoid value, high & low pressure cut off etc.
10. To assemble & Operate a small vapour compression system.
11. To find the C.O.P. of a water cooler.
12. To find the C.O.P. of an Ammonia Ice Plant.
List of Books Recommended
Name of Books Author Publisher
Refrigeration & Air S.C.Arora Dhanpat Rai
Conditioning
Refrigeration & Air Dowkundwar Katson
Conditioning Khurmi Publication
Refrigeration & Air Sarao, Gaabi Satya
Conditioning Singh Prakashan.
EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE AND

EDUCATION
(Vocational)
Paper A (Theory) : 3 Hours Max.Marks : 100
Paper B (Practical) : 3 Hours Max.Marks : 100
Demonstration of indoor/outdoor age appropriate activities of
Children. Preparation of two educational/activity materials for
Cognitive/science experiences and creativity Marks : 20
Practical Note Book Marks : 15
Written Practical Test Marks : 15
Oral Examination Marks : 20
Internal Assessment Marks : 20
Assignment Marks : 10
Teaching Work Load

Theory -4 periods per week
Practical-6 periods per week
Note : The question paper may consist of three sections as
follows:-
Section A will consist of 10 very short answer type questions with
be compulsory. Each question will carry two marks, total weightage
being 20 marks.
Section B will consist of short answer type questions with answer
Each question will carry six marks, total weightage of the section
shall be 48 marks.
the examiner and the candidates are required to attempt two. Each
question will carry sixteen marks, total weightage of the section
being 32 marks.
Scheme of Examination Time Marks Lectures/Week

Paper-A Theory 3 Hours 100 6
Paper-B Practical 3 Hours 100 4
1. Early Childhood stimulation at home and school. Quality of
Home Environment.
2. Essential of setting up early Childhood Education Centre-
need, importance, objectives and scope.
3. Historical perspectives of Early Childhood Education.
4. Early Childhood Education programmes in India and Abroad.
5. Curriculum Models.
6. Curriculum Management-programme planning : principles,
content, annual, monthly, weekly, daily programmes.
Execution and planning of activity plans : Indoor and outdoor
activities. Maintenance of equipment and record keeping.
7. Integration in Early Childhood Educaiton : identification of
children with special needs and integration with normal
children.
Practical
1. A visit to a "model' early Childhood Educational Centre to
observe curriculum implementation, indoor and outdoor
activities and equipment.
2. Preparation of curriculum, calendar (for one academic
session), daily time table and detailed activity plans (for each
day).
3. Collection of self composed age-appropriate stories and
Rhymes for pre-school children.
4. Demonstration of making ECE Centre Child-proof,
maintenance and care of equipment.
Suggested Readings
1. Camp as an approach for parents : Education (1995), child
resource centre, centre for health education, Training and
Nutrition awareness (CHETNA), lilabatiber Lalbhai's
Bunglow, civil camp road, shahibaug, Ahmedabad-380004
(Gujarat).
2. Developmentally Appropriate practices in Early Childhood
programe. Serving children from Birth through Ages 8.
Expanded Edition. Sue Bredekamp, National Association
for the education of Young Children. 1884 connecticut
Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C.20009-5786.
3. Education's Manual, Child Centred Health Education
Approaches, (1995), CHETNA (Gujarat).
4. Getting Ready for school-The pre-School years- A manual
for care Givers of Children (1994), CHETNA (Gujarat).
5. Guide to Activities in Creative Drama and Puppetry, (1994),
CHETNA (Gujarat).
6. Planning effective preschool education (1995), CHETNA
(Gujarat).
7. Fine J. Marvin, Handbook on Parent Education (1980)
Department of educational Psychology and research, School
of Education, University of kansas, Lawrence, Kansas.
8. Amin Ranjan, (1997), Learning for Life from Birth to Five-
Nurturing the Growing Child, Books for Change, Mumbai.
9. Swaminathan Mina (1998), The First five years -A critical
perspective on Early Childhood Care and Education in india,
Sage Publications, New Delhi.
10. Jaswal, S., Nanda, P. & Roy's (1997), Toy Box-Guide to
Creative Toy Making, Asia Vision, Ludhiana.
FOOD SCIENCE AND QUALITY CONTROL

(Vocational)
FSQC-5 Food Processing and Packaging
(Theory)
Instructions for paper setters.
Question paper will cover both the main topics and divided
into two parts. Each part will contain four questions and students
will be asked to attempt five question in all with at least two from
each part.
PART-I
(1) Physical principles underlying food processing operations
including thermal processing, ionising rediation,
refrigerations, freezing, dehydration etc.
(2) Chemical principles in food processing, chemical changes
in food that affect the texture, colour flavour, odour, stability
and nutritive quality during processing and storage.
(3) Processing technology of cereals and legumes
(4) Processing technology of oilseeds.
(5) Processing technology of fruits and vegetables, fresh and
processed.
(6) Processing technology of milk and milk products.
(7) Processing technology of meat, fish, poultry and eggs.
(8) Fermentation technology, Enrichment and Fortification
Technology. High protein food technology.
(9) Quality control in food industry-methods of evaluation and
control of the various aspects of quailty of raw materials
manufacturing process, the testing of finished products.
(10) Waste disposal and sanitation.
(11) Preservatives and additives
(12) Extruded foods.
Part-II
(13) Food Irradiation
(14) Packaging of Foods.
(15) Packaging function
(16) Approches to packaging development, Specification and
Quality Control, interaction of Food & Packaging.
1) Evaluation of Food Packages
2) Importance of Packages
3) Packaging criteria, appearance protection, function cost,
materials & forms of packaging.
4) Packaging methods & performances.
5) Packaging specification & control of packaging quailty.
6) Food & Food package interaction.
7) Food packaging & laws
8) Packaging evaluation-package life theory and testing
packaging materials.
9) Self life testing.
References
1. Technology of cereal, legumes and oil seeds-Chakrobrty
S. DeOr for IBH Pub.
2. Cereal Tech. - Kent.
3. Preservation of fruits & Veg.-Giridhari Lal.
4. Dairy Tech.-Surcumar De.
5. Waste treatment-
6. Food packaging Sacharow and Griffir Avi. Publising Co.
7. Packaging Mng. Briston & Neill. Gower Press
8. Food & Packaging Interaction. Hotchikess American
Chemical Society.
9. Packaging for Climatic Protection Cains, Oswin Paine.
FOOD SCIENCE AND QUALITY CONTROL

(Vocational)
FSQC-6 Quality Assurance
Question paper will cover both the main topics and
divided into two parts. Each part will contain four questions
and the students will be asked to attempt five questions
in all atleast two from each part.
Theory
Part-I
Objectives, importance and functions of quality control.
Methods of quality assessment of food materials fruits, vegetables,
cereals, dairy products, meat, egg and processed products.
Part-II
Sampling, specifications of raw materials and finished products,
Sensory evaluation.
Concept of HACCP & GMP.
Quality Attributes : Size, Shape, Colour, Aroma, Texture Food
Laws and Regulations. AGMARK, FPO, PFA, MFPO, BIS, ISO.
Recommend Books :
1. Quality Control for Food Industry by Kramer A, Twigg BA.
1970, AVI Publishers, USA.
2. Handbook of Analysis and Quality Control for Fruits & Veg.
Products by Ranganna S, 2nd ed. 2000, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi.
3. Food Science by Potter NN, 5th ed. 2006, CBS Publishers,
New Delhi.
FSQC-7 Food Processing & Packaging

(Practical)
Max. Marks : 25
1. Determination of Physical characteristics of cereals.
2. Milling of wheat into flour.
3. Determination of wet & Dry gluten contents.
4. Determination of free fatty acids in flour and rice bran.
5. Milling of rice
6. Proboilling of rice
7. Identification of packaging materials.
8. To estimate the shelf life of packaged food.
9. To determine greasec resistance of packaging material.
10. Determination of water vapour transmission of rate of
various packaging materials.
11. To find out the porosity of tin plate.
12. To find out the tin coating weight
13. To find out the uniformity and amount of wax on wax paper.
14. To see the chemical resistance of packaging materials.
15. Visits to various industries dealing with food packaging
material like, paper board and metal.
FSQC-8 Quality Assurance (Practical)

Practicals : Max. Marks : 25
1. Quality evaluation of milk & milk products.
2. Quality evaluation of cereals.
3. Quality evaluation of fruits and vegetables
4. Quality evaluation of Oils & Fats.
5. Quality evaluation of Meat & Poultry.
6. Adulterants in milk, cereals, oils & Fats and their detection.
ELECTRONICS
Paper—A
Digital Electronics
Time : 3 Hours Max Marks : 50
Note : For examiners/paper setters :
1. Equal weightage should be given to each unit of the
syllabus.
2. Question paper should be set strictly accroding to
the syllabus.
3. The distribution of marks is as given below :
Section A : This will consist of 10 (ten) very short answer type
questions. All questions will be compulsory. Each question will carry
ONE mark, total weightage of the section being 10 marks.
Section B : This will consist of short-answer questions. The
examiner will set twelve 12 questions and the candidates will attempt
eight (8) questions. Each question will carry Three marks; total
Section C : This will consist of essay type questions. The examiner
will set four (4) questions and the candidate will be required to
attempt two (2). Each question will carry 8 marks; total weightage
of the section being 16 marks.
Note for teacher/Student: Minimum number of hours
for theory are three (3)=4*45 minutes per week.
Unit-I
Transistor Oscillators :
Concept of feedback in amplifiers, type of feedback, principle
of feedback amplifier, effects of negative feedback, positive
feedback amplifier, LC oscillators (tuned-collector, tuned base,
Hartley, colpitte), RC oscillators (Phase-shift, Wien-Bridge), Crystal
oscillators, multivibrators. Monostable, Bistable, Astable & Schimmit
Trigger. Saw tooth wave generator.
Unit-II
Digital/Electronics-I:
Introduction to sequential circuits; flip flops, RS flip-flop,
Clocked RS flip-flop, , D flip-flop, Latches, level triggered & edge
triggered flip-flops, positive and negative edge triggering limitations
of JK flip-flop- race-around condition, Master-Slave JK flip-flop,
T flip flops. Applications of flip flop, shift registers, shift-left
Registers, shift right registers. Serial in serial out shift registers
(SISO), serial in parallel out Shift Registers (SIPO), Parallel in serial
out shift registers (PISO) parallel in parallel out shift registers
(PIPO), Universal shift registers, Applications of shift registers
Unit-III
Counters; serial counters, parallel counters, up-down counters
and speed limitation of serial counters, designing of synchronous &
asynchronous counters, hybrid counters, shift register counters, ring
counters, twisted ring counters, cascading of synchronous counters.
Analog to digital and digitial to analog conbeters : Weighed resister
DAC, R-2R ladder DAC, parallel comparator ADC, successive
approximation ADC, counting ADC, Dual Dual slop ADC.
Books
(1) Fundamentals of Digital Circuits by A. Anand Kumar (PHI),
2004.
(2) Modern Digitial Electronics by R.P. Jain (Tata McGrew
HIll), 3rd Edition, 2003.
(3) Principals of Electronics by S.K. Bhattacharya & Dr. Renu
Vij (S.K. Kataria & Sons), 2004.
ELECTRONICS
Paper—B
Analog Integrated Circuits
Note : For the examiners/paper setters :
syllabus.
2. Question paper should be set strictly according to
the syllabus.
Section A : This will consist of 10 (ten) very short answer
type questions. All questions will be compulsory. Each question will
carry ONE marks total weightage of the section being 10 marks.
Section B : This will consist of short-answer type questions.
The examiner will set twelve 12 questions and the candidates will
attempt eight (8) questions. Each question will carry Three marks
, total weightage of the section shall be 24 marks.
Section C : This will consist of essay type questions. The
examiner will set four (4) questions and the candidate will be required
to attempt two (2). Each question will carry 8 marks; total weightage
of the section being 16 marks.
Unit I
Linear Integrated Circuits - I :
Dual-input, Balanced output, Dual-input Unbalanced Output,
Single Input Balanced-Output, Single-input unbalanced output,
differential amplifier with AC and DC analysis, operational amplifier,
block diagram, schematic symbol, op-amp parameters Ideal op, amp,
Equivalent circuit, Ideal voltage transfer curve, Open loop op-amp
configurations, voltage-series feedback amplifier, voltage shunt,
feedback amplifier.
Unit II
Linear Integrated Circuit -II :
Operational amplifier applications; Summing, Scaling
Averaging Amplifiers-Inverting configuration, Non-inverting
configuration, Differental configuration, Integrator, differentiator,
Square Wave, Generator, Triangular Wave Generator, Saw Tooth
Wave Generator.
Unit III
Linear Integrated Circuits -III :
The 555 timer; Pin configuration, Internal Structure. The 555
as a Monostable Multivibrator, Monostable Multivibrator
Applications, the 555 as a Astable Multivibrator, Astable
Multivibrator Applicaions, 78 XX & 79 XX series of Voltage
Regulators, Fixed Voltage Regulators, Adjustable Voltage
Regulators, Switching Regulators, Special Regulators.
(1) Op-Amplifiers & Linear Integrated Circuits by Ramakant
& Gayakwars (Prentice Hall India) 4th Edition Reprint 2002.
(2) Design with Operational Amplier & Analog Integrated
Circuits by Sergio & Franco (Tata McGraw Hill) 3rd Edition
2003.
ELECTRONICS
Paper C
Electronics and Instrumentation
Note : For the examiners/paper setters :

syllabus.
2. Question paper should be set strictly accroding to
the syllabus.
Section A : This will consist of 10 (ten) very short answer
type questions. All questions will be compulsory. Each question will
carry ONE mark, total weightage of the section being 10 marks.
Section B : This will consist of short-answer type questions.
The examiner will set twelve 12 questions and the candidates will
attempt eight (8) questions. Each questions will carry Three marks;
total weightage of the section shall be 24 marks.
Section C : This will consist of essay type questions. The
examiner will set four (4) questions and the candidate will be required
to attempt two (2). Each question will carry 8 marks each; total
Unit-I
Measurements I: Unit, Absolute Units, Fundamental and
Derived Units, Dimensions, Dimensions of Machanical Units, CGS
System of Units—Electromagnetic Units, Electrostatic Units,
Practical Units, Dimensional equations—Dimensions in Electrostatic
Systems, Dimensions in Electromagnetic Systems, Relationship
between Electrostatic and Electromagnetic System of Units.
Unit-II
Measurements II : Standards, construction and equivalent
circuit representation of Resistance, Capacitances and Inductances.
Operating Principles and construction of Galvanometer, Analog
Ammeters, Voltmeters and Ohmmeters, critical, under and over
damping of Galvanometers, Ballistic Galvanometer and their
calibration, Fluxmeter, Vibration Galvanometers, Duddell's
Oscilloscope, Multirange Voltmeters and ammeters, Series and Shunt
type Ohmmeters, Megger and Ducter Ohmmeter, Measurement
using multi-meters.
Unit-III
Measurements-III :Frequency meters, types of frequency
meters and synchrocopes. Measurement of medium, low and high
Resistances.
Potentiometers; DC potentiometers, Standard Reference
voltage source, principle of operation, construction and calibration,
phantom loading range extension and applications for DC
potentiometers, self balancing Potentiometers. AC Potentiometers,
types and applications. AC Bridges; Maxwell's Inductance Bridge,
Maxwell's Inductance Capacitance Bridge.
Unit-IV
Measurements-IV : Electronic Voltmeters, FET
Voltmeters, Cathode Ray Oscilloscope principle and working
measurements of Voltage, Frequency and Phase angle with CRO,
Multiple trace and storage type Oscilloscope, Audio Signal
Generators.
Books
1. Electrical and Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation
by A.K. Sawhney.
2. Electronic Instrumentation & Measurement Techniques by
W.D. Cooper.
3. Basic Electrical Measurement by B. Stont.
ELECTRONICS
(Practicals)
Time : 3 Hours 30 Minutes Max. Marks : 50
Note : 1. Perform two experiments at least from each section.
2. Minimum Hours Per week for practical 6.
List of Practicals
Section-A
1. To examine design and operating characteristics of an
inverting Op-Amp.
2. To Examine design and operating characteristics of a non-
inverting Op-Amp.
3. Study the response of the RC circuit to square wave
(Integrator and differentiator).
4. To study the Op-Amp as differentiator.
5. To study the Op-Amp as integrator.
6. To study Op-Amp as summer.
7. Design a wein-Bridge oscillator using 741.
8. Design a delay circuit using 555 timer.
9. Verification of the truth tables of Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer.
10. Design , Fabrication and testing of differentiator and
integrator circuits using Op-Amp.
11. To study Clipping diode circuit.
12. Design, fabrication and testing of Clipper and Clamper
circuits using Op-Amp.
Section-B
13. Measurement of Inductance by Maxwell's Bridge.
14. Measurement of Small Resistance by Kelvin's Bridge.
15. Measurement of Capacitance by Schering Bridge.
16. Measurement of Frequency by Wein's Bridge.
17. Measurement of Displacement with help Potentiometer.
18. Determination of Frequency and phase angle using CRO.

19. Measurement of Medium Resistances with the help of
Wheatstone bridge.
20. To find the Q of a Coil by a series resonance method and
verify it.
21. Verification of truth table for Flip Flops RS, D, JK, T flip
flops.
22. Verification of truth table for Up Down Counters, Ring
Counters.
23. Study of Hartley, Colpitts and RC oscillator.
24. Study of Monostable, Bistable and astable multivirator.
Books Recommended:
1. Basic Electronics and Linear Circuits-By N.N.Bhargava,
D.C.Kulshreshtha, S.C.Gupta (TMH).
2. Basic Electronics Solid State By B.L.Theraja, (S.Chand &
Co.)
3. Digital Design By M.Morris Meno (PHI), (chapters : 4,5,10)
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Scheme of Examination
Paper-A : Computer Oriented Hours Max.Marks
Numerical and Statistical Methods 3 75
Paper-B : Data Structures and 3 75
Programming in C++
Theory : 4 hours per week in Paper A & B
Paper-C : (Practical) Practicals 3 25
based on Paper-A, Paper-B 3 25
Practical : 2 hours per week (each paper)
Note : 1. Eight questions are required to be set giving the weightage
to all the portions. The candidates will be required to
attempt any five questions. All questions will carry equal
marks.
2. The maximum marks for the paper will be 75.
3. As far as possible except in the computer language papers
no programme may be asked in theory papers. Emphasis
should be on alongwith development.
4. The students can use only Non Programmable and Non
storage type calculator in the subject/paper pertaining to
Computer.
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Paper-A
Computer Oriented Numerical and Statistical Methods
Numerical Methods
Time : 3 Hours Marks : Theory : 75
Practical : 25
Introduction
1. Numerical methods, Numerical methods versus numerical
analysis, Errors and Measures of Errors.
2. Non-linear Equations, Iterative Solutions, Multiple roots and
other difficulties, interpolation methods, Methods of bi-
section, False position method, Newton Raphson-method.
3. Simultaneous Solution of Equations, Gauss Elimination
Method Gauss Jordan method. Gauss Siedel Method, Matrix
Inversion Method.
4. Interpolation and Curve Fitting, Lagrangian Polynomials,
Newtons Methods : Forward Difference Method,
Backward Difference Method Divided Difference Method.
5. Numerical Integration and Different Tryaperzoidal Rule,
Simpson's 1/3 Rule Simpson's 3/8 Rule.
Numerical differentiation by Polynomial Fit
Statistical Techniques
1. Measure of Central Tendency, Preparing frequency
distribution table, Mean Arithmetic, mean geometric, Mean
harmonic, Mean median Mode.
2. Measure of dispersion, Skewness and Kurtosis Range,
Mean deviation. Standard deviation, co-efficient of variation,
Moments Skewness Kurtosis.
3. Correlation Bivariate Distribution Multivariate distribution.
4. Regression B.C., Linear Regression, Multiple Regression.
5. Trend Analysis least square fit linear trend, Non-linear trend

Y=axb
Y=abx
Y=acx
Polynomial fit : Y=a+alX+ea^2x2+a^nxn+n
Note for paper setters
(i) That the program for numerical and statistical methods are
to be written in C/C++ Language.
(ii) Paper setter indicating thereby that the greater weightage
is to be given to exercises and Algorithms rather than
theoretical derivation of all numerical and statistical methods.
Books Recommended
1. B.S. Grewal : Numerical Methods for Engineering,
Sultanchand Publications.
2. V. Rajaraman : Computer Oriented Numerical Methods,
Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd., New Delhi.
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Paper-B
Data Structures & Programming Language Using C++
Time : 3 Hrs. Theory : 75
Practical : 25
Note: i) In theory eight questions are to be set in all. The
candidates are required to attempt five of them. All
questions are to be of equal marks.
ii) The maximum marks of the paper is 75.
iii) As far as possible except in the Computer language
papers no programme may be asked in theory
papers.Emphasis should be on algorithm development.
Practical marks will include the appropriate weightage for proper
maintenance of Lab record.
Data Structure : Introduction to elementary Data Organization,
Common Operation on Data Structures, Algorithm Complexity, Big
O Notation, Time-Space Trade off between Algorithm.
Arrays: Array Defined, Representing Arrays in memory, Various
operations on Linear arrays, Multi Dimensional arrays.
Linked lists : Types of Linked Lists, representing linked list in
memory, advantages of using linked lists over arrays, Various
operations of linked lists.
Stacks : Description of STACK structure, Implementation of stack,
using arryas and linked lists, application of stack-converting
Arithmetic expression from infix notational to polish and their
subsequent evaluation, quicksort technique to sort an array.
Queues : Description of queue structure, Implementation of queue
using arrays and linked lists, description or priorities of queues,
deques.
Sorting and Searching : Sorting Algorithms, bubble sort, selection
sort, insertion sort, quick sort, merge sort, heap sort, searching
Algorithms, linear search and binary search.
Object Oriented Programming : Objects & Classes, Constructor
& Destructor, Operator Overloading, Overloading uniary operators,
Overloading binary operators, Data conversion, Pitfalls of operator
overloading and conversion, Inheritance, Derived class and pase,
Derived class constructor. Overloading member functions,
Inheritance in the English distance class, class hierarchies, Public
& Private inheritance, Level of inheritance, Polymorphism, problems
with single inheritance, multiple inheritance
References:
Seymour Lischutz, Theory and Problems of Data
Structures.
Schaum’s Outline Series, McGraw Hill Company.
Tanenbaum, Data Structure Using C++
COMPUTER APPLICATION
(Vocational)
Paper - A
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks : (Theory) : 75
Practical : 25
Scheme for Computer Applications
(1) Operating System
(2) Relational Data Base Management System & ORACL
Note for Paper-Setters
(i) Eight questions are required to be set giving the weightage
to all the portions. The cadidates will be required to attempt
any five questions. All questions will carry equal marks.
(ii) The maximum marks for the paper will be 75
(iii) As per as possible except in the computer language papers
no programme may be asked in the Theory papers.
Emphasis should be on algorithm development..
1. What is an Operating System - Evolution of OS Machine
Language, Assembly, Compiler, Interpreter.
2. Types of Operating Systems with Examples
a) Single User Systems - MS DOS
b) Multi User Systems : Unix, Xenix, Vax/VMS.
3. Functions of Operating System
a) Memory Management (Fixed Sized partition, Variavle Sized
Partition, Dynamic Memory Management with Reallocation
Technique, Paging Demand Paging Techniques)
b) CPU Management (For come First served, Shortest Job
First, Round Robin Policy)
c) File Management
d) I/O Device Management
e) Command Interpreter
f) Data Management
g) Programme Developing Tools
h) Time Sharing
i) Security
j) Communication
4. Brief History of MS-DOS
5. Terminology for MS-DOS
a) File
b) Types of File (Data, Programme)
c) Wild Cards (*,?)
d) Directory- (Root, Single, Multi, Current)
e) Relative and Absolute Path
f) Booting a System (ROM BIOS self test, Port, IO.SYS,
MSBIOS.SYS, Autoexec.bat, Config.Sys, Command.Com
6. Internal and External Commands with Syntax (Arguments
& Parameters)
a) Internal -cls, date, time, md, cd, copy con, dir, type,
ren, delete, rd, copy
b) External -chkdsk, scandisk, mem, attrib, xcopy,
diskcopy, diskcomp, backup, restore.
7. Features and Benefits of Unix.
8. Unix System (Multi-programming, time-sharing, multi-
tasking)
9. Components of Unix (Kernel, Shell)
10. UNIX file system (Data Block, list, super block, boot block)
11. Types of Files (Ordinary, Directory and Special Files)
12. Types of users in UNIX - levels of users (0-2)
13. Login and Logout from Unix Session
14. Types of Shells (Bourne, c-shell, r-shell)

15. Shell as a command inte, clear
16. Simple Directory and File Commands Cat, is, in, chmod,
mail, who, whoami, cal, pwd, date,ps, mkdir, cd, rmdir, rm,
tput, clear.
17. Piping, filters, batch processing, shell programming (echo,
read, case constructs)
18. Editors (vi) : Commands for opening, inserting, modifying,
deleting and saving files.
Practical : University Practical 25 Marks
COMPUTER APPLICATION
(Vocational)
Paper B
Relational Data Base Management Systems Oracle
Time :3 Hrs. Max. Marks : Theory :75
Practical : 25
Paper Setters Instructions :-
i) In theory eight questions are to be set giving the weightage
to all the portions. The candidates are required to attempt
five. All questions are to be of equal marks.
ii) The maximum marks of the paper is 75.
iii) As far as possible except in the Computer language papers
no programme may be asked in theory papers. Emphasis
should be on algorithm development.
Theory : 4 hours per week in paper A & B
Practical: 2 hours per week (each paper)
Relational Data Base Management System & ORACLE
1. Definition of 3 GL and 4 GL languages
2. Definition of CODD's Rules
3. Introduction to RDBMS and Oracle-Advantages and
Limitations over DBMS.
a) Normalization of Data : First, Second and Third Normal
form
b) Database Models - Hierarchical, Network, Relational
c) Features of SQL Compatibility, Portability
d) Important components (Database Manager, DDL., DML.,
DCL., query processor. (Data Dictionary) ;
e) Introduction to SQL Plus - Definition.
4. SQL Operators
=I=<>><>=<=[NOT]BETWEEN........AND........
[NOT]IN[Text]NOT]like,IS[NOT][NULL,NOT,
AND,OR
5. Data Types
Char, numbers, date long, raw, long raw
6. DDL Commands of SQL
- Create Tables
- Alter Table, view
- Drop Table
- Create View-As selected from, where
- Rename
- Create Index
7. Data Manipulation Language
1. Select
- Select distinct
- Select from where
- Select from where order by
- Select group by clause
- Select Group by having clause
2. Insert Into
3. Update Statement
4. Delete Statement
8. Data Control Language
- Roll back
- Revoke
- Grant
9. Sub Query Definition with 2 Levels
10. Aggregate Functions

Sum, Avg, max, min,count,stddev,variance
11. Character Functions
Lower, Upper, Length, Substr,RPAD,LPAS
12. Arithmatic Functions
Round, Trune, Sqrt, Mod, Abs, Sine
13. Date and Time Functions and Other Miscellaneous Functions
(Add-months, Month-between, NVL, Translate, field
concatenation, decode)
14. Conversion Functions (to-char,to-number, to-date)
15. Substitution Variables (&,&&)
16. Reporting Using SQL Plus
1. Specifying column heading
2. Formating columns
3. Char formats
4. Break
5. Inserting spaces when the break value changes
6. Inserting spaces after every row.
7. Break on multiple columns with different spacing
8. Compute
9. T Title
10. B Title
11. Page size line size, pause.
17. Introduction to PL/SQL
1. Relationship between SQL & PL/SQL
2. Advantages of PL/SQL
3. PL/SQL block structure
4. Valuable and Constant declaration
5. Declaration using attributes %type attribute If elsif ends
if statement
Practical : 25 Marks
Books Reccomended :
- Introduction to Data base System by C.J. Date
- Data base Managemet System by B.C. Desai
- Data base concept by Korth
- Simplifield Approach to by DBMS Kalyani Publications
- Oracle :- Developer 2000 by Iven Bayross.
- Data base System Concepts & oracle (SQL/PIS Q) -
AP Publications.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE
(Vocational)
Paper A
Microprocessor & Assembly Language
Time : 3 Hours M.Marks : 100
Theory : 75 Marks
Practical : 25 Marks
i) Eight questions are required to be set giving the
weightage to all the portions. The candidates will be
required to attempt any five questions. All questions
will carry equal marks.
ii) The maximum marks for the paper will be 75.
iii) As for as possible except in the computer language
papers no programme may asked in the Theory
papers, emphasis should be on Algorithm
development.
* Introduction to Micro Computer System : Microprocessor
Definition, Evolution, Microprocessor as a CPU, Single chip
Micro Computers, Organization of a Micro Processor Based
System.
* 8- Bit Microprocessor : Introduction of 8085, ALU (Timing
& Control Unit, Registers, Data & Address Bus, Pin
Configuration, Intel 8085, Instruction), Instruction Cycles
(Fetch Operation, execute Operation, Machine Cycle &
State, Instruction & Data Flow), Timing Diagram (Timing
Diagram for OP Code, Fetch, Cycle, Memory Read, I/O
Road Memory and I/O write).
* Interfacing I/O Devices : Basic Interfacing Concepts,
Interfacing, Output Display Interfacing Output Devices,
Memory Mapped I/O.
* Instruction Set of Intel 8085 : Introduction Instruction &
Data Format, Addressing Modus, Statrs Flags, Intel 8085
Instruction.
* Peripheral Devices & Their Interfacing : Memory &

I/O Interfacing, Data Transfer Schemes, Interrupt of Intel
8085, Programmable DMA Controller, Programmable
Interrupt Controller, Intel 8529.
* 16-Bit Microprocessor : Intel 8086/8088 pin Diagram,
Architecture, Minimum & Maximum Modes, Bus Cycles,
Memory Bus Status Codes, Memory Control Signals, Read/
Write Cycle.
* I/O Interface of 8086/8088 Microprocessor :Introduction,
Types of I/O, Isolated I/O Interfaces, I/O Data Transfers,
I/O Instruction, I/O Bus Cycles, I/O Hand Shaking Memory
Mapped I/O. 8237A Programmable DMA Controller.
Assembly Language Programs Using 8085 Instructions
References :
B.Ram : Fundamental of Microprocessor & Micro Computers,
Dhanput Rai, 5th Edition, 2001.
R.S. Gaonkar : Microprocessor Architecture for 8085, 3rd
Edition,PRI, 1997.
Avtar Singh : 8088 & 8086 Microprocessor, Prentice Hall, 2002,
6th Edition.
(Vocational)
Paper-B
PC Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Theory : 75
Practical : 25
i) Eight questions are required to be set giving the
weightage to all the portions. The candidate will be
required to attempt any five questions. All questions
will carry equal marks.
ii) The maximum marks for the paper will be 75.
iii) As for as possible except in the computer language
papers no programme may asked in the Theory paper,
emphasis should be on Algorithm development.
* Troubleshooting General PC Problems : Introduction,
General Troubleshooting rules, Common Problems &
Solutions, Preventive Maintenance.
* BIOS : Typical Motherboard BIOS, BIOS Features, BIOS
& Boot Sequences, BIOS Shortcoming & Compatible
Issues, BIOS Troubleshooting, BIOS Upgrades.
* Hard Disk : Introduction, Disk Basics, Disk Performance
& Characteristics, Drive Construction, Drive Testing &
troubleshooting.
* Mortherboard & Buses : Introduction, Motherboard
Components, Expansion Slots system, Bus Functions &
Features. Upgrading & Troubleshooting Motherboard,
General Bus Troubleshooting.
* Basic Memory Concepts : Introduction, Installing
Memories, Upgrade Options & Strategies, Replacing
Memories with Higher Capacity. Troubleshooting Memory.
* Printers : Printer Technology, How Printer Works,

Attaching Printer, Installing Printer Drivers, Preventive
Maintenance, Common Printer Problems & Solution.
* Error Code : Beep Code, Post Code, Post Reader Card.
References
Upgrading & Reparing PCs : Muller, Prentice Hall, 10th Edition,
2000.
Complete PC Upgrade & : Mark Minasi, BPB Publishers,
Maintenance Guide 15th Edition, 2004.
(Vocational)
List of Practicals Based on Paper-A
1. To study the architecture of 8088 microprocessor.
2. To study the addressing modes of 8086.
3. To add two binary numbers each of 16-bit long.
4. To add two binary numbers each of 8-bit long.
5. To find maximum number in the given string (16 bytes long)
and store it at location 0510.
6. To sort a string of a number of 8-bytes in descending order.
7. To multiply an ASCII string of 8 number by a single ASCII
digit.
8. To divide a string of unpacked ASCII digits.
List of Practicals Based on Paper-B
1. Introduction and knowledge of components of PC.
2. To study the troubleshooting Beep Codes.
3. Detection of display card & its replacement.
4. Delection of RAM failures and its replacement.
5. Detection of Motherboard failure and its repair.
6. Up gradation of PC.
7. Troubleshooting Keyboard and Mouse.
Information Technology (Vocational)

Paper-A
OOPS Using C++
Practical : 25
Instructions for the paper setter
Note :(i) In theory eight questions are to be set giving the
weightage to all the portions. The candidates are
required to attempt any five. All questions are to
be of equal marks.
(ii) The maximum marks for the paper will be 75.
(iii) As for as possible except in the Computer language
papers. Emphasis should be on algorithm
development.
SECTION-A
Evolution of OOP, OOP Paradigm, Advantage of OOP,
Characteristics of the object oriented language-objects,classes,
Inheritance, Reusability, User Defined data types, Polymorphism
and operator overloading. Identifiers and Keywords, Constants, c++
operators, type conversion, variable Declaration, Statements and
Expressions, Input and output, conditional expression, loop
statements, breaking control statements.
Defining a function, types of functions, storage class
specifiers, recusions.
SECTION-B
Arrays, structures, pointers and structures, unions, classes, member,
functions, objects, arrays of class objects, pointer and classes,
constructors, destructors, inline member functions, static class
member, friend function, dynamic memory allocation.
Inheritance, single inheritance, types of base classes, type of

derivations, multiple inheritance, container classes, member access
control, Functions overloading , operator overloading, polymorphism,
virtual functions, pure virtual functions, opening and closing of files,
Stream State member functions.
References :
1. C++; A Beginner's Guide by "Schildt, Herbert", Edition 2002,
McGraw Hill.
2. Turbo C++ by "Lafore Robert", Edition Frist, 1991, Reprint,
2007, Galgotia Publication.
3. Bruce Eckel, "Thinking in C++", First Edition.
4. Let us C++, "Yeshwant Kanetkar", First Edition, 2006, BPB
Publication.
Information Technology
(Vocational)
Paper-B
Data Base Management System
Practical : 25
Instructions for the paper setters
Note: (i) In theory eight questions are to be set giving the
weightage to all the portions. The candidates are
required to attempt any five. All questions are to
be of equal marks.
(ii) The maximum marks for the paper will be 75.
(iii) As for as possible except in the Computer language
papers. Emphasis should be on algorithm
development.
SECTION-A
Indexing Techniques, Primary, Secondary, Clustering, B
Trees, B+Trees, Hashing (Extendible, Dynamic,and linear)
Database Architectures and Data Models, Network, Hierarchical,
and Relational, Object-Oriented, Relational Model; Relations,
Relational operators and integrity constraints. Relational Algebra
and SQL, Query Optimisation, DDL, DML, DCL.
SECTION-B
Database Design : ER Modeling, mapping to relational
scheme. Normalisation - Ist, 2nd,3rd, BCNF - Concurrancy Control
Lost Update, Temporary Update , Locking Mechanisms, Binary
Locks, Shared and Exclusive Locks, 2 Phase Locking protocol,
Timestamping approches. Recovery Mechanism Motivations,
Transactions , System Log, Commit Points , Checkpoints , immediate

& Deferred Update Protocols Shadow paging. Distributed
Databases Introduction, Fragmentation policies, Object Oriented
Databases.
References :
1. Database System Concepts by Abraham & Henry F. Korth,
McGraw Hill, Edition, 2006.
2. Introduction to Database Systems by Navathe, 2nd Edition,
Pearson Publication.
AUTOMOBILE MAINTENANCE
(Vocational)
Paper - A (Theory)
Time : 3 hours Maximum Marks : 100
Periods per week Theory 6
Instructions for the paper setter.
Question paper should be set strictly according to the syllabus and
preferably in Punjabi.
The language of the paper should be straight and simple Punjabi.
Paper A : Theory shall consists of three parts :
(a) Ten short compulsory questions requiring short replies of
five lines each. Each question carries two marks.
(b) Ten Questions of six marks each giving to the points replies.
Eight questions carrying forty eight marks will be attempted
by the candidates.
(c) Two questions of descriptive type to be attempted by the
candidates out of set of four questions. Total marks 32.
The question paper should cover the whole syllabus.
Part-I
Automatic Electrical Systems : -
Basic Automotive Circuits, Starting motor, Starting Devices, Bendix
starting Drive, Overrunning clutch drive, Solinoid shift systems,
Starting motor troubleshooting, Generator, Generator principles,
Generation of Alternating currents, Generation of direct current,
Generator construction, generator output control, Cut out relay,
Regulator, Alternator type generator, Generating Systems
troubleshooting.
Ignition Systems :-
Introduction, Qualities of a good ignition system, Battery ignition
system, Components of battery ignition system, Ignition coil,
Condenser, Contact breaker, Distributer, Ignition Advance, Methods

of ignition advance, Spark plug, Classification Sparking Plugs, Spark
Plug Gap, Magneto Ignition System, Rotating Armature Type,
Rotating magnet type, Low and high tension types, Special type of
magneto, Ignition System troubleshooting.
Part-II
Engines :
Introduction, Classification of automobile engines, Engine cycle,
Number of strokes, With respect to fuels use, Number and
arrangement of cylinders, Classification based on valve
arrangements, Classification based on type of cooling, Classification
based on type of valve, Special type engines, Square engines, Fuel
cell, Electric vehicles, Engine position.
Ignition systems :
No spark, Spark at some wires, Intermittent spark, Weak spark,
servicing ignition system.
Piston Assembly :-
Piston, Piston rings, Analysis of piston rings, piston pins, Materials
Engine Service Crank Shift and Cylinder Blocks :
Review of design, Analysis of Crank shift for strength, Surface
hardening of crank shaft and their materials.
Clutch Operation :
Clutch, Requirement of clutch, Types of Clutch, Friction clutches,
Clutch components, Friction materials, Clutch lining materials,
Bonding materials, Fluid coupling, Torque transmission,
Characteristics of the fluid flywheel, Advantages of fluid flywheel,
Clutch troubleshooting, Fluid flywheel troubleshooting.
Diesel Engine Service :
Fuel pump tests, Fuel Delivery, Pressure, Stroke, Carborator test
and adjustments, Fuel level, Float level, Adjustment.
AUTOMOBILE MAINTENANCE
Paper-B
(Practical)
Periods per week : Practical 4 Internal Asses. : 20
Total : 100
Distribution of Marks
Three visits to Motor Workshop 15
Oral Examination 10
Written Test 10
Test of Workshop jobs 25
Identification of Workshop Tools 10
Scale Instrument readings 10
1. Self stater opening from the voh and Refitting
2. Dynmo/Alternator Dismentling and assembling.
3. Ignition Timing with the Engine
4. Engine fault Diagonising.
5. Engine Piston and Rings fitting
6. Clutch Dismentling and assembling
7. Clutch Fitting with Engine
8. Cut out opening and fitting with Engine
References :
1) Basic Automobile Engineering (Punjabi Edition) Written by
C.P.Nakra, Published by Dhanpat Rai and Sons, Jalandhar,
(Delhi).
2) Royal Basic Automobile Engineering Written by R.K.Kalia.
(Punjabi Edition).
Environmental Studies (Compulsory)

Theory Lectures : 50 Hours
Time for Theory examination M. Marks : 75+25=100
Regular students: 2½ Hours Regular students :75
Private students : 3 Hours Private students : 100
Instructions for paper setters : The question paper will consist
of two sections for regular students and three sections for private
students.
Unit-I
(Compulosry for all students)
Section A (30 Marks) : It will consist of ten short answer type
questions. Candidates will be required to attempt six questions, each
question carrying five marks. Answer to any of the questions should
not exceed two pages.
Section B (45 Marks) : It will consist of six essay type questions.
Candidates will be required to attempt three questions, each question
carrying fifteen marks. Answer to any of the questions should not
exceed four pages.
1. The multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies:
Definition, scope and importance, Need for public awareness.
2. Natural resources : Natural resources and associated
problems.
a) Forest resources: Use of over exploitation, deforestation,
case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams and their
effects on forests and tribal people.
b) Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface
and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water,
dams-benefits and problems.
c) Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental
effects of extracting and using mineral resources, case
studies.
d) Food resources : World food problems, change caused
by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern
agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging,

salinity, case studies.
e) Energy resources : Growing energy needs, renewable
and non-renewable energy sources, use of alternate
energy sources. Case studies.
f) Land resources : Land as a resource, land degradation,
man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification.
g) Role of an individual in conservation of natural
resources, Equitable use of resources for sustainable
lifestyles.
3. Ecosystem
Concept of an ecosystem, Structure and function of an
ecosystem, Producers, consumers and decomposers, Energy
flow in the ecosystem, Ecological succession, Food chains,
food webs and ecological pyramids.
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and
function of the following ecosystems :
a. Forest ecosystem
b. Grassland ecosystem
c. Desert ecosystem
d. Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers,
oceans, estuaries).
4. Biodiversity and its conservation
Definition : Genetic, species and ecosystem diversity,
Biogeographical classification of India.
Value of biodiversity : Consumptive use, productive use,
social, ethical, aesthetic and option values.
Biodiversity of global, National and local levels, India as
mega-diversity nation, Hot-spots of biodiversity.
Threats to biodiversity : Habitat loss, poaching of wildlife,
man wildlife conflicts Endangered and endemic species of
India.
Conservation of biodiversity : In situ and Ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity.
5. Environmental pollution
Definition, Causes, effects and control measures of :
a) Air Pollution
b) Water Pollution
c) Soil Pollution
d) Marine Pollution
e) Noise Pollution
f) Thermal Pollution
g) Nuclear Hazards
Solid Waste Management : Causes effects and control
measures of urban and industrial wastes.
Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
Pollution case studies
Disaster Management : Floods, Earthquake, Cyclone and
Landslides
6. Social Issues and Environment
* From unsustainable to sustainable development
* Urban problems related to energy
* Water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed
management
* Resettlement and rehabilitation of people; its problems and
concerns. Case studies
* Environmental ethics : Issues and possible solutions.
* Climate change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer
depletion, nuclear accidents and holocause. Case studies.
* Wasteland reclamation
* Consumerism and waste products
* Environmental Protection Act
* Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
* Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
* Wildlife Protection Act
* Forest Conservation Act
* Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation
* Public awareness
7.Human population and the environment

*Population growth, variation among nations
*Population explosion-Family welfare programme
*Environment and human health
*Human rights
*Value education
*HIV/AIDS
*Women and child welfare
*Role of information technology in environment and human
health
* Case studies
Unit-II
(Compulsory for Private Candidate only)
Section C ( 25 Marks)
I will consist of two questions. Candidate will be required to
attempt one question only. Answer to the question should not exceed
5 pages. In this section the students will be required to write on the
enviroment of an area/ecosystem/village/industry/disaster/mine/dam/
agriculture of an area/ecosystem/village/industry/disaster/mine/dam/
agriculture filed/waste management/hospital etc. with its salient
features, limitations, their implications and suggestion for
improvement.
Environmental Studies (Field Study)

(Practical for Regular Students Only)
The candidates will be required to undertake field study trips
to study animals and plants in their natural habitats, status of pollution
in the area and to undertake tree plantation drives. The candidates
will be required to submit the field study report of about 10 pages
listing their observation of the habitats studied and their contributions
for conservation of habitats. The reports will be evaluated by the
examiner appointed by the Principal of the concerned college.
HOME SCIENCE
Scheme of Study
Paper Theory Practical
Period/week
Clothing 2 hrs. 4 hrs./week
Textiles 3 hrs. 2 hrs./week
Name of Paper No. Time Marks Internal Total
Clothing 1 3 hrs. 40 100
Textiles & 1 3 hrs. 50 10
Laundry
Clothing practical 1 3 hrs. 45 15 60
Laundry practical 1 2 hrs. 30 10 40
200
Note : Internal assessment should be based on
1. i) Assignment/test/seminars and attendance for theory &
Practical.
ii) Practical exam. of clothing & Laundry should be held
separately.
(at different times on different day) clothing 3 hrs.
Laundry 2 hrs.
2. Practical examinations to be held before the final theory
exams.
HOME SCIENCE
Paper-A
Clothing (Theory)
The question paper will consist of five sections: A,B,C,D
and E. Section A, B,C & D will have two questions from the
respective sections of the syllabus & will carry 8 marks each.
Section E will consist of 8 short answer type questions covering the
entire syllabus uniformly carrying one mark each.
the section A,B,C & D of the question paper and entire section E.
Time : 2 Hours/week Maximum Marks : 40
Section-A
1. Equipments & supplies in clothing :
Construction—their use & care
II. Sewing Machine :
(a) Parts of Sewing Machine & its accessories
(b) Common defects in sewing machine & their remedies
(c) Care of Sewing machines
Section-B
I. Recording of Body measurements. Care to be taken while
taking body measurement.
II. Different methods of developing a design-Drafting, Pattern
making, Draping (in brief) their advantages and
disadvantages.
Section-C
Aesthetics in clothing
I. Principles of design such as Harmony, Balance, Rhythm,
emphasis & proportion.
II. Elements of design such as colour, lime, form and texture,

shape, line.
Section-D
III Selection of suitable clothes for the following groups :
a) Infants b) Toddlers
c) School going children d) Adolescents
e) Adults f) elderly
IV Care & storage of garments of cotton, wool and silk.
HOME SCIENCE
Paper-B
Textiles (Theory)
The question paper will consist of five sections: A,B,C,D
and E. Section A, B,C & D will have two questions from the
respective sections of the syllabus & will carry 10 marks each.
Section E will consist of 10 short Type/objective type questions
covering the entire syllabus uniformly carrying one mark each.
the section A,B,C & D of the question paper and entire section E.
Time 3 Hours/week Maximum Marks : 50
Section-A
1. Classification of textile fibres
2. Manufacture (in Brief) & properties of different fibres.
a) Cotton b) Linen
c) Silk d) Wool
e) Nylon f) Polyester
g) Rayon viscose & Acetate
Section-B
1. Different types of yarns—simple, Novelty & Bulk yarn in
brief.
2. Fabric construction—A brief study of basic weaves
a) i) Simple weaves—basket, rib.
b) ii) Twill-broken twill, Stain, Sateen.
Knitting, Knotting, felting, bonding.
Section-C
1. Bleach—Oxidising, reducing bleaches & their suitability to
different fabrics.
2. Finishing—Sizing, designing, calendaring, sanforising,

mercerisation, crease resistant, water proofing & water
repellenty, flame resistant & flame proofing.
Section-D
1. Application of colour on fabric
Dyeing—simple dying of cotton
Resist—Tie Dye and Batik
2. Printing a) Block Printing
b) Screen Printing
c) Roller Printing
3. Methods of Laundry/Washing.
4. Types and uses of starches and blues.
HOME SCIENCE
Clothing Practical
Time : 4 hours/week Marks : 60
Internal Ass. : 20
1. Make samples of the following :
a) Tacking, running stich, hemming, Back Stitch, Button
hole stitch, Fastners.
b) Seams—Flat seam, counter seam, Mantua, maker; Run
& Fell seam, French seam.
c) i) Processes—Continuous wrap, two piece placket
opening, pleats, gathering into a band, tucks.
ii) Embroidery—10 Fency embroidery stiches.
2. Drafting of the following :
i) child's bodice block
ii) sleeve— a) plain sleeve
b) Puff sleeve
iii) collers—flat—and raised peterpan, cape coller, baby
coller.
iv) Jangia, Bloomer, childs bodice block & plain sleeve
block.
v) Drafting of a) Adults bodice block
b) plain sleeve
vi) Petticot
vii) Salwar
viii) Kameez
3. Construction of following garments :
Children : Bloomer, Jangia, Child's gathered frock
with any sleeve & coller.
Ladies : Saree, Petticot, Blouse, Salwar Kameez
List of equipment required for the practical for a group of

12 students
Clothing
1. Simple Sewing Machines 12
2. Special purpose Machines 02
3. Over Locking Machine 01
4. Display Boards 02
5. Drafting Tables 04
6. Cutting Tables 04
7. Stools 12
8. Sewing Kits.
a) Ordinary shears 1 each
b) Pinking Shears 4
c) Drafting Scarles 12
d) Measuring tapes 12
c) Tailoring chalks 02 boxes
f) Irons 4
g) Ironing Boards 4
h) Sleeve Boards 4
Clothing
1. Singer Sewing Book.
Mary Brooks pichen
McGraw-Hill Book Company Inc.
New York Tronto London 1953
2. Basic processing & Clothing Construction
She-rie Doongaji & Raushni Deshpande.
Raaj Prakashan, New Delhi (Fourth Revised edition)
3. Pattern Drafting
Vol. III, Kamakura-Shobo Publishing Co. Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan, 1972 (fifty edition)
4. A Manual of Children Clothing.
Savitri Pandit, Orient Longmans Ltd., Bombay, 1967.
5. Pattern Cutting & Making up the professional approach.
Martin M. Shoben & Janet P. Ward. Pub., CBS
Publishers & Distributors (p) Ltd., New Delhi.
6. Mc Call's Sewing in Colour Pub. The Hamlyn Pub. group
Ltd., N.Y.
7. Encyclopedia of Dress Making Pub., Marshall Canvendish
Books Ltd., London
8. Creative clothing construction.
Allyne Bane, McGraw Hill Book Company.
New York, St. Louis San Francisco, Tronto, London,
Sydney, Second edition 1966.
9. Dress Pattern Designing.
The Basic Principles of Cut and Fit,
Natalie Bray,
Crosby Lock wood & sons Ltd., London, 1961
10. Practical Dress Design
Principals of Fitting and Pattern Making,
Mable D. Erwin,
The Macmillian Company, New York.
Ninth Printing, 1966.
11. Indian Embriodery
Its Veriegated Charms,
Savtri Pandit,
Savtri Pandit Faculty of Home Science,

Baroda, 1976, first edition.
Clothing
12. Singer Sewing Book, Gladys Cunigham Pub., Golden Press,
New York.
13. Clothing Construction-Evelyn A Mansfield, Pub., Houghton
Mifflin Co., Boston.
14. The Bishop Method of Clothing Construction, Bishop &
Arch, Pub., Sir Issac Pitman & Sons Ltd., London.
15. The Basic Book of Sewing, Eve Harlow Pub., Octopus
Books Ltd., London-I.
16. Better Homes & gardens sewing, casual clothes pub.,
Meredith Press & Pub Co., America.
17. Simple Dress making, Maureen Goldsworthy Pub: Mills 7
Boon Ltd., London.
HOME SCIENCE
Textiles & Laundry
Time : 2 hrs./Week Practicals Practical : 30
Internal Ass. : 10
Max.Marks : 40
1. Testing of cotton, wool & Silk, Nylon by microscope & by
Burning test.
2. Stain removal : Rust, Coffee, Tea, Paint, Nail Polish, Lipstick,
Perfume, Blood, Boot Polish, Ink (Ball Pen) & Curry, Juice.
3. Spot cleaning of wooden garments.
4. Simple house hold dyeing of cotton fabric 12"x12"
5. Preparation of an article of Tie and Dye.
6. Hand Printing
(a) Block
(b) Screen
(c) Stencil
Note :
1. University should appoint one internal examiner alongwith
the external.
2. Preparation of dye/starch/blue should be prepared by
students.
3. Practical group should not exceed 15 students.
Textiles
1. Sinks 6
2. Basins 12
3. Buckets 12
4. Mugs 12
5. Bhagonas 4
6. Gas burners 4
7. Enamel bowls 24
8. Scrubbing boards 6
9. Scrubbing brushes 12
10. Microscopes 4
11. Slides 2 boxes
12. Slips covers 2 boxes
13. Test tubes 1 box
14. Test tube holders 12
15. Spirit lamps 12
16. Bhagonas for dyeing 12 big
17. Iron Karachis used for was heating 6
18. Painting brushes 24
19. Dyeing gloves (rubber) 12 pairs
Books Recommended - Textiles
1. Textile Fabrics and their selection, Isabel N. Wingate,
Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1970.
2. Fundamentals of Textiles and their care, Susheela, Dantyagi
Orient Longmans, Bombay, Calcutta, Madras, New Delhi,
Reprinted, 1968.
3. Household Textiles and Laundry Work, Durga Deulkar
Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi 1973.
4. Indonesian Batic & Ikat, Former Bedrich, Butterworth,
London, 1982.
5. Ideas for Fabric Painting and dyeing Gooch, Peter H.,
Charles Cribner's, New York, 1974.
6. Encyclopedia of Textiles, Fibres and Nonwoolen Fabrics,
Grayson Martin, John Willey, New York, 1984.
7. Textile Identification conservation and Preservation, King
Resalic Resso, New Jersey, 1985.
8. Modern Textiles, Dorothy Siegert Lyle Pub., John Wiley &

Sons Inc., N.Y.
9. Textiles in the Home, W.Munn Rankin & E.M.Hildreth Pub.,
Allman & Sons, London.
10. Household Textiles & Laundry work, Durga Deulkar Pub.,
Orient Longman Ltd., N.D.
11. Fundamentals of Textiles & Their Care, Susheela Dantyogi
Pub., Orient Longman Ltd., N.D.
12. Batic Kala, Sarla Sudershan Pub., Pustak Mahal, Khaari
Baoli.
13. Watson's-Textiles Design & Colour, Z. Grosicki Pub.,
Universal Publishing Corp., Bombay.
14. Tie Dye Textiles of India, Veronica Murthy & Rosemary
Crill
Pub., Mapju publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahamedabad.
15. Man made fibers, R.W. Moncrieff Pub., Nerunes
Butterworths, London.
16. Batic Unlimited, Joanifer Gibbs Pub., Pitman Publishing,
London.
17. Textiles, Normia Hellen & Jane Saddler Pub., The Macmillan
Co., N.Y.
18. Textiles Fabrics & their selection, Isabel B., Wingate &
June F., Monler Pub., Prentice Hall, Inc Engelwood Cliffs.
N.J.
19. Textiles Fibres and Their Use, Katharine, Paddock Hess.
Pub., Oxford & IBH pub. Co., New Delhi. 13.
20. Textiles Fibre to Fabrie, Bernard, P. Corbman Pub., Megraw
Hill Book Co., London.
COSMETOLOGY (Theory Elective)

SCHEME OF STUDIES
Name of Paper periods/week Marks
Theory 4 50
Practical Paper-A 4 60
Practical Paper-B 4 60
Job Training - 30
200
Name of Paper Paper Hours. Marks
Th. Pr.
Theory 1 - 3 Hrs. 50
Practical Paper-A - 1 3 Hrs 60
Practical Paper-B - 1 3 Hrs. 60
Job Training - - 30
200
Instructions for Theory Exam :
Note : Question paper will consist of three sections as
follows:
Section-A will consist of 6 very short answer type questions
with answer to each question up to 5 lines in length. All questions
will be compulsory. Each question will carry 2 marks; total
Section-B will consist of short answer type questions with
will be set by the examiner & eight will be attempted by the
candidates. Each question will carry 3 marks. The total weightage
Section-C will consist of essay type questions with answer
by the examiner & the candidates will be required to attempt two.

being 14 marks.
I. Basic knowledge of Skeltal System, Muscular, Respiratory,
Excretory, Endocrine.
II. Hair :
a) Structure and Division of Hair
b) Forms of Hair
c) Hair growth and regeneration.
d) Disorders of Hair and Scalp :
e) Contagious diseases.
III. Health and Diet
a) Balanced Diet.
b) Principles of Meal Planning.
c) Concept of energy requirement and BMR
d) Health Counselling.
e) Overweight and underweight.
IV. Colour:
a) Analysis of Client
b) Colour
c) Colour Key Programme and its relation to skin, eyes
and hair.
d) Selecting a colour key
e) Textures, lighting, cosmetics, Hair colouring and
wardrobe
COSMETOLOGY
(A) Hair Care
Practical
Max Marks :-60
Practical : 4 week
I. Hair Care:
a) Shampooing, Bleached hair and giving shampoo.
b) Types of shampoos and procedures.
c) Hair rinses.
d) Hair conditioners.
II. Scalp Treatments and Hair Conditioners
a. Introduction - Hair Brushing,Scientific Brushing.
b. Scalp manipulations - Benefits and Bave scalp manipulations
c. Corrective hair & Scalp treatments-Treatment for dry, oily,
dry dandruff, corrective hair conditioners, Hair treatments
using a thermal cap, listant conditioners.
III. Removing Unwanted Hair - Choosing a method, Tineeing,
Depilatouies, waxing, Bleaching, Basic concept of Electrolysis.
COSMETOLOGY
Practical : 4 week Max. Marks-60
Practical - B
Hair Shaping & Styling
1. Basic Hair Shaping
a. Hair shaping instruments and their using.
b. Sectioning for a Hair cut.
c. Hair Texture as it relates to hair Shaping
d. A medium and long length hair cut.
2. Wet Hairstyling
a. Techniques & Equipment used.
b. Principles of Design.
c. Shapings and Moulding.
d. Finger Waving, Pin Curls, Roller setting.
3. Hair styling-Buns-at least 5
Training Marks : 30
Students are required to undergo 3 weeks training in a reputed
saloon, students will gain experience on tasks related to practicals.
To be assessed by Internal Examiner.
SCHEME OF STUDIES
TRAVEL AND TOURISM (Elective)
Paper A Management of Travel and 100
Tourism
Paper B Tourism Marketing and Travel 100
Agency Business
Paper-A
MANAGEMENT OF TRAVEL AND TOURISM
Time : 3 hrs. Max. Marks : 100
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER SETTER
The Theory Paper consists of two Parts A and B (short
questions and long questions).
Part A : The examiner will set 12 short questions, 3 questions
from each section of 02 marks. The candidate will have
to attempt 10 questions out of 12 questions.
(10x02=20 Marks)
Part B: The examiner will set 8 long questions, 2 questions from
each section of 20 marks. The candidate will have to
attempt 4 questions out of 8 question.
(04x20=80 Marks)
Unit-I
Chapter 1. Strategic Planning and Strategic Marketing
Business Environment.
Alliances - Market Sharing.
Takeovers and Mergers
Chapter 2. Operations Management
Booking
Reservation
Blocking
Reconfirmation.
Unit-II
Chapter 3. Project Planning
Conceptualizing a Project
Project Cycle.
Techno-economic survey.
Chapter 4. Project Review
Need for a project review
Project appraisal and evaluation
Destination Development
Unit-III
Chapter 5. Financial Management
Financial statements.
Financial ratios and performance
Credit system.
Commission.
Direct sales.
Chapter 6. Banking and Forex
Banking Operations.
Forex Management.
Money Transfers.
Unit-IV
Chapter 7. New Trends in Tourism
Health tourism.
Ski resorts and Adventure sports.
Heritage tours and Eco-tourism
Rural tourism and Space tourism
Chapter 8. Event Management and MICE

Role of events for promotion of tourism
Ganga Mahotsava, Lucknow Mahotsava and
Taj Mahotsava
Concept of MICE
Conference/conventions and exhibitions.
· Harris, P. (1995) Accounting and Finance for the
International Hospitality Industry, Butterworth
Heinemann: UK
· Harrison, D. (ed) (1992) Tourism and the Less Developed
Countries, Wiley: UK
· Goodall, B. and Ashworth, G. (eds.) (1988) Marketing in
the Tourism Industry: The Promotion of Destination
Region, UK
· O.Cornnor, P. (1996) Using Computers in Hospitality
Cassell: UK
· National Geographic and Discovery Channel Programs.
TRAVEL AND TOURISM (Elective)

Paper-B
TOURISM MARKETING AND TRAVEL AGENCY
BUSINESS
Time: 3 hrs. Max. Marks: 100
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PAPER SETTER
The Theory Paper consists of two Parts A and B (short
questions and long questions).
Part A : The examiner will set 12 short questions, 3 questions
from each section of 02 marks. The candidate will have
to attempt 10 questions out of 12 questions.
(10x02=20 Marks)
Part B : The examiner will set 8 long questions, 2 questions from
each section of 20 marks. The candidate will have to
attempt 4 questions out of 8 question.
(04x20=80 Marks)
Unit-I
Chapter 1. Tourism Product
Principles and concepts of marketing.
Meaning and nature of tourism marketing.
How tourism marketing is different from the marketing
of other products.
Marketing mix.
Market research vs. Marketing research.
Chapter 2. Pricing
Marketing vs. Selling.
Consumer behavior.
Buyer decision making process.
Segmentation, targeting and positioning.
Pricing strategies.
Unit-II
Chapter 3. Tour Packaging
Concept and characteristics
Methodology and pricing of tour packaging.
Designing and printing of tour brochure.
Chapter 4. Marketing of packaged tours
Marketing in different sectors of tourism
Leisure and hospitality.
Unit-III
Chapter 5. Travel Agency Business
Linkages in tourism and other sectors - travel agency,
transportation, accommodation, food, nutrition and
catering.
Travel agency and its role in the tourism development.
Functions and organizational structure of a travel
agency and the tour operators.
Chapter 6. Travel Agents
Types of travel agents and their responsibilities.
Procedures for becoming a travel agent and tour
operator in India.
Method of getting IATA recognition and the
advantages enjoyed by an
IATA recognized travel agent.
Unit-IV
Chapter 7. Transportation
Transportation and tourism development.
Role of transportation in the growth of travel agency
and tour operator business in India.
Chapter 8. Accommodation
Accommodation and tourism.
Types of accommodation and their organization.
· Kotler, Philip. Marketing Management: Analysis,
Planning Implementation and Control, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi.
· Brigs, Susan. Successful Tourism Marketing: A Practical
Handbook, Kogan Page, London, 1997.
· Middleton, Victor T.C. Marketing in Travel and Tourism,
Butterwort Heinemaun, Oxford, 1994.
· Brunt, Paul. Market Research in Travel and Tourism,
Butterworth Heinemaun, 1997.
· Foster, Dennis L. Sales and Marketing for the Travel
Professional, McGraw-Hill, 1993.
· Witt, Stephen R. & Moutinoh, Luiz. Tourism Marketing
and Management Handbook Prentice Hall. London. 1994.
· Baker, M.J. Marketing: An Introductory Text, Macmillan,
1985.
· Veal, A.J. Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism: A
Practical Guide, Longman,l992
· Mohamed. H. Peeru. Marketing: A Financial Approach,
Kaveri, New Delhi, 1997.
· Aaker, David A. & Co. Advertising Management, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi, 1995.
· Agarwal, Surinder. Travel Agency Management,
Communication India, 1993
· Negi, Jagmohan Travel Agency and Tour Operation:
Concepts and Principles, Kanishka, New Delhi, 1998.
· Foster, Dennis L. An Introduction to Travel and Tourism,
McGraw-Hill, 1994.
· Bhatia, A.K. Tourism Development - Principles and
Practices, Sterling, 1992.
FACULTY OF ARTS & SOCIAL SCIENCES AND SCIENCES
SYLLABUS
For
B.A./B.Sc.Part-II
(12+3 SYSTEM OF EDUCATION)
EXAMINATIONS - 2010-11
GURU NANAK DEV UNIVERSITY

AMRITSAR
GURU NANAK DEV UNIVERSITY

AMRITSAR
B.A./B.Sc. Pass Course Examination

(12+3 System of Education)
PART-II
i) The Part-II examination shall be open to a candidate who
has passed, not less than one academic year previously,
Part-I (under 10+-2+3 System of Education) examination of
the B.A./B.Sc. of this University.
ii) Any other examination recognised by this University as
equivalent to any of the corresponding examinations
mentioned above.
Note : Detailed ordinances relating to examination

for this class are contained in the Guru Nanak
Dev University Calendar, Vol. II, Read with
Syndicate Decisions/Amendments made from
time to time.
CONTENTS
1. English (Compulsory) 1
2. English (Elective) 3
3. Functional English (Vocational) 7
4. pMj`bI l`zmI 11
5. Punjabi (Elective) 12
6. k`rjI pMj`bI 14
7. Punjab History & Culture 17
8. Sanskrit (Elective) 19
9. Sanskrit (Vocational) 23
10. Hindi 25
11. Functional Hindi 28
12. Russian 34
13. French 36
14. Urdu (Elective) 38
15. Persian (Elective) 42
16. History 46
17. Political Science 50
18. Defence and Strategic Studies 59
19. Public Administration 69
20. Sociology 73
21. Psychology 76
22. Geography 81
23. Journalism & Mass Communication 90
24. Mass Communication & Video 92
Production (Vocational)
25. Education 96
26. Physical Education 100
27. Philosophy 105

28. Drm EiDEYn 111
29. Music (Instrumental) 116
30. Music (Vocal) 121
31. Indian Classical Dance 125
32. Tabla 129
33. Fine Art (Drawing & Painting) 133
34. History of Art 139
35. Commercial Art 141
36. Sculpture 143
37. Still Photography & Audio 145
Production (Vocational)
38. Dramatic Art 152
39. Gemology & Jewellery Design 154
40. Commerce 157
41. Economics 161
42. Quantitative Techniques 165
43. Industrial Economics 169
44. Agricultural Economics & Marketing 173
45. Rural Development 177
46. Dairy Farming (Vocational) 181
47. Office Management & Secretarial 184
Practice (Vocational)
48. Tourism and Travel Management 196
49. Tourism and Hotel Management (Vocational) 201
50. Income Tax Procedure and Practice 206
51. Advertising, Sales Promotions & Sales Management 213
52. Bioinformatics (Vocational) 218
53. Botony 226
54. Zoology 234
55. Microbial and Food Technology 244
56. Microbiology (Vocational) 249
57. Industrial Microbiology (Vocational) 254
58. Biotechnology (Vocational) 259
59. B.Sc. Human Genetics 266
60. Mathematics 272
61. Statistics 276

Ba Ii

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ba Ii

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ba Ii

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.A./B.Sc.

Part-II (12+3 System of Education) 1

OUTLINES OF TESTS, SYLLABI AND COURSES

prescribed text. The questions from literary texts will be

2. Fresh Showers, G.N.D.U. Publication

Section-C will comprise 2 questions, each carrying 16 marks.

FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH (Vocational)

The objective is to teach the students the technique of writing

(f) At the customs, (g) At the International Airport, (h) Booking

pM j `bI (ielY k itv)

sm~ : 3 GMty k@ul EMk : 50

a) ivigE`pn isrjx` : in@q vrqoN dIE~ 50 vsq~ dy ky aunH~ dy

PUNJAB HISTORY AND CULTURE

Note:- Each question paper shall consist of two sections viz

7. Banda Bahadur and his achievements.

(ii) lqân~Hksn ls 2 x|ka'k i| nsdj ,d dh lizlax O;k[;k iwNh tk,xhA

Paper—B ¼O;kdj.k rFkk vuqokn½

iz'u iz=k ds 3 Hkkx gksaxs&

Note:The question Paper will be set in Hindi.

3-vyadkj&fu#i.k rFkk eqgkojs] yksdksfDr;kaA

4- dsl rS;kj djuk

2- miyC?k foKkiuksa dks ,df=kr djuk vkSj mudk vuqokn

¼x½ eq[; lekpkj i=k% ifjp; vkSj bfrgkl

1. A Dialogue in French of about one page on the topic covered

2. An informal letter in French (to friend & family) 10

3. Questions on Applied Grammar pertaining to the text 40

(Exercises from the textbook)

4. Conjugations of verbs used in the text) 15

5. Short answer questions from the textbook. 20

The general questions are based on the vocabulary of the

Note :- Instructions for the paper-setters/examiners :

7. The Phase of Non-Co-operation : Emergence of Gandhi;

of the sacred places, The Harimandir. Compilation of the

15. M.V. Pylee, Constitutional Government in India, Bombay,

GAP PAGE NO.: 53-55

15. M.V. Pylee, Constitutional Government in India, Bombay,

Defence and Strategic Studies

2. Military organizations and techniques of fighting of

iv) The Character of the Civil War

Defence and Strategic Studies

2. Kautilya's Philosophy of War

iii) Description of the battle.

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100

3. Dhaliwal et al: Fundamentals of Environmental Science,

Opponent-Process & Evolutionary). Auditory sensation : Structure

Learning: Classical and operant conditioning, Basic Processes;

Major soil types and their distribution; problems of soil erosion

4. Gupta, S.P. : The Punjab : An Overview, Ess

b) Agriculture data (land utilization, distribution of crops,

Journalism and Mass Communication

Journalism and Mass Communication

Mass Communications & Video Production

- Part B consists of eight questions. Candidtes have to do

- Part C consists of four questions and candidates have to do

Question paper will be set in English only but the medium of

Magnetic Recording Principles

Mass Communications & Video Production

Note : Practicals to be conducted by external examiner.

3. Sports and Economy.